JP7313961B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

TECHNICAL FIELD The present invention relates to a game machine such as a pachinko machine or a slot machine on which games can be played.

As a game machine, game balls as game media are shot into a game area by a shooting device, and when the game balls enter a prize winning area such as a winning hole provided in the game area, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the player. Furthermore, there is a type of pachinko machine that is provided with a variable display device capable of variably displaying (also referred to as "variable") identification information, and is configured to change the game state (the state of the gaming machine, specifically, the state in which the gaming machine is being controlled) when the display result of the variable display of the identification information on the variable display device results in a specific display result (so-called pachinko machine).

After setting a predetermined number of bets for one game of predetermined game media, the player operates the start lever to start variable display of the identification information by the variable display device, and the player operates a stop button provided corresponding to each variable display device to stop the variable display of the identification information within a predetermined maximum delay time from the operation timing. game media are paid out and a specific winning occurs, the game state is changed to a state in which a predetermined game value is given to the player (so-called slot machine).

The game value means that the state of the variable winning ball device provided in the game area of the gaming machine becomes a state advantageous to the player who is likely to win the winning ball, the right to be in an advantageous state for the player is generated, or the condition of winning ball payout becomes easy to be satisfied.

In the pachinko game machine, when a predetermined specific display mode is derived and displayed as a display result of variable display of a special pattern (identification information) started on a variable display device based on the winning of a game ball in a starting winning hole, a "jackpot" is generated. It should be noted that the derivation display means that the symbol (final stop symbol) is finally stopped and displayed. When a big win occurs, for example, the big win opening is opened a predetermined number of times, and the game shifts to a big win game state in which the ball is likely to win. Then, in each open period, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the large winning openings are won, the large winning opening is closed. The number of openings of the big winning opening is fixed to a predetermined number (for example, 15 rounds). An opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is determined for each opening, and even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the big winning opening is closed after the opening time has elapsed. Hereinafter, the opening period of each big winning slot may be called a round. Moreover, the game in a round may be called a round game.

Also, in the variable display device, a pattern other than the final stop pattern (for example, a middle pattern among the left, middle, and right patterns) continues for a predetermined period of time to stop, oscillate, scale, or deform in a state consistent with a specific display result. ) is called reach production. In addition, the reach state and its state are referred to as a reach mode. Further, the variable display including the reach effect is called the reach variable display. Then, if the display result of the pattern variably displayed on the variable display device is not a specific display result, it becomes "missing" and the variable display state ends. A player plays a game while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

As a game machine, there is a game machine capable of executing a suggestive performance suggesting control to be in an advantageous state and a preparatory performance for notifying that the suggestive performance will be executed before the suggestive performance is executed. For example, Patent Literature 1 describes an effect of stocking (displaying) arrows that change the pending display around the pending display.

JP 2017-131277 A

However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Literature 1, there is a risk that the interest may rather decrease due to the execution of another effect during the execution of the effect that raises the degree of expectation.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION Accordingly, it is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine that can maintain interest.

(A) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state for the player,
a suggestive effect executing means capable of executing a suggestive effect suggesting control to the advantageous state;
a preparation effect executing means capable of executing a preparation effect for notifying that the suggestive effect will be executed before the suggestive effect is executed;
The suggestive effect includes a first suggestive effect, a second suggestive effect different from the first suggestive effect, and a third suggestive effect different from the first suggestive effect and the second suggestive effect,
The preparation effect includes a first preparation effect for notifying that the first suggestive effect will be executed, and a second preparation effect for notifying that the second suggestive effect will be executed,
The first preparation effect is executed in an effect mode in which it is possible to recognize that the first suggestive effect is to be executed,
The second preparation effect is a different effect mode from the first preparation effect, and is executed in a effect mode in which it is possible to recognize that the second suggestive effect is to be executed,
The first suggestive effect is executed in one of a plurality of types of effect modes, the first preparation effect is executed in one of a plurality of types of effect modes, and depending on which of the effect modes the first preparation effect is executed, the executable mode of the first suggested effect differs,
The first suggestive effect and the second suggestive effect can be executed without executing the first preparation effect and the second preparation effect,
The third suggestive effect, the first preparation effect and the second preparation effect can be executed in parallel in the same period and independently of each other,
The third suggestion effect is more likely to be executed when neither the first preparation effect nor the second preparation effect is executed than when either the first preparation effect or the second preparation effect is executed.
It is characterized by
Further, (1) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player, and includes power means (for example, a power board), first control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11) that receives power from the power means and performs control, and second control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11) that receives power from the power means and performs control based on instruction information from the first control means. For example, a second effect control CPU 012IW120b mounted on the second effect control board 012IW12b) and a monitoring means that monitors the power supplied to the second control means and notifies the second control means (for example, monitors the power supplied to the second effect control board 012IW12b, and when the power supply voltage is less than a predetermined value (for example, +8V), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b Power supply monitoring that outputs a power off signal. circuit 099IW127), and storage means (for example, backup data memories 099IW210A to 210D of backup memory board 099IW14) capable of retaining stored contents even if the power supply to the game machine is stopped, and the second control means executes different start-up processing according to a notification from the monitoring means when starting control (for example, when a power-off signal is input from the power monitoring circuit 099IW127 at the start of control, a power-off signal is input. The second production control CPU 012IW 120b executes the processing of steps 099IWS001 and 099IWS002.On the other hand, if the power supply shutdown signal is not input from the power monitoring circuit 099IW127 at the time of control start, the log information including the acquired date and time information as the system reset date and time of the second production control board 012IW12b is stored in the log area without waiting for the start of control. When the second effect control CPU 012IW120b executes the processing of steps 099IWS001 and 099IWS003), when the monitoring means notifies that the power supply voltage of the supplied power has changed from less than the predetermined value to the predetermined value or more (for example, when the power supply disconnection signal is input from the power supply monitoring circuit 099IW127 at the start of control, and then the input of the power supply disconnection signal is stopped), based on the instruction information from the first control means. Then, predetermined information (for example, power-on date and time, setting change start date and time, setting confirmation start date and time, RAM clear date and time, etc.) is stored in the storage means (for example, the part where the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b executes processing such as step 099IWS 205, step 012IWS 802, step 012IWS 805, and step 012IWS 809). and a preparation performance executing means capable of executing a preparation performance for notifying that the suggestion performance will be executed before the suggestion performance is executed (for example, a suspension display notice preparation performance, a timer preparation performance, etc.), and the suggestion performance includes a first suggestion performance (for example, a pending display notice preparation performance, a timer preparation performance, etc.), a second suggestion performance (for example, a timer performance) different from the first suggestion performance, and a third suggestion performance different from the first suggestion performance and the second suggestion performance. The preparation effects include a first preparation effect (for example, a hold display notice preparation effect) for notifying that the first suggestion effect will be executed, and a second preparation effect (for example, a timer preparation effect) for foretelling that the second suggestion effect will be executed. It is characterized in that the third suggestion performance is more likely to be executed when neither the first preparation performance nor the second preparation performance is executed than when either one is executed (for example, see FIG. 10-10).
According to such a configuration, optimal processing can be executed depending on the situation. In addition, it is possible to preferably maintain interest.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above, the second control means does not start control (for example, the part where the second effect control CPU 012IW120b executes the processing of steps 099IWS001 and 099IWS002) until it is notified by the monitoring means that the power supply voltage of the supplied power supply is equal to or higher than a predetermined value (for example, +8 V) (for example, until the power supply monitoring circuit 099IW127 stops inputting the power-off signal). You may do so.
According to such a configuration, optimum processing can be executed depending on the situation.

(3) In the game machine of (1) or (2) above, when the monitoring means notifies that the power supply voltage of the supplied power supply is equal to or higher than a predetermined value at the start of control, the second control means displays a predetermined image on the display means and does not store the predetermined information in the storage means (for example, when the system reset of the second effect control board 012IW12b occurs, the initial image is displayed on the image display device 5, but the processing of step 099IWS204 is not executed, and the setting is changed. Since commands, setting confirmation commands, initialization commands, and other commands at power-on are not received, log information relating to them may not be stored.
According to such a configuration, optimal processing can be executed depending on the situation.

(4) In the gaming machine described in (3) above, the storage means includes first storage means (e.g., a first log area for recording log information for amusement arcades) and second storage means (e.g., a second log area for recording log information for game machine manufacturers), and the second control means, at the start of control, when notified by the monitoring means that the power supply voltage of the supplied power supply has changed from less than a predetermined value to not less than the predetermined value, gives predetermined information regarding start-up based on instruction information from the first control means. is stored in the first storage means (for example, the part where the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b executes the processing of step 099IWS204, step 012IWS802, step 012IWS805, step 012IWS809, etc.), and when the monitoring means notifies that the power supply voltage of the supplied power supply is equal to or higher than a predetermined value at the start of control, specific information that can specify that only the second control means has restarted ( For example, log information including the date and time of system reset) may be stored in the second storage means (for example, the part where the second effect control CPU 012IW120b executes the process of N of step 099IWS001 and step 099IWS003).
According to such a configuration, optimal processing can be executed depending on the situation.

(5) In the gaming machine of (4) above, the second control means can execute a first backup process for storing control-related information in the first storage means (for example, a backup process for storing log information in the first log area) and a second backup process for storing control-related information in the second storage means (for example, a backup process for storing log information in the second log area). (see, for example, FIGS. 8-19).
According to such a configuration, optimal processing can be executed depending on the situation.

In addition, the embodiments for carrying out the invention described below include inventions relating to gaming machines of the following (6) to (10). Conventionally, in a game machine, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-131277, there has been a suggesting performance suggesting control to be in an advantageous state and a preparatory performance notifying that the suggesting performance will be executed before the suggesting performance is executed. However, in such a game machine, there is a possibility that the interest is lowered by executing another performance during the execution of the performance that raises the degree of expectation.

The gaming machine of (6) is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player, and is provided with a suggestive effect executing means capable of executing a suggestive effect (for example, a pending display notice effect, a timer effect, a chance notice effect, etc.) that suggests being controlled to the advantageous state, and a preparation effect executing means capable of executing a preparatory effect (for example, a hold display advance notice preparation effect, a timer preparation effect, etc.) that predicts that the suggestive effect will be executed before the suggestive effect is executed. A suggesting effect (e.g., pending display forewarning effect), a second suggesting effect (e.g., timer effect) different from the first suggesting effect, and a third suggesting effect (e.g., second chance forewarning effect) different from the first suggesting effect and the second suggesting effect, and the preparation effect includes a first preparatory effect (e.g., pending display forewarning preparation effect) for notifying that the first suggesting effect will be executed, a second preparatory effect (e.g., timer preparation effect, etc.) for notifying that the second suggesting effect will be executed, and a third suggesting effect. , The first preparation effect and the second preparation effect can be executed in parallel in the same period (see FIGS. 10-11 (A1) and (A2)), and the third suggestion effect is more likely to be executed when neither the first preparation effect nor the second preparation effect is executed than when either the first preparation effect or the second preparation effect is executed (see, for example, FIG. 10-10).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably maintain interest.

(7) In the gaming machine of (6) above, the first preparation effect and the second preparation effect may be executed in different periods (for example, the timer preparation effect may be executed after execution of the pending display notice preparation effect (second effect mode) is completed. See FIG. 10-7 (D)).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably maintain interest.

(8) In the gaming machine of (6) or (7) above, the first suggestive effect is executed in one of a plurality of types of effect modes (e.g., first effect mode (blue), second effect mode (green), third effect mode (red), etc.; see FIG. 10-3(A)), and the first preparation effect is executed in one of a plurality of types of effect modes (e.g., first effect mode (small effect), second effect mode (large effect, etc.; see FIG. 10-3(B)). The performance mode of the executable first suggestive performance may be different depending on which performance mode of the first preparation performance is executed (for example, when the suspension display advance notice preparation performance of the first performance mode is executed, the suspension display preview performance is executed by one of the first to third performance modes, and when the suspension display notice preparation performance of the second performance mode is executed, the suspension display notice performance is executed by one of the second to third performance modes).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably maintain interest.

(9) In any of the above (6) to (8), the suggestive effect can be executed without executing the corresponding preparation effect (for example, when it is decided to execute the pending display advance notice effect or the timer effect, it may be determined that the pending display advance notice preparation effect or the timer preparation effect will not be executed. See Fig. 10-3 (B) and Fig. 10-4 (B)). When the judgment result at the time of winning is a big hit, it is easy to decide to execute the pending display notice effect and the pending display notice preparation effect.In addition, as shown in Fig. 10-4, it is easy to decide to execute the timer effect.However, it may be decided not to execute the timer preparation effect.Therefore, when the pending display notice preparation effect not corresponding to the timer effect is executed, the timer effect is more likely to be executed than when the pending display notice preparation effect is not executed).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably maintain interest.

(10) In any of the above (6) to (9) gaming machines, the ratio of which suggestive effect is executed differs depending on whether or not the preparation effect is executed (for example, when the second effect mode is determined as the effect mode of the pending display advance notice effect and the timer preparation effect, compared to the case where the first effect mode is determined, the ratio of deciding to execute the pending display advance notice effect and the timer preparation effect is higher than when the first effect mode is determined. See Fig. 10-3 (B) and Fig. 10-4 (B)). can be
According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably maintain interest.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in the characteristic portion 099IW. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of a 2nd production|presentation control board. 4 is a configuration diagram showing a configuration example of a backup memory board; FIG. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine in a state in which the gaming machine frame is opened. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; It is an explanatory view showing a jackpot type determination table. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a losing variation pattern determination table; It is an explanatory view showing a non-reach loss variation pattern determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main processing in the characteristic part 099IW. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main processing in the characteristic part 099IW. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main processing in the characteristic part 099IW. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing processing executed when power is turned on; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a display mode of a display monitor in setting change processing; It is a flow chart which shows special design normal processing. It is a flow chart which shows special design normal processing. It is a flow chart which shows a part of production control main processing. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an execution example of backup processing with different degrees of multiplicity; 7 is a flowchart showing an example of processing when a CPU exception event occurs; It is a flow chart which shows an example of timer interruption processing for production control. 9 is a flowchart showing a specific example of command analysis processing; 9 is a flowchart showing a specific example of command analysis processing; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an initial payout determination table; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display start waiting processing; It is an explanatory view showing a pre-game suggestion effect determination table. 9 is a flowchart showing variable display start setting processing; 10 is a flow chart showing an example of in-game suggestive effect determination processing. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a game-in-game suggestion effect determination table; It is a flowchart which shows an example of production|presentation determination processing during a big hit. It is explanatory drawing which shows a suggestion production|presentation determination table in a big hit, a character object production|presentation determination table, and a light-guide plate production|presentation determination table. It is a flow chart which shows ending production processing. 9 is a flowchart showing error notification processing; 9 is a flowchart showing error notification processing; 9 is a flowchart showing error notification processing; 9 is a flowchart showing error notification processing; 4 is a flowchart showing maintenance mode processing; 9 is a flowchart showing setting change time recording processing; 7 is a flowchart showing current time setting processing; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the setting timing of the current time; 7 is a flowchart showing a power failure date and time recording process; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining recording timing of log information of a power failure date and time; It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of a display screen during maintenance mode; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of a display screen during maintenance mode; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of a display screen during maintenance mode; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of a display screen during maintenance mode; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a security cover in Modification 1; It is a figure which shows opening and closing of the frame for game machines in the modified example 1. FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a security cover in modification 2; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing opening and closing of the gaming machine frame in modification 2; It is an explanatory diagram showing a pachinko game machine in the third modification. FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a maintenance history screen in modification 4; FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a maintenance history screen in modified example 5; It is a front view of the pachinko game machine. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating an effect control command. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number; It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; It is an explanatory view showing a jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of various jackpots. (A) is an explanatory view showing a big hit variation pattern determination table (for big win A), (B) is an explanatory view showing a big win variation pattern determination table (for big win B and big win C), and (C) is an explanatory view showing a small win variation pattern determination table. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a deviation pattern determination table; (A) is a front view of a display monitor, (B) is a diagram showing a display mode of the display monitor, and (C) is an explanatory diagram of display contents. It is a flow chart which shows game control main processing. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration example of an effect control data holding area, and (B) is a diagram showing a configuration of a reception command buffer at the time of start winning. It is a flow chart which shows start winning a prize judging processing. It is a flow chart showing a winning random number value determination process. It is a flow chart which shows a part of production|presentation control process processing. It is a flow chart which shows pre-reading notice setting processing. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a determination ratio of a display pattern of a pre-reading advance notice effect; 9 is a flowchart showing variable display start setting processing; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing suggestive effect determination processing during rear variable display; FIG. (A) is a diagram showing a determination ratio of performances to be executed as suggestive performance during rear variable display, and (B) is a diagram showing performance patterns of big win suggestive performance and setting suggestive performance to be executed as suggestive performance during rear variable display. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the production|presentation pattern of a big hit suggestion production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the production|presentation pattern of setting suggestion production|presentation. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing suggestive effect determination processing during front variable display; FIG. (A) is a diagram showing the decision ratio of the effect to be executed as the suggestive effect during the front variable display when execution of the big hit suggesting effect is determined, (B) is a diagram showing the decision ratio of the effect to be executed as the suggestive effect during the front variable display when the execution of the setting suggestive effect is determined, (C) is a diagram showing the effect pattern of the character effect and the timer effect to be executed as the suggestive effect during the front variable display, and (D) is the degree of expectation for the big hit and the degree of expectation to execute the set suggestive effect. It is a figure which shows. (A) is a diagram showing the determination ratio of the effect pattern of the character effect, (B) is a diagram showing the determination ratio of the effect pattern of the timer effect, and (C) is a view showing the contents of each effect pattern of the timer effect. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation execution period in variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect in the variable display of super reach. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing execution determination ratios and execution expectations of setting suggestion effects as suggestive effects during front variable display of character effects and timer effects in a modification; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a display mode of a pending memory display and effect images in a modified example; It is a figure which shows the execution period of the setting suggestion production|presentation by the variable display of normal reach in a modification, non-shortening non-reach, and shortening non-reach. It is a flow chart which shows a part of production|presentation control process processing. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of pre-reading notice setting processing; FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a pending display advance notice effect determination table and a pending display advance notice preparation effect determination table; FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a timer effect determination table and a timer advance notice preparation effect determination table; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a chance eye announcement effect determination table; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of pre-reading notice execution processing; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of execution timings of a pending display notice effect (preparation effect) and a timer effect (preparation effect); FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing the effect modes of the pending display advance notice preparation effect and the timer preparation effect; It is a flow chart which shows an example of a chance notice setting process. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a chance prediction execution propriety determination table; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the effect modes of the pending display advance notice preparation effect and the chance eye advance notice effect;

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko game machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko game machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 forming a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the right side of the game area), a first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided for variable display (also referred to as a special symbol game) of special symbols (also referred to as special symbols) as a plurality of types of special identification information. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

In addition, the "variable display" of the special symbols means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are displayed in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include updating display of a plurality of patterns, scrolling display of a plurality of patterns, deformation of one or more patterns, enlargement/reduction of one or more patterns, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols, which will be described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols to be described later). Variable display may be expressed as variable display or variation.

The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also called "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also called "second special symbols". Also, a special game using the first special game is called a "first special game", and a special game using the second special game is called a "second special game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that variably display the special symbols may be one.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2 . The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5 .

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronism with the first special game and the second special game, a variable display of decoration patterns (designs showing numbers etc.) as a plurality of kinds of decoration identification information different from the special symbols is performed. Here, in synchronism with the first special game or the second special game, decorative patterns are variably displayed (for example, vertically scrolled display or updated display) in the respective ``left'', ``middle'' and ``right'' decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronism is generically called simply variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended and active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. Suspended display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display corresponding display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable representations that are reserved is also referred to as the number of reserved memories. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory count and the second reserved memory count is also referred to as the total reserved memory count.

A first suspension display 25A and a second suspension display 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first suspension display 25A displays the number of first suspension storage according to the number of LEDs lit, and the second suspension display 25B displays the number of second storage storage according to the number of LEDs lit.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

Winning ball device 6A, for example, forms a first starting winning opening that is kept in a constant open state in which game balls can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and when the solenoid 81 is in an OFF state, the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position, so that the tips of the movable wing pieces come close to the winning ball device 6A, and a closed state in which game balls do not enter the second start-up winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening being closed). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening being in an open state) by tilting the movable wing when the solenoid 81 is on. When the game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special game can be started. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to a device provided with an electric tulip-shaped accessory.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four positions on the left and right sides of the game area), there are provided general winning holes 10 which are always kept open by predetermined ball receiving members. In this case, when the player enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning hole is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and forms a special winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door (for the special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning opening door closes the big winning opening and the game ball cannot enter (pass through) the big winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is in the ON state, the big winning opening door opens the big winning opening so that the game balls can easily enter the big winning opening.

When game balls enter the big winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game balls enter the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls enter the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering a game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also called "winning". In particular, winning a prize to a starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9", lighting patterns such as "-", and the like. The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal patterns is also called a normal pattern game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the left side of the image display device 5 . Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, the normal game is executed.

Above the normal pattern display 20, a normal pattern holding display 25C is provided. The general pattern suspension display 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal pattern suspension storage number, which is the number of general pattern games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

The surface of the game board 2 is provided with, in addition to the above structure, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, an out port is provided for taking in game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the game machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 for game effects is provided at the periphery of the game area. The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED.

At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates according to the performance is provided.

A ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward the game area by the ball shooting device is provided at the lower right portion of the game machine frame 3 .

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, a hitting ball supply tray (upper tray) is provided for holding (storing) game balls paid out as prize balls or game balls lent from a predetermined ball lending machine so as to be supplied to the hitting ball launching device. Below the upper plate, there is provided a batted ball supply plate (lower plate) from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting actions (operations, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Overview of Game Progress)
A game ball is shot toward a game area by a player's rotation operation of a ball hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 . When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display device 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the execution of the previous normal game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the normal game based on the passage cannot be immediately executed), the normal game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this general pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (normal pattern winning pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern winning". On the other hand, if a normal pattern (normal pattern losing pattern) other than the normal pattern per pattern is stop-displayed as the determined normal pattern, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern losing". When it comes to "normal game", the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period of time and the opening control is performed (the second start winning opening is opened).

When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during execution of the special game or during the period when it is controlled to the big winning game state or the small winning game state described later (when the starting winning occurs but the special game based on the starting winning cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In a special pattern game, if a specific special pattern (a big win pattern, for example, '7', the actual pattern differs depending on the type of big win to be described later) is stop-displayed as a fixed special pattern, it becomes a 'big win', and if a predetermined special pattern (small-win pattern, for example, '2') different from the big win pattern is stop-displayed, it becomes a 'small win'. Also, if a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big-hit symbol or the small-hit symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes "losing".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is continued until the timing when a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) elapses or the timing until the number of game balls entering the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9), whichever is earlier. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the big winning slot can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as an upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 times or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can get a prize ball by entering the game ball into the big winning hole. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the upper limit period of opening, the more advantageous the player is.

In addition, a jackpot type is set in the "jackpot". For example, a plurality of types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning opening and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time saving state, variable probability state, etc., to be described later) are prepared, and jackpot types are set according to these. As the jackpot type, there may be provided a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained, and a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or almost no prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small winning game state, the big winning opening is opened in the same opening mode as the big winning game state in the case of some big winning types (the number of opening times of the big winning opening is the same as the number of rounds and the closing timing of the big winning opening is the same, etc.). In addition, you may provide a small-hit classification also in a "small-hit" like a big-hit classification.

After the jackpot game state is finished, depending on the jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time-saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time saving state, the control (time saving control) that shortens the average special figure fluctuation time (period of varying the special figure) than the normal state is executed. In the time saving state, control (high open control, high base control) is also executed to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening by shortening the average normal pattern fluctuation time (period of changing the normal pattern) than in the normal state, or improving the probability of becoming a "normal pattern hit" in the normal game than in the normal state. Since the time-saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbols) is improved, it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time-saving control, the variable probability control in which the probability that the display result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The variable probability state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols is improved, and in addition, a "big hit" is likely to occur, so it is a further advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the variable probability state are continued until one of the end conditions such as execution of the special game for a predetermined number of times and start of the next big win game state is established first. The end condition that the special figure game of a predetermined number of times has been executed is also referred to as a number cut (number cut time reduction, number cut probability variable, etc.).

The normal state means a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, a variable probability state, etc. The pachinko machine 1 is in the initial setting state of the pachinko machine 1, such as the probability that the display result in the normal game will be "normal game" and the probability that the display result in the special game will be "big win" (For example, when the system is reset and the predetermined return processing is not executed after the power is turned on). is controlled in the same way as

The state in which probability variable control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is performed is also referred to as a high-based state, and a state in which time-saving control is not performed is also referred to as a low-based state. Combining these, the short-time state is also called a low-probability-high base state, the probability-variable state is a high-probability-high base state, and the normal state is a low-probability-low base state. The high probability state and the low base state are also referred to as the high probability low base state.

After the small win game state is finished, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special game becomes "small win" is continuously controlled (however, when the special picture game at the occurrence of "small win" is the special picture game of the above-mentioned predetermined number of cuts, the game state is naturally changed). In addition, there may not be a "small hit" as a display result of a special figure game.

In addition, the game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, it may be controlled to the probability variable state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects such as notifying the progress of the game and exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of the display, it may be performed by outputting sound from the speakers 8L and 8R and/or turning on/off the game effect lamp 9, operating the movable body 32, and the like.

As a performance executed according to the progress of the game, variable display of decorative patterns is started corresponding to the start of the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game in ``left'', ``middle'' and ``right'' decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R provided in the image display device 5.例文帳に追加At the timing when the display result (also referred to as the fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special game and the second special game, the fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative patterns), which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns, is also stopped (derived).

During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end of the variable display, the variable display of the decorative design may be in a predetermined ready-to-win state (ready-to-win state is established). Here, the ready-to-win mode means a mode in which, when the decorative patterns stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination described later, the decorative patterns which are not yet stopped and displayed continue to be displayed in a variable manner.

Further, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-described ready-to-win mode during the variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko game machine 1, a plurality of kinds of ready-to-win performances are executed with different ratios (also called big win reliability or big win expectation) of a display result (display result of a special game or display result of variable display of decorative patterns) to a ``big win'' according to a performance mode. The ready-to-win performance includes, for example, a normal reach and a super-to-win with higher reliability than the normal reach.

When the display result of the special pattern game becomes a ``big hit'', a fixed decoration pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decoration patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (the display result of the variable display of the decoration patterns is a ``big hit''). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7") are stop-displayed together on predetermined effective lines in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R.

In the case of a ``variable probability big win'' controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the big win game state, odd number decoration patterns (for example, ``7'' etc.) are stopped and displayed together, and in the case of a ``non-probability variable big win (normal big win)'' not controlled to the variable probability state after the end of the big win game state, even number decoration patterns (for example, ``6'' etc.) may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative patterns are also called probability variable patterns and even-numbered decorative patterns are also called non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After becoming a ready-to-win mode with non-probability variation symbols, a promotion performance may be executed to finally become a "probability variation big hit".

When the display result of the special pattern game is a ``small hit'', a fixed decoration pattern (for example, ``1 3 5'' or the like) which is a predetermined small hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern on the screen of the image display device 5 (the display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern is a ``small hit''). As an example, decoration symbols constituting a chance eye are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special game is a "big hit" of a part of the big win types (big hit type of the big win game state in the same manner as the small win game state) and when it becomes a "small win", a common fixed decoration pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "losing", the variable display mode of the decorative patterns does not become the ready-to-win mode, and as a display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns, fixed decorative patterns (also referred to as "non-ready-to-lose") of the non-ready-to-win combinations may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns to be "non-ready-to-lose"). Further, when the display result is ``losing'', after the mode of variable display of the decorative patterns becomes the ready-to-win mode, as the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns, the fixed decorative patterns of a predetermined ready-to-win combination (also called ``ready-to-lose''), which is not a big hit combination, may be stop-displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns is ``ready-to-lose'').

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (suspended display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display during execution and a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended). As the pre-reading advance notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the display corresponding to variable display (suspended display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decoration pattern during the variable display of the decoration pattern and then resuming the variable display, a pseudo-continuous performance may be executed in which one variable display is simulated as a plurality of times of variable display.

During the big winning game state, the performance during the big winning is executed to report the big winning game state. As the effect during the big win, the effect of notifying the number of rounds or the promotion effect indicating that the value of the big win game state is improved may be executed. Also, during the small-hit game state, an effect during the small-hit game for notifying the small-hit game state is executed. By executing a common performance during the small winning game state and the big winning game state in a part of the big winning type (the big winning type of the big winning game state in the same manner as the small winning game state, for example, the big winning type in which the subsequent game state is a high probability state), the player may not know whether the current state is the small winning game state or the big winning game state. In such a case, it may be made impossible to distinguish between the high-probability state and the low-probability state by executing a common performance after the end of the small-win game state and after the end of the big-win game state.

Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc., as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1 .

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and has a function of controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of suspension), execution of a normal game (including management of suspension), big win game state, small win game state, game state, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

A game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main substrate 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, effect control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains stored contents for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped in part or in its entirety. All or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be developed in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102 .

The random number circuit 104 counts updatably numerical data representing various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated (updated by software) by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program.

I / O 105, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, and various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first reservation display device 25A, second reservation display device 25B, signal for controlling (driving) general design reservation display device 25C, etc., solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 takes in a detection signal (such as a detection signal indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and the switch has been turned on) from various switches for game ball detection (gate switch 21, starter switch (first starter switch 22A and second starter switch 22B), count switch 23), and transmits the signal to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for the big winning entrance door.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) supplies an effect control command (a command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game, etc.) to the effect control board 12 in accordance with the progress of the game as part of the control of the progress of the game. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. - 特許庁The effect control commands include, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, the display result of the special game (including the jackpot type), the variation pattern used when executing the special game (details will be described later)), the game status (for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the big winning opening, the occurrence of winning, the number of reserved memories, the game state), the command specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like.

The performance control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, and has a function of receiving performance control commands and executing performances (various performances corresponding to the progress of the game, including various reports such as driving of the movable body 32, error reporting, and power failure recovery reporting) based on the received performance control commands.

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 (processing for realizing the above function of the effect control board 12, including determination of the effect to be executed, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 may instruct the display control unit 123 to execute the effect based on a detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected and that appropriately indicates the operation content).

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120 .

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120 . The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating a sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 and a lamp signal (a signal for designating the lighting/lighting-off mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a driving circuit for driving the movable body 32 .

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signal. In this manner, the display control unit 123 controls sound output and lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

Sound output, lamp lighting/extinguishing control (supply of sound designation signal and lamp signal, etc.), and control of movable body 32 (supply of signal for operating movable body 32, etc.) may be executed by effect control CPU 120.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatably numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

An I/O 125 mounted on the performance control board 12 includes an input port for taking in a performance control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and an output port for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal).

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko game machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main substrate 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main substrate 11. As shown in FIG.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). Initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device register setting (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), setting to make RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3). The clear switch is mounted, for example, on the power board. When the clear switch is turned on and the power is turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 through the input port. If the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3; Yes), initialization processing (step S8) is executed. In the initialization processing, the CPU 103 performs RAM clear processing for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Moreover, CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates initialization to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not ON (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power failure), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko game machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stoppage of the power supply. In this process when the power supply is stopped, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. Data protection processing includes adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.) for progressing the game, but also the states of the backup flags and error detection codes. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is ON. If the backup flag is off and backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), an initialization process (step S8) is executed.

If backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the backup data (using an error detection code) to determine whether the data is normal (step S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply was stopped, using a parity bit or a checksum. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply was stopped, so initialization processing (step S8) is executed.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs recovery processing (step S6) to return the internal state of the main substrate 11 to the state when the power supply was stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, the game state at the time of stopping the power supply is recovered, and when the special symbols are fluctuating, the fluctuation of the special symbols is resumed from the state before the restoration by executing timer interrupt processing for game control to be described later.

And CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates restoration from a power failure to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S7). In accordance with this, a performance control command designating the backed-up game state before power interruption, or a performance control command designating the display result of the special game being executed when the special game is being executed may be transmitted. These commands can use the same commands as the commands set for transmission in the special symbol process described later. When the performance control CPU 120 receives the performance control command specifying the restoration time from the power interruption, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the power interruption has been restored or is being restored from the power interruption. The effect control CPU 120 may perform appropriate screen display based on the effect control command.

After completing the recovery process or the initialization process and transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and the interrupt is permitted (step S12). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to determine whether detection signals have been received from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first start switch 22A, the second start switch 22B, and the count switch 23 via the switch circuit 110 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, data such as jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots), start information (information indicating the number of start-up winnings, etc.), and probability variation information (information indicating the number of times the probability variable state has occurred) are output to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (step S25). By the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, management of the execution and suspension of the special symbol game, control of the big win game state and the small win game state, control of the game state, etc. are realized (details will be described later).

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). A CPU 103 executes normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby enabling management of execution and suspension of a normal pattern game based on a detection signal from a gate switch 21 (based on the passage of a game ball through a passage gate 41) and control of opening of a variable winning ball device 6B based on ``per normal pattern''. The execution of the normal pattern game is performed by driving the normal pattern display device 20, and the normal pattern reservation number is displayed by lighting the normal pattern reservation display device 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when power failure occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the processes described above. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, after permitting the interrupt, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 5 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting prize determination process, the process of detecting the occurrence of the starting prize, storing pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the number of pending memories is executed. When a starting prize is generated, a random number value for determining the display result (including the jackpot type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process of prefetching and judging a display result or a variation pattern may be executed. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, transmission setting for transmitting a performance control command for designating determination results such as occurrence of start winning, number of pending memories, pre-reading determination, etc. is performed to a performance control board 12. - 特許庁The effect control command at the time of start winning thus transmitted and set is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG.

After executing the starting prize determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. In the special pattern normal processing, whether or not the display result of the special pattern or the decorative pattern is to be a ``big win'' or a ``minor win'' and the type of the big win in the case of ``big win'' are determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed, based on the random number value for determining the display result. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (any one of a big hit symbol, a small winning symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. In addition, the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also called special figure 2 priority digestion). Also, the winning order of the game balls to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the condition for starting the special game may be established in the order of winning (also called winning order).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. Other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12 are the same. Various tables are stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 .

The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". This variation pattern setting process includes a process of determining one of a plurality of variation patterns using a random number value for determining the variation pattern based on the result of pre-determination of whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern specifies the execution time of the special game (special figure fluctuation time) (also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative pattern), the variable display mode of the decorative pattern (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the production contents (type of reach production, etc.) during the variable display of the decorative pattern. It is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation processing includes processing of setting for varying the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, processing of measuring elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary, and the like. Also, it is determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation processing ends.

The special symbol stop processing of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". This special symbol stop processing includes a setting process for stopping the variation of the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and for stopping and displaying (deriving) the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "losing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "losing", when it is controlled to the time saving state or the probability variable state, and when the end of the number cut is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This big win opening pre-processing includes a setting process for starting the execution of the round in the big win game state and opening the big winning port based on the fact that the display result is "big win". When opening the big winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an upper limit opening period for opening the big winning opening and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to the type of the jackpot. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening pretreatment is completed.

The process during jackpot opening of step S115 is performed when the value of a special figure process flag is "5". The process during the opening of the big win includes a process of measuring the elapsed time after opening the big winning hole and a process of judging whether or not it is time to return the big winning hole from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23.例文帳に追加Then, when returning the big prize winning opening to the closed state, after executing the processing of stopping the supply of the solenoid driving signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning prize opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", and the processing during the opening of the big winning prize is finished.

The jackpot opening post-processing of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". The processing after opening the big win includes processing for determining whether or not the number of execution times of rounds in which the big prize opening is opened reaches a set upper limit execution number, and processing for setting to end the big win game state when the upper limit execution number is reached. When the number of execution times of the round does not reach the upper limit number of execution times, the value of the special process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of execution times of the round reaches the upper limit number of execution times, the value of the special process flag is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot end processing includes processing for waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending performance is executed as a performance operation for informing the end of the jackpot game state passes, and processing for performing various settings for starting variable probability control and time reduction control corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

Small hit opening pretreatment of step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small hit opening pre-processing includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing ends.

Small hit during opening processing of step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". This processing during the opening of the small winning prize includes processing for measuring the elapsed time after opening the big prize winning port and processing for determining whether or not it is time to return the big prize winning port from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time or the like. When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small winning game state comes, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the small winning open processing is ended.

Small hit end processing of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small-hit end processing includes processing of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period in which the performance operation for informing the end of the small-hit game state is executed elapses. Here, when the small winning game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before entering the small winning game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has passed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning end processing ends.

(Major operations of production control board 12)
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 6 is executed. When the production control main process shown in FIG. 6 is started, the production control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and performs register setting of the CTC (counter/timer circuit) mounted on the production control board 12. Also, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial motion control process, control for initial motion of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined motion, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to ON every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeated and waits.

Also, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs each time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is an interrupt generated when, for example, the effect control INT signal from the main substrate 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the turning on of the performance control INT signal, the performance control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt prohibition, but it is desirable to issue an interrupt prohibition command (DI command) when using a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt prohibition state. The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interruption caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port for receiving the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I/O 125 . The effect control command taken in at this time is stored in the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt process after setting the interrupt permission.

If the timer interrupt flag is ON at step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis processing, for example, after reading various performance control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the performance control command reception buffer, setting and control corresponding to the read performance control commands are performed. For example, the read performance control command is stored in a predetermined area of a RAM 122 or a reception flag provided in the RAM 122 is turned on so that which performance control command is received and the contents specified by the performance control command can be confirmed by performance control process processing or the like. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative luminous bodies such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the driving operation of the movable body 32 are controlled to operate various effect devices. Further, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed according to the effect control command and the like transmitted from the main board 11 regarding the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices.

Random number update processing for production|presentation is performed following the production|presentation control process processing of step S76 (step S77), and at least one part of the random number for production|presentation used by the production|presentation control board 12 side is updated by software. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process processing. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main substrate 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed. Also, a process for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S170 to S177 as described below according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process includes a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command designating the start of variable display is received from the main board 11.例文帳に追加When it is determined to start the variable display of the decoration pattern on the image display device 5, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, the display result (determined decorative pattern) of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the form of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the presence/absence of execution of various effects such as ready-to-win effects and various advance notice effects, the mode and execution start timing are determined based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. Then, an effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative design in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of the decorative design.

The effect process during variable display in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5, to drive the movable body 32, to output the sound and sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting the command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13, and to output the command (electrical signal) to the lamp control board 14 for the game effect lamp 9 and decoration. Various production controls are executed during the variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/blinking LEDs. After performing such performance control, for example, when an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative pattern is read out from the performance control pattern, or when a command designating stop display of the fixed decorative pattern is received from the main board 11, etc., the fixed decorative pattern, which is the display result of the decorative pattern, is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decoration pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the production process during variable display ends.

The special figure per waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received from the main substrate 11 . When receiving a performance control command designating the start of the big win game state or the small win game state, if the command designates the start of the big win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "6". On the other hand, if the command designates the start of the small-hit game state, the value of the production process flag is updated to "4", which is the value corresponding to the small-hit production process. Also, when a command designating the start of a big win game state or a small win game state is not received and a waiting time for receiving the command elapses, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "lost", and the value of the performance process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value. When the value of the production process flag is updated, the special figure per waiting process is terminated.

The production process during the small hit of step S174 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "4". In this small-hit middle production process, the production control CPU 120 sets, for example, an production control pattern corresponding to the production contents in the small-hit game state, and executes various production controls in the small-hit game state based on the set contents. In the small winning middle performance processing, for example, in response to receiving a command designating the end of the small winning game state from the main board 11, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "5" corresponding to the small winning ending performance, and the small winning middle performance processing is finished.

The small hit end production process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "5". In this small-hit end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small-hit game state, etc., and executes various effect control at the end of the small-hit game state based on the set contents. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the small winning end effect process is terminated.

The effect process during the big hit in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big-hit production process, the production control CPU 120 sets, for example, production control patterns corresponding to the production contents in the big-hit game state, and executes various production controls in the big-hit game state based on the set contents. In the big-win performance processing, the value of the performance control process flag is updated to "7" corresponding to the ending performance processing in response to receiving, for example, a command designating the end of the big-win game state from the main board 11, and the big-win performance processing is completed.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the big win game state, for example, and executes various performance control of the ending performance at the end of the big win game state based on the setting contents. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the scope of the present invention.

The pachinko game machine 1 in the above basic description is a payout type game machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but it may be an enclosed type gaming machine that encloses game media and gives points based on the occurrence of winning.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be performed by repeating display and extinguishing of the pattern. Further, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but a slot machine (for example, big bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (for example, big bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (for example, big bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (for example, big bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of bonuses, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to being distributed/provided in a detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko game machine 1, and may be distributed by being pre-installed in a storage device of the computer device or the like. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention may be distributed by being downloaded from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit.

The game may be executed not only by loading a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing programs and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like, or by directly executing the game using the hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of effects (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) may include that one is a ratio of “0%”. For example, the ratio of one is "0%" and the other is "100%" or less than "100%".

(Description on Characteristic Portion 099IW)
Next, the characteristic portion 099IW will be described. FIG. 8-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in the characteristic portion 099IW. In this characteristic portion 099IW, as shown in FIG. 8-1, a passage gate 012IW041 is provided on the right side of the image display device 5 in place of the passage gate 41 shown in FIG. A game ball that has passed through the passage gate 012IW041 is detected by the gate switch 012IW021 (see FIG. 8-2).

In addition, in this characteristic portion 099IW, as shown in FIG. 8-1, instead of the special variable winning ball device 7 shown in FIG. A game ball that has won the first special variable winning device 012IW007a is detected by the first count switch 012IW023a (see FIG. 8-2). Also, the game ball that has won the second special variable winning device 012IW007b is detected by the second count switch 012IW023b (see FIG. 8-2). Further, a so-called V winning area is provided in the second special variable winning device 012IW007b, and a game ball that has won the V winning area in the second special variable winning device 012IW007b is detected by the V winning switch 012IW024 (see FIG. 8-2).

Incidentally, in this example, the game ball that has won the general winning hole 10 is detected by the winning hole switch 012IW010a (see FIG. 8-2).

Also, in this example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) receives a detection signal from the gate switch 012IW021 (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 012IW041), performs control to transmit a gate passage designation command designating that the game ball has passed the passage gate 012IW041 to the second effect control board 012IW12b. In addition, when the game control microcomputer 100 receives a detection signal from the winning hole switch 012IW010a (when the game ball wins in the general winning hole 10), it controls the transmission of a winning hole winning designation command designating that the game ball has won in the general winning hole 10 to the second performance control board 012IW12b.

Further, in this example, the game control microcomputer 100, for example, receives a command indicating that a full state of the batted ball supply tray (lower tray) has been detected from the payout control microcomputer mounted on the payout control board, performs control to transmit a full tank detection command indicating that the batted ball supply tray (lower tray) has detected a full state to the second effect control board 012IW12b. The payout control microcomputer can detect the full state of the batted ball supply tray (lower tray) by, for example, confirming whether or not a detection signal has been input from a full tank switch for detecting the full state of the batted ball supply tray (lower tray).

In this example, since the passage gate 012IW041 is provided in the right area of the game area, when the game state is controlled to the high base state, it is advantageous for the player to aim at the right side of the game area and perform a shooting operation (so-called right-handed operation). Also, in this example, since the first special variable winning device 012IW007a and the second special variable winning device 012IW007b are provided in the right area of the game area, it is more advantageous for the player to perform the right-handed operation during the jackpot game.

On the other hand, in this example, when the game state is not controlled to the high base state (that is, it is controlled to the low base state) and the game is not even in the jackpot game, it is advantageous for the player to aim at the left side of the game area and perform the shooting operation (so-called left-handed operation) so as to easily win the game ball in the first start winning hole.

In this characteristic part 099IW, when the probability variable jackpot is achieved, for example, 16 rounds of jackpot games are executed, and in the 1st to 3rd rounds and the 5th to 16th rounds, the first special variable winning device 012IW007a is controlled to be open until a predetermined period (29.5 seconds in this example) elapses or a predetermined number (10 in this example) of game balls wins, and the second special variable winning device 012IW007a is controlled in the fourth round. The prize device 012IW007b is controlled in an open state until a predetermined period (29.5 seconds in this example) elapses or a predetermined number (10 in this example) of game balls wins. Then, on the condition that the game ball has won the V prize area in the second special variable prize winning device 012IW007b in the fourth round, the game state is controlled to the probability variable state after the jackpot game ends. In this example, when the variable probability big win is achieved, winning to the V winning area is a condition, but since the second special variable winning device 012IW007b is opened for a relatively long period (29.5 seconds in this example), the variable probability state is generally controlled after the end of the big win game.

In this feature part 099IW, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) detects that the game ball has won the V winning area in the second special variable winning device 012IW007b (specifically, V winning switch 012IW0 24), control is performed to transmit a V prize designation command designating that a game ball has won a prize in a V prize area (that a V prize has occurred) to the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b.

In the case of a non-probable variable jackpot (normal jackpot), for example, 16 rounds of jackpot games are executed, and in the 1st to 3rd rounds and the 5th to 16th rounds, the first special variable prize winning device 012IW007a is controlled to be open until a predetermined period (29.5 seconds in this example) elapses or a predetermined number (10 in this example) of game balls wins, and in the 4th round, the second special variable prize wins. The device 012IW007b is controlled in the open state until a very short period of time (0.1 seconds in this example) has elapsed. In this example, in the case of a normal big win, the second special variable prize winning device 012IW007b is controlled to be open in the fourth round in the same way as the variable probability big win, but since it is opened only for a very short period (0.1 seconds in this example), it is hardly controlled to the variable probability state after the end of the big win game.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 099IW, as shown in FIG. 8-2, instead of the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2, a first effect control board 012IW12a and a second effect control board 012IW12b are mounted.

The first effect control board 012IW12a, which receives power supply from the power supply board, is equipped with a first effect control CPU012IW120a, ROM012IW121a, RAM012IW122a, display control section 012IW123, and I/O012IW125a. The first production control CPU012IW120a has a function of receiving a command from the second production control CPU012IW120b mounted on the second production control board 012IW12b and executing production based on the received command. Further, in this example, the detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B are input to the first effect control CPU012IW120a mounted on the first effect control board 012IW12a. In this example, the first effect control CPU 012IW 120a is set to 10 ms as the timer interrupt time at the start of power supply, and the timer interrupt occurs every 10 ms to execute various processes.

The second effect control board 012IW12b, which receives power supply from the power supply board, is equipped with a second effect control CPU012IW120b, ROM012IW121b, RAM012IW122b, random number circuit 012IW124, I/O012IW125b, real-time clock 012IW126, and power monitoring circuit 099IW127. The second effect control CPU 012IW 120b has a function of executing the effect control main process, and also has a function of receiving effect control commands from the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 that receives power supply from the power supply board, and executing effect control process processing and the like based on the received effect control commands (however, the actual image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamps 9, and other effect means can be controlled, stick controller 31A and push button 31 The control of the part that receives the input from the input means such as B is performed on the side of the first effect control CPU 012IW 120a). In this example, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b is set to 10 ms as the timer interrupt time at the start of power supply, and the timer interrupt occurs every 10 ms to execute various processes.

In addition, the second effect control CPU012IW120b has a function of recording predetermined log information in the log area provided in the backup data memories 099IW210A to 210D of the backup memory board 099IW14. Although the details will be described later, the backup data memories 099IW210A to 210D of the backup memory board 099IW14 can retain the stored contents even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped. In addition, the second effect control CPU012IW120b also has a function of recording predetermined log information in a log area provided in the RAM012IW122b using the date and time information output by the real-time clock 012IW126. The RAM 012IW 122b is backed up by a backup power supply mounted on a power board (not shown), and even if the power supply to the game machine is stopped, at least the log information recorded in the log area is retained for a predetermined period.

The power monitoring circuit 099IW127 monitors the power supplied to the second effect control board 012IW12b, and when the power supply voltage is less than a predetermined value (for example, +8V), outputs a power-off signal to the second effect control CPU012IW120b. Specifically, the power-off signal is turned on (low level). In this characteristic part 099IW, the power monitoring circuit 099IW127 is provided on the second effect control board 012IW12b, but is not limited to such a configuration, and may be provided on a power board or a relay board between the power board. In this case, the power monitoring circuit 099IW127 may be configured to be able to output a power cutoff signal to the main board 11, the second effect control board 012IW12b, the first effect control board 012IW12a, and the like. Further, for example, a power monitoring circuit 099IW127 may be provided on the main board 11, and a signal corresponding to a power cutoff signal may be output from the main board 11 to the second effect control board 012IW12b.

In the second effect control board 012IW12b, a power supply circuit mounted on the second effect control board 012IW12b generates power from +12V to +3V or +1V. The second production control CPU 012IW120b can operate if +3V is supplied (for example, the core operates at +1V and communication with the ROM is possible at +3V), but the power supply circuit that generates +3V or +1V can generate +3V if +4 to 5V is supplied, so there is a risk that it will operate before the power is stably supplied.

Therefore, when power is supplied to the second effect control board 012IW12b, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b does not start control while the power supply interruption signal is input from the power supply monitoring circuit 099IW127 (that is, while the supplied power supply voltage is less than a predetermined value (for example, +8V)). is stably supplied), the control is started. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b from operating before the power supply is stably supplied.

If the power supply to the game machine is stopped and then the power supply to the game machine is started, when the control of the second effect control CPU 012IW120b is started (that is, when it becomes operable), the power supply interruption signal is input from the power supply monitoring circuit 099IW127. The control of the 012IW 120b is started (corresponding to the processing in the case of Y in step 099IWS001, which will be described later). In this case, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b receives at least an initialization designation command or a recovery command from the game control microcomputer 100.

On the other hand, if the system reset of the second effect control CPU012IW120b occurs, the power supply of the game machine itself is not stopped, and when the control of the second effect control CPU012IW120b is started (that is, when it becomes operable), the power supply disconnection signal is not input from the power supply monitoring circuit 099IW127 (that is, the supplied power supply voltage has already risen, so it exceeds a predetermined value (eg, +8V)), and the standby period has passed. Without, the control of the second effect control CPU012IW120b is started (corresponding to the processing in the case of N of step 099IWS001 described later). In this case, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b is not transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 with power-on commands such as initialization designation commands and recovery commands.

Therefore, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b can specify whether the power failure of the game machine itself has occurred or the system reset of the second effect control CPU 012IW120b has occurred, depending on whether or not there is a waiting period at the start of control (that is, when the operation becomes possible). Specifically, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b, when there is a waiting period at the start of control (that is, when it is notified by the state of the power failure signal from the power monitoring circuit 099IW127 that the power supply voltage of the supplied power has changed from less than a predetermined value to a predetermined value or more after becoming operable), it can be specified that the power failure of the gaming machine itself has occurred. In addition, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b can specify that the system reset of the second effect control CPU 012IW120b has occurred when there is no waiting period at the start of control (that is, when the power supply voltage of the supplied power is already equal to or higher than a predetermined value when it becomes operable, the power supply monitoring circuit 099IW127 notifies it by the state of the power off signal). Hereinafter, the expression "power failure of the gaming machine itself" or "restarting of the gaming machine itself" is used, but this is a concept including power failure or restarting of at least the main board 11 and the effect control board (for example, the first effect control board 012IW12a and the second effect control board 012IW12b).

As shown in FIG. 8-2, the second effect control board 012IW12b is interconnected with the backup memory board 099IW14. The backup memory board 099IW14 is a board for storing backup data provided separately from the first effect control board 012IW12a and the second effect control board 012IW12b, and is configured to be able to execute backup data write processing and readout processing according to the backup control signal from the second effect control board 012IW12b. The backup data write process writes and stores the backup data in the backup data memory. In the backup data reading process, the backup data stored in the backup data memory is read and transmitted to the second effect control board 012IW12b or the like.

FIG. 8-3 shows a configuration example of the second effect control board 012IW12b. Some or all of the electronic components such as the second effect control CPU012IW120b, the ROM012IW121b, and the RAM012IW122b mounted on the second effect control board 012IW12b may be detachably attached to the connector socket by inserting and removing connector pins, and other components may be mountable by soldering or the like. A connector 099IW150, a connector 099IW151, a connector 099IW154 and a connector 099IW156 are mounted on the second effect control board 012IW12b together with these electronic components. The second effect control board 012IW12b includes a plurality of electronic components such as a serial communication circuit 099IW137 in addition to electronic components such as the second effect control CPU012IW120b, ROM012IW121b, and RAM012IW122b.

The serial communication circuit 099IW137 is a circuit capable of transmitting and receiving communication data by a serial communication method to various boards and various circuits other than the second effect control board 012IW12b. The serial communication circuit 099IW137 may be capable of transmitting and receiving communication data compatible with multiple types of serial communication standards such as UART (Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter), SPI (Serial Peripheral Interface), and I2C (Inter-Integrated Circuit). The serial communication circuit 099IW137 may include a plurality of communication processing units including a receiving unit, a transmitting unit, a communication control unit, a serial communication data register, a serial status register, a serial control register, and the like. UART is an asynchronous serial communication standard, and transfers communication data using a start bit and a stop bit. In this case, the clock signal line becomes unnecessary, but the communication speed (baud rate) becomes relatively low. SPI and I2C are clock-synchronous serial communication standards, and transfer communication data using a clock signal. In this case, a clock signal line is required, but the communication speed (baud rate) is relatively high. In the case of SPI, signal lines are provided respectively corresponding to a clock signal, a transmission data signal, a reception data signal, and a slave selection signal. In the case of I2C, signal lines corresponding to clock signals and data signals are provided. The plurality of communication processing units included in the serial communication circuit 099IW137 may have different hardware configurations according to the plurality of types of serial communication standards.

The connector 099IW150, the connector 099IW151, the connector 099IW154, and the connector 099IW156 are configured using receptacles, for example, and have a configuration of a wiring connection device capable of detachably connecting various signal wirings. Connector 099IW150, connector 099IW151, connector 099IW154 and connector 099IW156 enable output of various signals via different paths such as wiring patterns different from each other in the second effect control board 012IW12b. The connector 099IW 150 is a connector port for main board wiring to which the main board wiring electrically connected to the main board 11 can be connected. The connector 099IW151 is a connector port for power supply wiring to which a power supply wiring electrically connected to a power supply unit such as a power supply board can be connected. The connector 099IW154 is a connector port for backup wiring to which a backup wiring electrically connected to a backup unit such as the backup memory board 099IW14 can be connected. The connector 099IW156 is an inspection wiring connector port capable of connecting an inspection wiring that is electrically connected to an information processing apparatus (personal computer, etc.) for inspection, testing, or development. The inspection information processing device may function as an inspection device for the pachinko game machine 1 by executing a specific software program, for example. Thus, the connector 099IW156 is an electronic component used as a connection member to which the inspection device of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is connected.

The connector 099IW156 can be connected to an inspection wire at, for example, the trial production stage, the development stage, or the manufacturing stage of the pachinko game machine 1, and the second performance control CPU 012IW120b can execute inspection processing before shipment in response to a test command different from the performance control command. The pre-shipment inspection process, for example, before the completion of the software program during trial production or development, internal parameters and input/output signals when the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b executes a part or all of the program code, etc. It may include a process that can be verified. The verification environment in which inspection processing is executed before shipment may be, for example, an execution environment corresponding to a state in which the pachinko game machine 1 is installed on a game machine installation island, or may be an execution environment in which the pachinko game machine 1 is independently connected to an information processing device such as a personal computer so that the operation status can be confirmed. In addition, the connector 099IW156 may be configured to be connectable with inspection wiring at the recovery stage of the pachinko game machine 1, for example, so that backup data readout processing can be executed in response to a test command different from the effect control command. Alternatively, the connector 099IW156 may be removed at the shipping stage of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. Alternatively, the connector 099IW156 may be installed only in a predetermined model of the pachinko game machine 1 other than the model installed in the game hall, such as for demonstration or test purposes, and may not be installed in the model (mass production machine) mass-produced and installed in the game hall. A land capable of mounting the connector 099IW156 may be formed on the board surface of the second effect control board 012IW12b. When the connector 099IW156 is removed or not mounted, the copper foil pattern of the land where the connector 099IW156 is no longer mounted may be soldered. The soldering process is a process of applying solder to the exposed portions of the copper foil pattern, and may be performed using, for example, a cream solder printer, or may be performed by any method that does not use a cream solder printer. Depending on whether the connector 099IW156 is mounted or not, the same soldering process may be performed, or different soldering processes may be performed. When the soldering process is performed in the same process, there is no need to fabricate multiple patterns of the metal mask used in the cream solder printing machine for applying solder to the lands, thus preventing an increase in the costs required to fabricate the board. Soldering the unmounted lands on which electronic components are not mounted, such as the connector 099IW156, prevents oxidation of the copper foil pattern, prevents problems such as disconnection due to corrosion of the wiring pattern, and appropriately maintains the quality of the board.

In addition, when an electronic component such as the connector 099IW156 is not mounted, the copper foil pattern of the land on which the electronic component is not mounted is not limited to being covered by soldering, and may be covered by applying a resist that is an insulating coating, for example. By covering the lands on which electronic components are not mounted in this manner by an arbitrary method, oxidation of the copper foil pattern can be prevented, problems such as disconnection due to corrosion of the wiring pattern can be prevented, and the quality of the board can be appropriately maintained. On the other hand, lands on which electronic components are not mounted may not be covered by soldering or the like. For example, when lands are soldered, solder as a conductor adheres to the copper foil pattern, which may cause an unintended short circuit or current path in the wiring pattern. Therefore, by not soldering lands on which electronic components are not mounted, it is possible to prevent solder from adhering to the copper foil pattern, prevent problems such as short circuits in wiring patterns and changes in current paths, and maintain the quality of the board appropriately. By performing an insulating coating process instead of the soldering process, it is possible to prevent solder from adhering to the copper foil pattern, prevent problems such as a short circuit in the wiring pattern and a change in the current path, and appropriately maintain the quality of the board.

FIG. 8-4(A) shows a configuration example of various circuits mounted on the backup memory board 099IW14. The backup memory board 099IW14 is provided with a memory controller 099IW200, an RTC 099IW201, a serial communication circuit 099IW202, a test connection section 099IW203, backup data memories 099IW210A to 210D, and a connector 099IW220. Thus, the backup memory board 099IW14 is provided with backup data memories 099IW210A to 210D as a plurality of backup data storage units. The memory controller 099IW200 can perform write processing and read processing of backup data according to the backup control signal from the second effect control board 012IW12b. The RTC099IW201 can measure the current date and time and supply date and time information including date information and time information to the memory controller 099IW200. The serial communication circuit 099IW202 is a circuit capable of transmitting and receiving communication data to and from the second effect control board 012IW12b by a serial communication method. The serial communication circuit 099IW202 may be capable of transmitting/receiving communication data conforming to a specific serial communication standard such as SPI. The serial communication circuit 099IW202 only needs to have a communication processing section with a hardware configuration compatible with such a specific serial communication standard. The inspection connecting portion 099IW203 may be formed as a specific conductor portion including a terminal capable of inputting/outputting an inspection signal, such as a test point. When the test connection portion 099IW203 is a test point, the test probe is brought into contact with the test connection portion 099IW203, and between the test device and the second effect control CPU012IW120b of the second effect control board 012IW12b, input/output of test signals, reading of backup data, and the like may be performed. The inspection connection unit 099IW203 does not pass through the second effect control CPU012IW120b of the second effect control board 012IW12b, between the test device and the memory controller 099IW200 of the backup memory board 099IW14 or the backup data memory 099IW210A ~ 210D, it may be possible to perform input/output of test signals, reading of backup data, and the like. In this way, the inspection connection unit 099IW203 can provide an interface for performing data communication with an inspection device, which is an external device, in the backup memory board 099IW14.

The backup data memories 099IW210A-210D may be partially or wholly configured using a non-volatile ferroelectric memory such as FRAM (registered trademark) (Ferroelectric RAM), or partially or wholly configured using a battery-equipped SRAM (Static RAM). The backup data memories 099IW210A to 210D may be partially or wholly configured using flash memory such as NAND-ROM, EEPROM, or HDD (Hard Disk Drive). A nonvolatile ferroelectric memory called FRAM (registered trademark) has memory cells using a ferroelectric film as a capacitor insulating film, and stored data written in the memory cells is not lost even when the operating power supply is turned off. A configuration using FRAM (registered trademark) does not require a battery backup for data retention, and achieves high-speed writing, high number of rewrites, and low power consumption compared to non-volatile memories such as flash memory, EEPROM, and HDD. As a result, it is possible to prevent an increase in installation area, simplify the device configuration, improve operation efficiency, and appropriately store and save backup data. In addition, the disposal of the battery becomes unnecessary, the disappearance of the stored contents due to the replacement of the battery is prevented, and the backup data can be properly stored and preserved. The backup data memories 099IW210A-210D may be backed up by a backup power supply mounted on the power supply board. In this way, the backup data memories 099IW210A to 210D can retain the stored contents even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. The backup data memories 099IW210A to 210D may be able to hold the stored contents without using a backup power supply, for example, when part or all of them are configured using FRAM (registered trademark). Alternatively, the backup data memories 099IW210A-210B may be able to retain their stored contents using a backup power supply, for example, when part or all of them are configured using battery-equipped SRAMs.

The backup memory board 099IW14 uses the date and time information output by the RTC099IW201 to store and store various types of log information in the log areas provided in the backup data memories 099IW210A to 210D. The memory controller 099IW200 can perform write processing and read processing of stored data to the backup data memories 099IW210A to 210D according to commands and instructions sent from the second effect control CPU012IW120b of the second effect control board 012IW12b. In this case, by executing write processing and read processing of stored data indicating log information including date and time information, operation history, setting history, error history, etc. relating to a plurality of electronic components used in games and effects in the pachinko game machine 1 can be stored so as to be verifiable after the fact.

FIG. 8-4(B) shows a configuration example for connecting the second effect control board 012IW12b and the backup memory board 099IW14. The second effect control board 012IW12b has a connector 099IW154 that can be attached to and detached from the connector 099IW220 of the backup memory board 099IW14. Backup memory board 099IW14 is provided with connector 099IW220 which can be attached or detached to connector 099IW154 of 2nd production control board 012IW12b. By connecting the connector 099IW154 and the connector 099IW220, the second effect control board 012IW12b and the backup memory board 099IW14 can be physically and electrically connected. A connector 099IW154 provided on the second effect control board 012IW12b has terminals TM01 to TM06. A connector 099IW220 provided on the backup memory board 099IW14 has terminals TM11 to TM16. The terminals TM01 to TM06 of the connector 099IW154 and the terminals TM11 to TM16 of the connector 099IW220 need only be physically and electrically connected to the corresponding terminals (for example, the terminals TM01 and TM11) when the connectors 099IW154 and 099IW220 are coupled.

The terminal TM01 provided in the connector 099IW154 of the second effect control board 012IW12b can provide a specific voltage such as VD1. The terminal TM02 provided in the connector 099IW154 of the second effect control board 012IW12b can receive a specific voltage VD1 used for confirming connection with the backup memory board 099IW14. For example, the specific voltage VD1 output from the terminal TM01 provided in the connector 099IW154 of the second effect control board 012IW12b is supplied to the terminal TM11 provided in the connector 099IW220 of the backup memory board 099IW14. The terminals TM11 and TM12 of the connector 099IW220 may be short-circuited on the substrate of the backup memory substrate 099IW14. Therefore, when the connector 099IW154 and the connector 099IW220 are coupled, a voltage corresponding to VD1 is supplied from the terminal TM12 of the connector 099IW220 on the backup memory board 099IW14 to the terminal TM02 of the connector 099IW154 on the second effect control board 012IW12b. On the other hand, when the connector 099IW154 and the connector 099IW220 are not connected, the voltage is not supplied to the terminal TM02 of the connector 099IW154 in the second effect control board 012IW12b.

In the second effect control board 012IW12b, the effect control CPU 012IW120b determines the voltage value at the terminal TM02 of the connector 099IW154 in order to confirm the connection state with the backup memory board 099IW14. In this case, if the voltage value of the terminal TM02 is a high voltage value corresponding to VD1, it can be determined that the second effect control board 012IW12b and the backup memory board 099IW14 are connected (connected state). On the other hand, if the voltage value of the terminal TM02 is a low voltage value corresponding to voltage non-supply, it can be determined that the second effect control board 012IW12b and the backup memory board 099IW14 are not connected (unconnected state). In this way, based on the voltage at the terminal TM02, which is a member for connection confirmation, the connection state between the second effect control board 012IW12b and the backup memory board 099IW14 can be confirmed. It should be noted that the connection state is not limited to being confirmed based on the terminal voltage, and the connection state may be confirmed based on the input state of a specific signal, for example. Alternatively, the connection state may be confirmed using a switch or sensor as a connection confirmation member.

The terminals TM03 to TM06 provided in the connector 099IW154 of the second effect control board 012IW12b are wire-connected to the serial communication circuit 099IW137 provided in the second effect control board 012IW12b. The terminals TM13 and TM14 of the connector 099IW220 of the backup memory board 099IW14 are wire-connected to the serial communication circuit 099IW202. Therefore, the wires connected to the terminals TM03 and TM04 of the connector 099IW154 and the terminals TM11 and TM12 of the connector 099IW220 are connected to the second effect control CPU 012IW120b and the backup data memories 099IW210A to 210D of the backup memory board 099IW14 via the serial communication circuit 099IW137 and the serial communication circuit 099IW202. Provides electrical connections so that stored data can be transferred. The terminals TM15 and TM16 of the connector 099IW220 of the backup memory board 099IW14 are wire-connected to the test connecting portion 099IW203. As a result, the wires connected to the terminals TM05 and TM06 of the connector 099IW154 and the terminals TM15 and TM16 of the connector 099IW220 are connected to the terminals TM05 and TM06 of the connector 099IW220 via the serial communication circuit 099IW137 between the second effect control CPU 012IW120b and the testing connection portion 099IW203 of the backup memory board 099IW14, so that the transmission and reception of the test signal and the transfer of the stored data become possible. provide a meaningful connection.

The backup memory board 099IW14 is configured to be detachable from the second effect control board 012IW12b. As a result, for example, in the case of the pachinko game machine 1 that does not use the backup data memories 099IW210A to 210D, the backup memory board 099IW14 can be removed, thereby increasing the flexibility of the device configuration and preventing an increase in manufacturing costs. In addition, the backup memory board 099IW14 can be removed to read out and analyze the stored data, so that the workload of inspecting the stored data can be reduced. The real-time clock 012IW126 provided on the second performance control board 012IW12b may provide the current time for timing adjustment for executing performances in which a plurality of pachinko game machines 1 are interlocked, for example, and requires a relatively high accuracy. On the other hand, the RTC 099IW 201 of the backup memory board 099IW 14 only needs to be able to identify the context of the memory processing executed on the backup data memories 099IW 210A to 210D, so a relatively low-precision RTC 099IW 201 can sufficiently satisfy the application. As described above, the RTC 099IW201 of the backup memory board 099IW14 only needs to be of relatively low accuracy, so that an increase in manufacturing cost can be prevented. In addition, the structure and function with which backup memory board|substrate 099IW14 is provided may be comprised so that 2nd production|presentation control board 012IW12b may be provided. For example, the configuration and functions of the backup data memories 099IW210A-210D may be implemented by the RAM 012IW122b. Even in this case, for example, the wiring pattern in the second effect control board 012IW12b, or a switch or a sensor may be used as a connection confirmation member to confirm the connection state.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-2 and 8-5, the pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into an outer frame 012IW001a formed in the shape of a vertically long rectangular frame, a game board (gauge board) 2 (see FIG. 1) constituting the game board surface, and a game machine frame (underframe) 012IW003 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area. In the game machine frame 012IW003, a glass door frame 012IW003a having a glass window is provided so as to be rotatable about the left side between a door open position where the front surface of the game machine frame 012IW003 is opened and a door closed position where the front surface is closed. It is designed to be able to see through the skill area.

The game machine frame 012IW003 can be opened by inserting a door key owned by a store clerk or the like into a lock (not shown) to unlock it.

The main board 11 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1 while being housed in a board case 012IW201 configured to be openable by a first member and a second member. The main board 11 is also provided with a setting key 012IW051 for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state, which will be described later.

A setting switching main body provided with an operation unit that can be operated by the player such as the setting keys 012IW051 is housed in the board case 012IW201 together with the main board 11, and the setting keys 012IW051 are exposed to the back side through an opening formed in the back right part of the board case 012IW201 so that they can be operated without opening the board case 012IW201.

Since the board case 012IW201 having the setting key 012IW051 is provided on the back side of the pachinko game machine 1, it is impossible to operate from the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 when the game machine frame 3 is closed, and the operation becomes possible by opening the game machine frame 3 using a predetermined door key. In addition, since the setting key 012IW051 requires operation of a setting key owned by a store clerk or the like of the game arcade, only the store clerk possessing the setting key can operate it. The setting key 012IW051 is also a switch capable of switching between ON and OFF, which will be described later. In this characterizing portion 099IW, the door key and the setting key are separate keys, but one key may also be used.

Further, a display monitor 012IW029 and a display changeover switch 012IW030 for switching the display of the display monitor 012IW029 are arranged in the substrate case 012IW201. The display monitor 012IW029 and the display changeover switch 012IW030 are connected to the main board 11 and arranged at the upper left part of the board case 012IW201. That is, the display monitor 012IW029 and the display changeover switch 012IW030 are arranged in front of the main substrate 11 in the substrate case 012IW201. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the frame 012IW003 for the game machine is not opened, the front when viewing the main board 11 is the front when viewing the back side of the game board 2 with the frame 012IW003 for the game machine opened, and is different from the front of the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁However, the front when viewing the main board 11 and the front of the pachinko game machine 1 may be common.

As described above, the setting key 012IW051 in the characteristic part 099IW cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, but there is a possibility that the setting key 012IW051 is operated from inside the game island where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed. Therefore, in this characteristic portion 099IW, as shown in FIGS. 8-5 and 8-6, a security cover 012IW500A is attached to the right end of the outer frame 012IW001a to cover the right side of the board case 012IW201 including the setting key 012IW051 from the rear side when the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is closed. The security cover 012IW500A is a substantially L-shaped member comprising a short piece 012IW500Aa facing in the front-rear direction and a long piece 012IW500Ab extending from the rear end of the short piece 012IW500Aa toward the left side of the pachinko machine 1, and is made of a transparent plate-shaped synthetic resin material. The vertical dimension of the short piece 012IW500Aa is substantially the same as the vertical dimension of the back plate of the substrate case 012IW201. The security cover 012IW500A is fixed to the right end of the outer frame 012IW001a via the front end of the short piece 012IW500Aa.

As shown in FIG. 8-5, the long piece 012IW500Ab covers the right side of the board case 012IW201 including the setting key 012IW051 from the back side of the pachinko machine 1 by contacting (or approaching) the right part of the board case 012IW201 from behind the pachinko machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is closed. Therefore, the setting key 012IW051 becomes inoperable due to the long piece 012IW500Ab. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 8-6, when the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is open, the setting key 012IW051 moves together with the gaming machine frame 012IW003 and separates from the long piece 012IW500Ab, thereby releasing the state covered by the long piece 012IW500Ab and becoming operable.

In other words, when the game machine frame 012IW003 is closed, the security cover 012IW500A maintains the pachinko game machine 1 in the characteristic portion 099IW in a restricted state in which operations on the operation unit including the setting key 012IW051 are restricted. 012IW051 is allowed to operate.

Since the board case 012IW201 is provided on the back side of the pachinko game machine 1, it is extremely difficult to access the setting key 012IW051 when the game machine frame 012IW003 is closed. Therefore, the setting key 012IW051 cannot be operated to change the set value unless the game machine frame 012IW003 is opened by a game hall clerk or the like.

However, even if the pachinko machine frame 012IW003 is closed in a state where the pachinko machine 1 is installed on a game island (not shown) of the game hall, for example, an unauthorized member such as a wire or a cell plate may be inserted between the pachinko machine 1 and a game device such as a card unit installed between the pachinko machine 1 and another pachinko machine adjacent to it, and the setting key 0 on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 may be set. 12IW051 may be operated to change the set value, so the security cover 012IW500A maintains a restricted state in which the operation of the operation unit including the setting key 012IW051 is restricted when the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is closed, thereby suitably suppressing the above-mentioned fraudulent act.

In addition, even in a restricted state in which the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is closed and the security cover 012IW500A covers the right rear side of the board case 012IW201 including the setting key 012IW051, the main board 11 and the like housed in the board case 012IW201 can be seen through the transparent security cover 012IW500A. It is possible to easily check the mounting surface to be mounted, the state of the sealing seal, and the like.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101 and uses the RAM 102 as a work area to execute various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, the CPU 103 can generate all of various random numbers used on the main substrate 11 side by executing a random number generating program.

In this characteristic part 099IW, on the side of the main board 11, in addition to the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the numerical data indicating each of the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination, the normal figure display result determination random number MR4, and the random number MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 is controlled to be countable. Random numbers other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. These random numbers MR1 to MR5 may be counted by software update using different random counters in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. FIG. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100 or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100 . Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

The ROM 101 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data and the like used for controlling the progress of the game in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. In addition, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main substrate 11, a variation pattern table storing a plurality of variation patterns as variation modes of each symbol in variation display such as special symbols and normal symbols, and the like.

The determination table stored by the ROM 101 includes, for example, a display result determination table (setting value 1) shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), a display result determination table (setting value 2) shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), a display result determination table (setting value 3) shown in FIG. 8-7 (C), a jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. A judgment table, a general pattern display result judgment table (not shown), a general pattern fluctuation pattern judgment table (not shown), etc. are included.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 in this characteristic portion 099IW is configured such that the probability of winning a big hit (ball output rate) changes according to the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the winning probability of the big hit (ball output rate) is changed. The setting value consists of three levels from 1 to 3, where 1 is the lowest ball payout rate, and the higher the value is in the order of 1, 2, and 3, the higher the ball payout rate is. That is, when 1 is set as the set value, the advantage for the player is the lowest, and the advantage increases stepwise as the value increases in the order of 2 and 3. It should be noted that, in this characteristic portion 099IW, the winning probability of the small win is the same regardless of the set value.

(Display result judgment table)
FIGS. 8-7 (A) to (C) are explanatory diagrams showing the display result determination table corresponding to each set value. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which hit determination values to be compared with MR1 are set. In each display result determination table, a determination value for a big win and a determination value for a small win are set for each of the case where the variable special figure designation buffer is 1 (first), that is, the first special symbol is subject to variable display, and the variable special figure designation buffer is 2 (second), that is, the second special symbol is subject to variable display.

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 1, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, that is, when the first special symbol is subject to variable display, the big hit is won with a probability lower than when the setting value is "2" or "3" (1/320 at the time of non-probability change, 1/32 at the time of probability change). On the other hand, some of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to small wins, and small wins are won with the same probability (1/99) as when the set values are '2' and '3'. When the variable special figure designating buffer is the second, the same determination value as when the variable special figure designating buffer is the first is set as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, and even when the second special symbol is the object of the variable display, the big win is won with the same probability (1/320 when the variable special symbol is non-variable and 1/32 when the probability is variable) as when the first special symbol is the object of the variable display. On the other hand, since half of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to the small prize, the small prize is won with a higher probability (1/2) than when the first special pattern is subject to variable display.

Also, as shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), when the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 2 is used, if the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is "1" Higher probability (1/300 at non-probability change, 1/30 at probability change) to win a big hit. On the other hand, some of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to small wins, and small wins are won with the same probability (1/99) as when the set values are '1' and '3'. In addition, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, a determination value similar to that in the case where the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big win, and even when the second special symbol is the object of the variable display, the big win is won with the same probability (1/300 at the time of non-variability, 1/30 at the time of probability variation) as when the first special symbol is the object of variable display. On the other hand, since half of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to the small prize, the probability of winning the small prize is higher than when the first special symbol is the object of the variable display, and the same probability (1/2) as when the set values are ``1'' and ``3''.

Also, as shown in FIG. 8-7 (C), when the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 3 is used, if the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is "1", "2". On the other hand, some of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to small wins, and small wins are won with the same probability (1/99) as when the set values are '1' and '2'. In addition, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, a determination value similar to that in the case where the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as a judgment value corresponding to the big win, and even when the second special symbol is the object of the variable display, the big win is won with the same probability (1/280 at the time of non-variability, 1/28 at the time of probability variation) as when the first special symbol is the object of the variable display. On the other hand, since half of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to the small prize, the probability of winning the small prize is higher than when the first special symbol is the object of variable display, and the same probability (1/2) as when the set values are ``1'' and ``2''.

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value set at that time, and when the value of MR1 matches one of the hit determination values corresponding to the big hits shown in FIGS. Also, when MR1 coincides with any of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hits shown in FIGS. That is, the winning of the big win and the small win is determined with the probability corresponding to the set value. The "probability" shown in FIGS. 8-7(A) to (C) indicates the probability (percentage) of a big win and the probability (percentage) of a small win. Determining whether or not to make a big win means to decide whether to control to a big win game state or not, but it also means to decide whether or not to make a stop pattern on the first special pattern display device 4A or the second special pattern display device 4B a big win pattern. Determining whether to make a small win means to decide whether to control to a small win game state or not, but it also means to decide whether to make a stop pattern on the first special pattern display device 4A or the second special pattern display device 4B a small win pattern.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 8-7, the probability of winning a small win is the same regardless of the set value, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, similar to the winning probability of the big win, the probability of winning the small win may be increased in the order of 1, 2 and 3 as the set value increases. Further, in this case, the setting difference of the winning probability of the small win may be set to the same ratio as the setting difference of the winning probability of the big win. Specifically, if the winning probability of the small win at the setting value "1" is 1/100, the winning probability of the small win at the setting value "2" may be designed to be 1/93.75, and the winning probability of the small win at the setting value "3" may be set to 1/87.5.

Also, in a gaming machine that does not provide a small hit, the configuration shown in the present characteristic portion 099IW may be applied.

In addition, in this characteristic part 099IW, the CPU 103 uses the display result determination tables shown in FIGS. 8-7 (A) to (C) to determine whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit, but the big hit determination table and the small hit determination table are provided separately, and the big hit determination is performed using a common table for the case of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol and the case of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol without depending on the variable special symbol designation buffer, The determination of the small hit may be performed using different tables depending on whether the variable special figure designation buffer is the first or the second buffer.

Further, in this characteristic part 099IW, the case is shown in which the advantage increases in the order of setting value "1"<setting value "2"<setting value "3", but for example, the order of advantage may be changed according to the game state. For example, when applied to a gaming machine that is controlled to a high-probability/high-base state, maintains the high-probability/high-base state until the next big win occurs, and is configured so that a certain amount of prize balls can be obtained in a small win game, in this example, as shown in FIG. In the base state), unlike other game states, the set value "1" may be set to have the highest advantage, in which a big win is unlikely to occur (high probability/high base state is likely to continue).

Further, for example, after being controlled to the variable probability state (high probability state), when applied to a gaming machine in which the variable probability state ends based on the execution of the variable display of a predetermined number of times (number of times of probability variable end), the probability variable continuation rate (continuation rate) may be increased in the order of set value "1" < set value "2" < set value "3" if the probability variable end count is the same.

In addition, in this characteristic part 099IW, a total of three setting values 1 to 3 are provided as setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be two or four or more.

(Jackpot type determination table)
FIG. 8-8(A) is an explanatory diagram showing a big hit type determination table stored in the ROM 101. FIG. In this characteristic part 099IW, a common jackpot type determination table is used in the case of determining the jackpot type using the reservation memory based on the game ball winning the first start winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed) and the case of determining the jackpot type using the reservation memory based on the game ball winning the second start winning opening (that is, when the second special symbol is changed). A table may be provided so that the percentages of which jackpot types are determined are different.

The jackpot type determination table is a table referred to for determining the jackpot type to any of jackpot types A to jackpot types C based on a random number (MR2) for jackpot type determination when it is determined that a variation display result is to be a jackpot pattern.

In the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 8-8 (A), a determination value corresponding to the random number (MR2) for jackpot type determination is assigned for each set value, but for the sake of simplifying the description, the ratio of the assigned determination value is shown. In other words, the ratio of which one of the jackpot types A to jackpot types C is determined for each set value is shown. It should be noted that the determination value corresponding to the random number is actually assigned to the loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 8-9 and the non-reach loss variation pattern determination table illustrated in FIGS.

As shown in FIG. 8-8(A), in the jackpot type determination table, when the setting value is "1", the percentage of determination of the jackpot type C is high, when the set value is "2", the percentage of determination of the jackpot type B is high, and when the set value is "3", the determination values are assigned such that the percentage of determination of the jackpot type A is high.

Here, the jackpot type in the characteristic portion 099IW will be described with reference to FIG. 8-8(B). In the characteristic portion 099IW, the fanfare period, the interval period and the ending period in the jackpot game are defined for each jackpot type.

The fanfare period is, for example, a period during which the big win opening preprocessing of step S114 is executed on the main substrate 11 side, and a period during which the fanfare performance as a performance operation for informing the start of the big win game state is executed after the big win pattern is stopped and displayed on the first performance control board 012IW12a and the second performance control board 012IW12b side.

The interval period is, for example, the period during which the big win opening post-processing of step S116 is executed on the main board 11 side, and the period during which the interval performance as the effect operation for informing the start of the next round is executed after the round in which the big winning opening is opened is completed on the first effect control board 012IW12a and the second effect control board 012IW12b.

The ending period is, for example, a period during which the big win ending process of step S117 is executed on the main board 11 side, and a period during which an ending effect as a performance operation for notifying the end of the big win game state is executed on the first effect control board 012IW12a and the second effect control board 012IW12b side.

As shown in FIG. 8-8(B), the fanfare period, the interval period and the ending period are set to be the longest in the case of the jackpot type A, the longest in the case of the jackpot type B, and the shortest in the case of the jackpot type C.

As described above, in this characteristic section 099IW, when the setting value is "1", the ratio of determination of the jackpot type C is high, so the fanfare period, the interval period and the ending period tend to be relatively short. On the other hand, when the set value is "3", the ratio of determination of jackpot type A is high, so the fanfare period, the interval period and the ending period tend to be relatively long. Therefore, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the average period of the ending period become longer in the order of the setting values "1"<"2"<"3".

This characteristic part 099IW is configured such that the probability of winning a jackpot (ball output rate) increases in the order of set values "1"<"2"<"3", but at the same time, the average period of fanfare period, interval period and ending period increases in the order of set values "1"<"2"<"3". With such a configuration, when the winning probability of a big win (ball output rate) is set to be high, the average period of the fanfare period, the interval period and the ending period can be lengthened, that is, the progress of the game can be delayed, and gambling can be prevented from becoming too high.

This characteristic part 099IW is configured to be able to execute a mid-jackpot suggesting performance (details will be described later) suggesting a set value during a big-hit game, and this mid-jackpot suggesting performance can be executed in a fanfare period, an interval period and an ending period. With such a configuration, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period can be enhanced. Also, by directing the player's attention to the effect suggesting during the big win, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the length of each period.

In the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period, a common effect may be executed regardless of the length of the set period. In this case, it is desirable that an effect (for example, display of a still image, etc.) that is difficult for the player to notice the length of the period is executed in common.

In addition, in this characteristic part 099IW, the fanfare period, the interval period and the ending period are set for each jackpot type, and the ratio of which jackpot type is determined differs for each set value, so that when the probability of winning the jackpot (ball output rate) is high, the average period of the fanfare period, the interval period and the ending period is lengthened, that is, the progress of the game is delayed. The interval period and the ending period may be fixedly set. Further, for example, one of a plurality of types of fanfare periods, interval periods, and ending periods having different predetermined periods may be determined by lottery. In this case, by using a table in which determination values are set so that the rate of selecting a fanfare period, an interval period and an ending period in which a relatively long period is set increases in the order of the jackpot type A<B<C, the average period of the fanfare period, the interval period and the ending period can be lengthened in the order of the set values '1'<'2'<'3'.

In this feature part 099IW, in any of the jackpot types A to C, the time saving control and probability variation control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state are terminated by executing a special game a predetermined number of times (100 times in this feature part 099IW) or by entering a jackpot gaming state before the predetermined number of special games are performed. However, in the case of a specific jackpot type, the high accuracy control and time saving control executed after the jackpot game state is ended may be continuously executed until the jackpot occurs again after the jackpot game state is finished. In the case of such a specific jackpot type, a jackpot game state occurs continuously without going through the normal state, which is a so-called continuous game state. This characteristic part 099IW is configured so that the percentage of big hits differs for each set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, but in addition to or instead of such a configuration, the variable probability continuation rate (continuous game rate) may differ for each set value.

In addition, in this feature part 099IW, there is no difference in the degree of advantage between the jackpot types A to C (for example, the number of rounds during the jackpot game, the presence or absence of time reduction control and variable probability control, the number of times of control, etc.), and the average period of the fanfare period, the interval period and the ending period is different. It can be different. In this case, the performance during the round may be different for each big win type, or may be the same regardless of the big win type.

In this characterizing part 099IW, according to the set value, the jackpot type when the variation display result is a jackpot is determined at a different rate from jackpot type A, jackpot type B, and jackpot type C. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and depending on the set value, there may be one or more jackpot types that cannot be decided among the jackpot types A, jackpot types B, and jackpot types C. In other words, the fact that the determination ratio of the jackpot type differs according to the set value includes not determining one of the jackpot types (the determination ratio is 0%) and determining a specific jackpot type at a rate of 100%.

In addition, in this characteristic part 099IW, the case where the fanfare period, the interval period and the ending period are different according to the jackpot type is shown, but the fanfare period, the interval period and the ending period may be made different regardless of the jackpot type. For example, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period may be uniformly determined according to which of the set values "1" to "3". Further, for example, according to which of the set values "1" to "3", a lottery process is performed with the selection probability according to the set value, and the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period may be determined.

As described above, in this characteristic part 099IW, since the determination ratio of the jackpot type when the variable display result is a jackpot differs depending on the set value, the game interest can be improved.

In this characteristic part 099IW, the jackpot type is determined using MR2, which is a random number for judging the jackpot type.

In addition, in this characteristic part 099IW, the larger the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player (increase in the probability of a big win or a small win, the easier it is to determine the big win type C as the big win type, etc.).

In addition, in this characteristic part 099IW, while the jackpot probability changes according to the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the game property itself does not change, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the game property may change according to the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1.

For example, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the variable probability state is 65%. While the game state after the end of the jackpot game is controlled to a variable probability state based on passing through the count switch, the rate of the game ball passing through the count switch during the jackpot game is different according to the jackpot type (so-called V probability variable type). (so-called 1-type 2-type mixed type) that controls to a big hit game state based on passing through a predetermined count switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 . Furthermore, although the set values set in the pachinko game machine 1 are 1 to 3 and the game property is the same, a setting (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 4) may be provided while the probability of a big win or a small win is higher than when the set values are any of 1 to 3 while the probability of a small win is higher and the number of winning balls obtainable during the big win game is smaller.

Furthermore, in the case of changing the playability according to the setting value in this way, common switches may be used for different purposes. Specifically, in the above example, when the set value is 1 or 4, a predetermined count switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as an effect switch (a switch for executing a predetermined effect each time a game ball passes through the count switch), and when the set value is 2 or 3, the predetermined count switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as a game switch (a game state is changed to a definite state or a big hit based on the game ball passing through the count switch). You may use it as a switch) for controlling to a game state.

(Small hit type determination table)
FIG. 8-8 (C) is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit type determination table stored in the ROM 101. FIG. As shown in FIG. 8-8(C), in this characterizing portion 099IW, small hit types A to C are provided as small hit types. As shown in FIG. 8-8 (C), in this characteristic portion 099IW, regardless of which of the setting values "1" to "3", the determination ratio of the small hit types A to C is the same.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 099IW, the opening period and number of openings of the big winning opening during the small winning game are the same regardless of any of the small winning types A to C, and the degree of advantage in the game is the same.

(Variation pattern judgment table)
In addition, the ROM 101 also stores a variation pattern determination table for determining a variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the variation pattern is determined as one of the plurality of types described above according to the pre-determined result.

Specifically, as the variation pattern determination table, a big hit variation pattern determination table used when it is determined in advance that the variation display result is a ``big win'', a small winning variation pattern determination table used when it is determined in advance that the variation display result is a ``small hit'', and a loss variation pattern determination table used when it is determined in advance that the variation display result is a ``loss'' are prepared in advance.

(Loss fluctuation pattern judgment table)
FIG. 8-9 is an explanatory diagram showing a loss variation pattern determination table. This characteristic part 099IW is configured to use different failure variation pattern determination tables for a period (hereinafter also referred to as a special period) from the time when the setting is changed when the power is turned on until the variation display is performed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example), and for the other period (hereinafter also referred to as a non-special period).

Specifically, in the special period, the variation pattern is determined using the first loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 8-9 (A), and in the non-special period, the second loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. In this characteristic portion 099IW, the special period is the period from when the setting is changed when the power is turned on until the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example). However, the present invention is not limited to this. Also, using a real-time clock 012IW126 or the like, a predetermined time period (for example, from 9:00 am to 11:00 am) may be set as a special period. Also, the period until the first big hit occurs may be set as the special period.

In both the first and second losing variation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 8-9 (A) and (B), determination values are assigned so that the percentage of normal reach losing and super reach losing is high and the percentage of non-reach losing is low in the order of setting values "1" < "2" < "3". With such a configuration, the execution ratio of normal reach and super reach differs depending on the set value, so the set value is suggested by the frequency with which normal reach and super reach are executed.

In addition, the first loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 8-9(A) has a higher ratio of normal reach loss than the second loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. With such a configuration, in the special period, the difference in the frequency of execution of the normal reach becomes easier to recognize than in the non-special period (that is, it becomes easier to recognize the suggestion of the setting value), so that the player can be motivated to play the game during the special period and the interest in the game can be enhanced.

In addition, for example, the variation pattern with super reach (or a specific variation pattern thereof) may be determined at the same rate regardless of the difference in set values (or regardless of the difference between the special period and the non-special period). By doing so, according to the setting value, the execution ratio of only a specific variation pattern (normal reach loss in this example) will differ, and the setting value will be suggested by the frequency of execution of the specific variation pattern. In addition, conversely, the selection ratio of the variation pattern that results in super reach loss may also be varied according to the set value.

In addition, in the first and second losing variation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 8-9 (A) and (B), determination values are assigned so that the ratio of normal reach losing and super reach losing (that is, the balance between normal reach losing and super reach losing) differs according to the set value when non-reach losing. Specifically, in the first losing variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 8-9(A), the normal reach losing ratio increases significantly (in this example, increases by 5% in increments of 5%) in the order of setting values “1”<“2”<“3”. Specifically, in the second losing variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. increased by 0.2%). With such a configuration, the set value is suggested by the selection tendency between the normal reach loss and the super reach loss. In addition, it is possible to increase the difference in selection tendency between the special period and the non-special period.

In this characteristic part 099IW, it is possible to execute the setting suggesting effect at different ratios according to the setting value, but this is a concept including that the execution ratio of the entire normal reach losing and super reach losing differs according to the setting value, the execution ratio of normal reach losing and super reach losing differs according to the setting value, and the execution ratio of only normal reach losing differs according to the setting value.

In this characteristic part 099IW, the common background image is displayed on the image display device 5 even when any of the first and second losing variation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. Also, when the set value is set to any one of 1 to 3, the common background image is displayed on the image display device 5, and the decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner. Note that a dedicated background image may be displayed only during a special period or during a period from when the power is turned on until the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example). With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game during the special period or the period from when the power is turned on until the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example).

In addition, not limited to the example of this characteristic part 099IW, for example, a special variation pattern suggesting a set value (for example, a variation pattern in which the aspect of the variation display of the decorative pattern is different from the usual one, and the set value is 1 or 2) may be provided so that the special variation pattern can be selected only in the special period. With such a configuration as well, it is possible to give motivation to play a game during the special period, and to increase the interest in the game.

(Non-reach loss fluctuation pattern judgment table)
FIG. 8-10 is an explanatory diagram showing a non-reach-losing variation pattern determination table. In this characteristic part 099IW, a plurality of types of non-reach-loss variation patterns with different variation times are provided, and when the variation pattern is determined to be non-reach-loss, it is configured to determine which one of non-reach-loss A to C. In addition, not limited to such a configuration, for example, non-reach loss A to C are included in the loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 8-10, in the non -reached fluctuation pattern judgment table, if the set value is "1", the percentage determined to be non -reached and "fluctuated time 7 seconds) is high, and the set value is" 2 ", the percentage determined to be non -reached B (fluctuation time 8 seconds) is high, and the configuration value is" 3 ". The judging value is assigned so that the percentage determined to reach the reach loss A (9 seconds of fluctuation time) is higher.

In this characteristic portion 099IW, when the setting value is "1", the rate of determination as non-reach loss C is high, so the variation time at the time of non-reach loss tends to be relatively short. On the other hand, when the set value is "3", the rate of determination as non-reach loss A is high, so the fluctuation time during non-reach loss tends to be relatively long. Therefore, the average fluctuation time becomes longer in the order of set values "1"<"2"<"3".

This characteristic part 099IW is configured such that the probability of winning a jackpot (ball output rate) increases in the order of set values ``1'' < ``2'' < ``3'', but at the same time, it is also configured so that the average fluctuation time lengthens in the order of set values ``1'' < ``2'' < ``3''. With such a configuration, when the probability of winning a big win (ball output rate) is set high, the average variation time can be lengthened, that is, the progress of the game can be delayed, and gambling can be prevented from becoming too high.

This characteristic part 099IW is configured to vary the average fluctuation time by varying the ratio of which one of the non-reach losses A to C with different fluctuation times according to the setting value. For example, a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns other than non-reach loss (for example, normal reach loss, super reach loss, etc.) may be provided with different fluctuation times, and the selected ratio may differ according to the set value. In addition, when a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns (for example, normal reach loss, super reach loss, etc.) are provided so that the fluctuation time is different, it is desirable to make the time of the fluctuation display of the decorative pattern and the high speed fluctuation display different so that there is no difference in the appearance of the production.

In addition, the present characteristic part 099IW is configured so that the average fluctuation time varies depending on the set value, but instead of or in addition to such a configuration, the period during which the fixed decorative pattern (final stop symbol) is stop-displayed may vary depending on the set value. With such a configuration, when the probability of winning a big win (ball output rate) is set to be high, it is possible to lengthen the period during which fixed decoration patterns (final stop patterns) are stop-displayed, that is, delay the progress of the game and prevent gambling from becoming too high.

In addition, in this characteristic part 099IW, the variable time is set for each of the non-reachable losses A to C, and the ratio of which one of the non-reachable losses A to C is determined is different for each set value, so that when the probability of winning the big win (ball output rate) is set to be high, the average variable time is lengthened, that is, the progress of the game is delayed. A setting with a higher probability (ball-out rate) may have a longer variation time.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 099IW, a variation pattern for shortening whose variation time is shorter than other variation patterns is provided. For example, there is provided a variation pattern of shortened non-reach loss (variation time 1.5 seconds) whose variation time is shorter than non-reach loss A (variation time 9 seconds). This shortening variation pattern is configured to be used, for example, when the reserved storage number is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (eg, 3). Such a configuration is intended to eliminate this state when the number of retained memories reaches or is close to the upper limit, and to efficiently perform variable display (that is, to efficiently progress the game). Therefore, it can be said that it is inappropriate to delay the progress of the game when the reserved memory number is equal to or greater than the predetermined number. Therefore, in this characteristic portion 099IW, the shortening variation pattern used when the number of pending memories is equal to or greater than the predetermined number has a common variation time regardless of the set value. Regardless of the configuration of this characteristic portion 099IW, the shortening variation pattern used when the number of reserved memories is equal to or greater than a predetermined number may also vary in variation time according to the set value.

(setting confirmation processing, setting change processing)
Next, the change of the setting value of the pachinko game machine 1 in this characterizing portion 099IW will be described. FIGS. 8-11 to 8-13 are flowcharts showing game control main processing in the characterizing part 099IW. In this characteristic portion 099IW, the processing of steps IWS001-S002 is the same as the processing of steps S1-S2 shown in FIG.

When the initial setting is performed, the CPU 103 sets an effect control means activation wait timer for measuring the time until the effect control means (specifically, the first effect control CPU 012IW120a and the second effect control CPU 012IW120b) is activated when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (step 012IWS003). In this case, sufficient time is set to the effect control means startup waiting timer from when the power supply to the gaming machine is started until the first effect control CPU 012IW120a and the second effect control CPU 012IW120b are activated. Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the effect control means activation wait timer (step 012IWS004), and confirms whether or not the value of the effect control means activation wait timer after the subtraction is 0 (step 012IWS005). If the value of the effect control means activation waiting timer is not 0, the process returns to step 012IWS004, and the processing of steps 012IWS004 to S005 is repeatedly executed. If the value of the effect control means activation waiting timer is 0, the process proceeds to step 012IWS006.

By executing the processing of steps 012IWS003 to S005, after waiting until the first effect control CPU 012IW120a and the second effect control CPU 012IW120b are started, the processing after step 012IWS006 is executed, and the setting values are changed and confirmed, and the RAM is initialized and restored. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which various kinds of commands such as a setting value command, an initialization designation command, a command for recovery, etc., which will be described later, are transmitted before the first performance control CPU 012IW120a and the second performance control CPU 012IW120b are activated, and the occurrence of missing commands can be prevented.

Next, the CPU 103 resets the RAM clear flag indicating that the clear switch has been pressed when the game machine is powered on (step 012IWS006).

In this example, the RAM clear flag is not cleared in the later-described power-off process (see step 012IWS031), and the RAM clear flag is once cleared in step 012IWS006 when the gaming machine is powered on. After that, if the clear switch is set, the RAM clear flag is newly set (see steps 012IWS016 and S022). For example, the RAM clear flag may also be cleared when the power-off process is executed, and then if the clear switch is set when the game machine is powered on, the RAM clear flag may be newly set.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) by the same process as in step S4 (step 012IWS007). Specifically, at step 012IWS007, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the backup flag is ON. If the backup flag is off and backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step 012IWS007; No), the process proceeds to step 012IWS012.

If backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step 012IWS007; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a data check of the backed up data (using an error detection code) in the same manner as in step S5, and determines whether the data is normal (step 012IWS008). At step 012IWS008, for example, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data at the time when the power supply was stopped, using a parity bit or a checksum. If it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal. If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step 012IWS008; No), the process proceeds to step 012IWS010.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step 012IWS008; Yes), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the set value stored in the RAM 102 is a value other than the set values "1" to "3" (step 012IWS009). If the set value stored in the RAM 102 is one of the set values "1" to "3", the process proceeds to step 012IWS011.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (N at step 012IWS008) or if it is determined that the set value stored in the RAM 102 is a value other than the set values "1" to "3" (Y at step 012IWS009), the CPU 103 sets a RAM abnormality flag indicating that an abnormality has occurred in the RAM 102 (step 012IWS010). Then, the process proceeds to step 012IWS012.

When the setting value stored in the RAM 102 is one of the setting values "1" to "3" (N in step 012IWS009), the CPU 103 checks whether or not a setting change flag indicating that setting change processing for changing the setting value is being executed is set (step 012IWS011). If the setting changing flag is set (step 012IWS011; Yes), that is, if the power supply to the game machine is restarted due to a power failure or the like during the change of the setting value, the process proceeds to step 012IWS012.

At step 012IWS012, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door opening sensor 012IW090 is on (step 012IWS012). If the output signal from the door open sensor 012IW090 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the setting key 012IW051 is on (step 012IWS013). If the setting key 012IW051 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is on (step 012IWS014). If the output signal from the clear switch is on, the CPU 103 executes RAM clear 2 processing (step 012IWS015).

In this example, the RAM clear processing includes RAM clear 1 processing (see step 012IWS051) and RAM clear 2 processing (see step 012IWS015) which is executed when a RAM error occurs.

In the RAM clear 1 process, the CPU 103 clears the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area. However, in the RAM clear 1 process, the memory area of the RAM 102 other than the area for storing performance display information such as continuous ratio, role ratio, and base and the area for storing setting values is cleared, and the performance display information such as continuous ratio, role ratio, base, and setting value information are not cleared and held. The storage area of the RAM 102 cleared by the RAM clear 1 process is hereinafter referred to as a clear storage area 1 .

In the RAM clear 2 process, the CPU 103 clears the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area. However, in the RAM clear 2 process, the area other than the area for storing performance display information such as continuous ratio, role ratio, and base is cleared in the storage area of RAM 102, and the performance display information such as continuous ratio, role ratio, and base is not cleared but held. In addition, in the RAM clear 2 process, the set values stored in the RAM 102 are also cleared. The storage area of the RAM 102 cleared by the RAM clear 2 process is hereinafter referred to as a clear storage area 2 . Therefore, in this example, the clear storage area 2 of the RAM 102 cleared by the RAM clear 2 process is wider than the clear storage area 1 of the RAM 102 cleared by the RAM clear 1 process.

Then, the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag (step 012IWS016) and proceeds to step 012IWS025. Note that the RAM clear flag is set in the clear storage area 2 of the RAM 102 .

On the other hand, if the output signal from the door opening sensor 012IW090 is off (N at step 012IWS012), if the setting key 012IW051 is off (N at step 012IWS013), or if the output signal from the clear switch is off (N at step 012IWS014), the CPU 103 issues a set value abnormality error command to the second effect control CPU 012IW120b. (Step 012IWS017).

Next, the CPU 103 shifts to the loop processing of steps 012IWS018 to S020. In the loop processing, the CPU 103 executes 4ms wait processing for measuring a 4ms wait time (step 012IWS018). Then, after the wait time of 4 ms has elapsed, the CPU 103 shifts to step 012IWS019 and displays a predetermined error (step 012IWS019). For example, the CPU 103 performs control to display a display indicating a RAM abnormality error (for example, display of "E") on the display monitor 012IW029. Further, the CPU 103 performs control for externally outputting a security signal to an external device such as a hall computer through the external terminal board (step 012IWS020). Then, the processing after step 012IWS018 is repeatedly executed.

By executing the processing of steps 012IWS007 to S020, in this characteristic part 099IW, when the backup RAM is not normal (N in steps 012IWS007 and S008, Y in step 012IWS009), or when power failure occurs during setting change (Y in step 012IWS011), the setting key 012 On the condition that the IW051 is turned on and the clear switch is turned on, the RAM is cleared, and the setting values after step 012 and IWS025 can be changed. On the other hand, unless the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is opened and the setting key 012IW051 and the clear switch are turned on, loop processing is executed, setting values cannot be changed, and game control does not proceed.

If the setting changing flag is not set (step 012IWS011; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is on (step 012IWS021). If the output signal from the clear switch is on, the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag (step 012IWS022).

In this example, the processing of steps 012IWS022 and 012IWS016 is executed to set the RAM clear flag when the turning-on of the clear switch is first detected when the game machine is powered on. Then, after that, until the timer interrupt is set and the timer interrupt processing (game control processing) is started, there are a plurality of scenes where it is confirmed whether or not the clear switch is turned on when the power is turned on. Instead of directly confirming the state of the clear switch, it is determined whether or not the clear switch is turned on when the power is turned on by confirming whether or not the RAM clear flag is set (see steps 012IWS025, S034, and S048).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door opening sensor 012IW090 is ON (step 012IWS023). If the output signal from the door opening sensor 012IW090 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the setting key 012IW051 is on (step 012IWS024). If the setting key 012IW051 is on, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the RAM clear flag is set (step 012IWS025). If the RAM clear flag is not set, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a setting confirmation command indicating execution of setting confirmation processing for confirming the setting value to the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b (step 012IWS026). Then, the process proceeds to step 012IWS030.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear flag is set, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a setting change command to the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b to execute a setting change process for changing the setting value (step 012IWS027). Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the RAM abnormality flag is set (step 012IWS028). If the RAM abnormality flag is set (that is, if an abnormality of the RAM 102 is detected), the CPU 103 sets the setting value to "1" in the setting value determination buffer (storage area for storing the current setting value provided in the RAM 102) (step 012IWS029). Then, the process proceeds to step 012IWS030. At this time, the CPU 103 resets the RAM abnormality flag.

On the side of the first effect control board 012IW12a and the second effect control board 012IW12b, when a setting confirmation command or a setting change command is received, control is performed to notify that the setting is being confirmed or that the setting is being changed (for example, a predetermined image is displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a decorative light emitter such as a decorative LED emits light in a predetermined manner). In this case, by pressing an operation button for performance such as the push button 31B on the side of the first performance control board 012IW12a and the second performance control board 012IW12b, it may be configured to display "maintenance mode" or the like and shift to the maintenance mode. The “maintenance mode” is a mode in which, for example, the date and time setting of the real-time clock 012IW126, the history of various errors (recording when and what kind of error occurred), and the setting change history (recording when the set value was changed and the set value after change) can be checked. When the setting key 012IW051 is turned off and the setting confirmation process and the setting change process are completed, the maintenance mode is also terminated.

Next, the CPU 103 executes 4ms wait processing for measuring a 4ms wait time (step 012IWS030). Then, after the wait time of 4 ms has elapsed, the CPU 103 shifts to step 012IWS031 and executes power-off processing (step 012IWS031). In the power-off process of step 012IWS031, the CPU 103 executes a process of detecting whether or not a power-off signal has been output (whether or not the power has turned on). The power-off signal is output when, for example, a power monitoring circuit mounted on the power board detects a drop in the voltage of the power supplied to the gaming machine. In the power-off process, when the CPU 103 detects that the power-off signal has been output, the CPU 103 executes the power-supply-off process for saving necessary data (eg, backup flag, checksum) in the backup RAM area.

Next, the CPU 103 identifies the set values stored in the set value determination buffer, and displays the identified set values on the display monitor 012IW029 (step 012IWS032). Further, the CPU 103 performs control for externally outputting a security signal to an external device such as a hall computer through the external terminal board (step 012IWS033).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the RAM clear flag is set (step 012IWS034). If the RAM clear flag is not set, the process proceeds directly to step 012IWS043.

If the RAM clear flag is set, the CPU 103 sets the setting changing flag (step 012IWS035) and starts setting change processing. Next, it is checked whether or not the initial setting completion flag indicating that the value has already been set to the clear switch buffer for the first time since the gaming machine was turned on is set (step 012IWS036). The clear switch buffer is provided in the RAM 102 and is a buffer for setting the input state of the clear switch (whether it is on or off). For example, the clear switch buffer is set to a value of "1" when the clear switch is on, and set to a value of "0" when the clear switch is off. If the initial setting completion flag is set (if the value has already been set to the clear switch buffer for the first time since the game machine was turned on), the process proceeds directly to step 012IWS039.

If the first set flag has not been set (that is, if no value has been set to the clear switch buffer since the game machine was turned on), the CPU 103 sets a value (for example, "1") indicating an ON state to the clear switch buffer (step 012IWS037). Also, the CPU 103 sets an initial setting flag (step 012IWS038).

Next, the CPU 103 sets the value currently set in the clear switch buffer to the previous clear switch buffer (step 012IWS039). The previous clear switch buffer is provided in the RAM 102 and is a buffer for setting the input state (on state or off state) of the clear switch confirmed last time (4 ms ago in this example). For example, the previous clear switch buffer is set to a value of "1" if the previously confirmed clear switch is in the ON state, and is set to a value of "0" if it is in the OFF state.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms the current input state of the clear switch and sets the current input state of the clear switch in the clear switch buffer (step 012IWS040). Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether the value set in the clear switch buffer last time was in the OFF state (eg, "0") and whether the value set in the clear switch buffer was in the ON state (eg, "1") (step 012IWS041).

If the value set in the clear switch buffer last time is OFF and the value set in the clear switch buffer is ON, the CPU 103 updates and displays the setting value displayed on the display monitor 012IW029 and stores it in the setting value determination buffer (updates and stores the already stored setting value) (step 012IWS042). For example, when "1" is displayed as the setting value on the display monitor 012IW029, the display of the display monitor 012IW029 is updated to "2", and the setting value "2" is stored in the setting value determination buffer. Also, when "2" is displayed as the setting value on the display monitor 012IW029, the display on the display monitor 012IW029 is updated to "3", and the setting value determination buffer stores the setting value "3". Also, when "3" is displayed as the setting value on the display monitor 012IW029, the display of the display monitor 012IW029 is updated to "1", and the setting value "1" is stored in the setting value determination buffer.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the setting key 012IW051 is on (step 012IWS043). If the setting key 012IW051 remains ON, the process proceeds to step 012IWS030, and the processes of steps 012IWS030 to S043 are repeatedly executed, and the setting confirmation process and setting change process are repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the setting key 012IW051 is off, the CPU 103 ends the setting confirmation process and setting change process, and proceeds to step 012IWS044.

By executing the processing of steps 012IWS025 to S043, if the RAM clear flag is not set (that is, if the clear switch is not turned on when the game machine is turned on) (steps 012IWS025 and S034: N), the setting confirmation command is transmitted (step 012IWS026), and the setting confirmation processing (especially step 012IWS032) is only performed, and the setting change processing is performed. No. On the other hand, if the RAM clear flag is set (that is, if the clear switch is turned on when the game machine is powered on) (steps 012IWS025, Y in S034), a setting change command is transmitted (step 012IWS027), and setting confirmation processing (especially steps 012IWS032) and setting change processing (especially steps 012IWS035 to S042) are performed.

Next, the CPU 103 sets a predetermined value (for example, a value corresponding to 30 seconds) to the security information timer for setting the output period of the security signal (step 012IWS044). In this example, if the setting confirmation processing and setting change processing are executed when the power is turned on to the game machine, the external output of the security signal is started by executing the step 012IWS033. By executing the information output process (step S23) based on the value, the security signal is continuously output until the prescribed period (eg, 30 seconds) elapses.

On the other hand, in this example, the processing of step 012IWS020 is executed to externally output the security signal even when a RAM abnormality or the like occurs. In this case, the security signal is continuously externally output until the power supply to the game machine is reset.

Next, the CPU 103 resets the setting changing flag (step 012IWS045). Also, the CPU 103 erases the set values displayed on the display monitor 012IW029 (step 012IWS046). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a set value command indicating the set set value to the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b (step 012IWS047).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the RAM clear flag is set (step 012IWS048). If the RAM clear flag is not set, the process proceeds to step 012 IWS049 for recovery processing. It should be noted that the processing of steps 012IWS049 and S050 in this characteristic portion 099IW is the same as the processing of steps S6 and S7 shown in FIG.

If the RAM clear flag is set, the CPU 103 executes RAM clear 1 processing to clear the clear storage area 1 of the RAM 102 (012IWS051). The processing of steps 012IWS052 to S055 in this characteristic portion 099IW is the same as the processing of steps S9 to S12 shown in FIG.

8-14 are explanatory diagrams showing the processing executed at power-on. In this characteristic portion 099IW, as shown in FIG. 8-14, when the setting key 012IW051 is on (and when the output signal from the door open sensor 012IW090 is on) when the power is turned on, if the clear switch is on, setting confirmation processing (particularly step 012IWS032) and setting change processing (particularly 012IWS035 to S042) are executed, and initialization processing (RAM clear 1 processing (step 0 12IWS051)) is executed, and if the clear switch is off, only the setting confirmation process (especially step 012IWS032) is executed and the recovery process (step 012IWS049) is executed. If the setting key 012IW051 is off when the power is turned on, only the initialization process (RAM clear 1 process (step 012IWS051)) is executed if the clear switch is on, and only the recovery process (step 012IWS049) is executed if the clear switch is off.

Next, the display mode of the display monitor 012IW029 in the setting confirmation process and the setting change process will be described. First, as shown in FIGS. 8-15 (A) and 8-15 (B), when the power is turned off (powered off) by the operation of a store clerk or the like, the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, thereby ending the display on the display monitor 012IW029. If the big winning opening is open during a big winning game or a small winning game at the timing of turning off the power, the big winning opening is closed by stopping the power supply to the solenoid 82 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-15 (C), when the game arcade clerk or the like turns on the power while operating the clear switch (if Yes in step S3 of the game control main processing), the setting key 012IW051 is ON On the condition that the setting confirmation process is executed by the CPU 103, and the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is displayed on the display monitor 012IW029.

In the state where the setting values are displayed on the display monitor 012IW029 in this way, as shown in FIG. 8D, the CPU 103 sequentially updates the numerical values displayed on the display monitor 012IW029 (for example, updates 1→2→3→1→ . In addition, the setting values displayed on the display monitor 012IW029 are stored (updated) in the backup area of the RAM 102 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-15(E), the CPU 103 turns off the display monitor 012IW029 on the basis that the setting key 012IW051 is turned off by the operation of the game hall clerk or the like, thereby notifying the game hall clerk or the like that the new set values have been stored in the backup area of the RAM 102.

Also, if the reserve memory is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102, the reserve memory is cleared. In addition, when the big winning hole is closed at the timing of FIG. 8-15 (A) (the timing when the power supply of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned off), when the setting is changed, RAM clear processing is executed and the memory related to the big win is erased, so the big winning hole remains closed. After that, the CPU 103 ends the setting change processing, and enters a state where a game can be played, that is, a state where a variation display result, a jackpot type, a lottery for determination of a variation pattern, payout of prize balls, and the like can be executed.

In the setting change processing of the characteristic portion 099IW, as an initial display to be displayed on the display monitor 012IW029, the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is exemplified. A set value ("3" for this characteristic portion 099IW) may be displayed.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 8-15, the case where the setting value is displayed using the first display of the four-digit display of the display monitor 012IW029 when confirming or changing the setting value is shown. Further, for example, the setting value may be displayed by performing a dedicated 4-digit display on the display monitor 012IW029. In this case, for example, if the setting value is "1", the display monitor 012IW029 displays 4 digits "-S-1", if the setting value is "2", the display monitor 012IW029 displays 4 digits "-S-2", or if the setting value is "3", the display monitor 012IW029 may display 4 digits "-S-3". Further, for example, the setting value may be displayed on all four digits of the display monitor 012IW029. For example, if the set value is "1", the display monitor 012IW029 may display four digits "1111", and if the set value is "2", the display monitor 012IW029 may display four digits "2222".

(Special pattern normal processing)
Next, the processing of the special symbol normal processing (step S110) in this characterizing portion 099IW will be described. FIGS. 8-16 and 8-17 are flowcharts showing special symbol normal processing (step S110) in special symbol process processing. In the special symbol normal process, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the combined reserved memory number (the total number of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number) (step 012IWS171). For example, it checks the count value of the total pending storage number counter for counting the total pending storage number.

If the total reserved storage number is not 0, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the second reserved storage number is 0 (step 012IWS172). For example, it is checked whether the count value of the second reserved storage number counter for counting the second reserved storage number is 0 or not. If the second reserved memory number is not 0, the CPU 103 sets data indicating "second" in the special symbol pointer (flag indicating whether the special symbol process is being performed for the first special symbol or the special symbol process is being performed for the second special symbol) (step 012 IWS 173). If the second reserved memory number is 0, the CPU 103 sets data indicating "first" to the special symbol pointer (step 012IWS174).

By executing the processing of steps 012IWS172 to S174, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special symbol in the characteristic portion 099IW. In addition, not limited to such a mode, for example, according to the starting winning order in which the game ball wins in the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol may be performed.

Next, the CPU 103 reads each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved memory number=1 indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 102 and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102 (step 012 IWS 175). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 reads each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number=1 in the first reserved memory buffer and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 reads out each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number=1 in the second reserved storage buffer and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102. - 特許庁

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 012IWS176). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first reserved storage number counter and shifts the contents of each storage area in the first reserved storage buffer. Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", 1 is subtracted from the count value of the second reserved storage number counter, and the contents of each storage area in the second reserved storage buffer are shifted.

That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 stores each random value stored in the saving area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved memory buffer of the RAM 102 in the saving area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n-1. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reservation storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reservation storage buffer of the RAM 102 is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reservation storage number = n-1.

Therefore, the order in which each random number stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved memory number (or each second reserved memory number) is extracted always matches the order of the first reserved memory number (or second reserved memory number)=1, 2, 3, 4.

Then, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the total pending storage number by one. That is, 1 is subtracted from the count value of the total pending storage number counter (step 012IWS177). It should be noted that the CPU 103 saves the value of the total pending storage number counter before the count value is decremented by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 .

Next, the CPU 103 transmits a set value command indicating the set value set in the RAM 102 to the second effect control board 012IW12b (step 012IWS178). As already described, in the present characteristic unit 112, the processing of step 012IWS047 is executed to transmit the setting value command when the setting change processing is executed when the power is turned on.

In this example, the same set value command is sent when the set value command is sent in step 012IWS047 and when the set value command is sent in step 012IWS178, but different commands may be sent as the set value commands. For example, in step 012IWS047, a command that directly specifies a setting value (for example, commands 9E01(H) to 9E03(H) corresponding to setting values "1" to "3") is sent, while in step 012IWS178, a variation pattern command that can specify a setting value is sent, and the same number of variation pattern commands as the setting value may be prepared (for example, in setting value "1", command 1C00(H) ~ is prepared as a variation pattern command. , Commands 2C00(H) and so forth may be prepared as variation pattern commands at the set value "2", and commands 3C00(H) and so forth may be prepared as variation pattern commands at the set value "3".

In addition, in the above configuration, if a different variation pattern command is transmitted for each set value even when the same variation pattern is used, the total number of variation patterns x the number of set values (in this example, 3) worth of variation pattern commands are required, which may increase the data capacity. Therefore, for example, a set value command is transmitted only when a specific variation pattern is used, and only the variation pattern commands corresponding to the specific variation pattern are provided with variation pattern commands for the number of set values. In this case, for example, the set value command is transmitted only when the variation pattern of the normal variation with the highest output frequency is used, and only the variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern of the normal variation may be provided with the variation pattern command for the number of set values.

Also, in this example, the same set value command is sent as the set value command (see step 012IWS047) sent when the power is turned on and the set value command sent when the fluctuation starts (see step 012IWS178), but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, a set value command for power-on and a set value command for start of variation may be configured as separate commands, and different set value commands may be transmitted at power-on and at start of variation.

Also, in this example, a case is shown in which a set value command is transmitted separately from the variation pattern command at the start of variation, but it may be configured to transmit an effect control command that is used both as the variation pattern command and the set value command. In this case, for example, even if the variation pattern command specifies the same variation pattern A, the variation pattern command A-1 is transmitted when the set value is "1", the variation pattern command A-2 is transmitted when the set value is "2", and the variation pattern command A-3 is transmitted when the set value is "3".

In addition, the game control microcomputer 100 side can be configured to output the same variation pattern command (for example, variation pattern command A) regardless of the set value, and the first effect control CPU 012IW 120a and the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b side. For example, if the setting value is 1, the variation pattern A-1 is selected or the variation pattern A-1 is selected at a high rate, or if the setting value is 2, the variation pattern A-2 is selected or the variation pattern A-2 is selected at a high rate. In this case, for example, the variation patterns A-1 to A-3 have the same variation time, but may differ in the presence/absence of pseudo-runs, the number of pseudo-runs, and the presence/absence and type of reach. Further, in this case, for example, when the setting value command is not normally received, the variation pattern A-1 is uniformly selected, or when the setting value command is not normally received, the variation pattern may be selected at a dedicated selection ratio.

Also, in this example, the case where the set value command is transmitted at the start of fluctuation has been shown, but the configuration is not limited to such a mode, and for example, the set value command may be transmitted at the end of fluctuation.

Further, the CPU 103 performs control for transmitting a background designation command to the second effect control board 012IW12b according to the current game state (step 012IWS179). In this case, the CPU 103, for example, performs control to transmit a probability variable state background designation command in the variable probability state, performs control to transmit the time reduction state background designation command in the time reduction state, and performs control to transmit the normal state background designation command in the normal state.

Next, the CPU 103 reads the random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination from the random number buffer area, and executes the big hit determination module. The big-hit determination module is a program that compares a predetermined big-hit determination value or small-hit determination value (see FIG. 8-7) with a random number MR1, and determines a big or small hit if they match. That is, it is a program for executing the processing of big hit determination and small hit determination.

If the value of the random number MR1 does not match any of the big hit determination values (N at step 012IWS180), the CPU 103 performs a small hit determination process (step 012IWS181). Then, when it is determined to be a small win (Y in step 012IWS181), the CPU 103 sets a small win flag indicating a small win (step 012IWS182), and proceeds to step 012IWS186.

If the value of the random number MR1 does not match either the big-hit judgment value or the small-hit judgment value (N in step 012IWS181), that is, if it is a loss, the process proceeds to step 012IWS186.

If the value of the random number MR1 matches any of the jackpot determination values (Y in step 012IWS180), the CPU 103 sets a jackpot flag indicating a jackpot (step 012IWS183). Next, the CPU 103 uses the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 8-8) to determine the jackpot type (“jackpot type A”, “jackpot type B” or “jackpot type C”) corresponding to the value that matches the value of the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the random number buffer area (step 012 IWS 184).

Further, the CPU 103 sets data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 102 (step 012IWS185). For example, when the jackpot type is ``jackpot type A'', ``01'' is set as data indicating the jackpot type, when the jackpot type is ``jackpot type B'', ``02'' is set as data indicating the jackpot type, and when the jackpot type is ``jackpot type C'', ``03'' is set as data indicating the jackpot type.

Next, the CPU 103 determines the stop symbol of the special symbol (step 012IWS186). For example, when neither the big-hit flag nor the small-hit flag is set, the winning symbol "-" is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol. Further, for example, when the big hit flag is set, the big hit symbol "7" is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol. It should be noted that a different special symbol stop symbol may be determined according to the type of the big hit. Further, for example, when the small hit flag is set, the small hit symbol "5" is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol.

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S111) (step 012IWS187).

(Production control main processing)
Next, the operation of the effect control means in this characterizing portion 099IW will be described. FIG. 8-18(A) is a flow chart showing the effect control main processing in the characteristic portion 099IW.

In the effect control main process, first, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not a power-off signal is input from the power monitoring circuit 099IW127 (step 099IWS001). When the power cutoff signal is input (Y of step 099IWS001), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b determines that the power cutoff of the game machine itself has occurred (that is, the game machine itself has been restarted), and waits until the input of the power cutoff signal is stopped (N of step 099IWS002). Then, when the input of the power-off signal is stopped (Y of step 099IWS002), the process proceeds to step 099IWS201.

When the power-off signal has not been input from the beginning of the process (Y in step 099IWS001), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b determines that a system reset of the second effect control CPU 012IW120b has occurred (that is, only the second effect control CPU 012IW120b has restarted), inputs the date and time information from the real-time clock 012IW126, and uses the input date and time information for the second effect control. The CPU 012IW 120b executes a process of storing log information including the date and time of system reset (step 012IWS003). Then, the process proceeds to step 099 IWS 201 .

In this characteristic portion 099IW, the processing of steps 099IWS201-S202 is the same as the processing of steps S71-S72 shown in FIG. In addition, in the initialization process of step 099IWS201, the present characteristic part 099IW performs control to display an initial image on the image display device 5 (any image that allows recognition that the gaming machine is operating) is performed, but the configuration is not limited to such a configuration. By performing control to display a different initial image when it is determined that only the second performance control CPU 012IW120b is restarted, the activation history (that is, whether or not the system reset of the second performance control CPU 012IW120b has occurred) may be recognized at a glance.

When the initial operation control process of step 012IWS202 is executed, the second effect control CPU012IW120b, if it is not determined that the system reset of the second effect control CPU012IW120b has occurred (N of step 012IWS203), inputs date and time information from the real-time clock 012IW126, and executes log information storage processing including the input date and time information as the power-on date and time (step 012IWS204). .

By executing the processing of steps 012IWS003 and 012IWS204, the data indicating the log information including the system reset date and time or the power-on date and time is written and stored as backup data in the log area provided in the backup data memories 099IW210A to 210D of the backup memory board 099IW14. The second effect control CPU 012IW120b transmits a control signal corresponding to the backup command for turning on the power to the backup memory board 099IW14 via the serial communication circuit 099IW137. In the backup memory board 099IW14, the memory controller 099IW200 responds to the backup command indicated by the control signal received via the serial communication circuit 099IW202, and writes the log information including the system reset date and time or the power-on date and time.

In this characteristic portion 099IW, in the main process for control of the effect, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b determines that the power failure of the game machine itself has occurred (that is, the game machine itself is restarted) when a power-off signal is input from the power monitoring circuit 099IW127 at the time of control start, and waits for the start of control until the input of the power-off signal stops (Y of step 099IWS001, of 099IWS002). processing). Then, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b executes a process of storing log information including the power-on date and time (corresponding to the process of step 099IWS204). In addition, when power failure occurs in the game machine itself (that is, the game machine itself is restarted), the main board 11 transmits a setting change command, a setting confirmation command, an initialization command, a command at the time of power-on such as a command at the time of recovery, so the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b executes processing based on those commands (for example, processing such as steps 012IWS802, 012IWS805, and 012IWS809 described later). equivalent to ). Furthermore, the storage processing of the log information including the date and time of the power failure (for example, corresponding to the processing of step 012 IWS847 described later) is also executed.

On the other hand, in the production control main processing, when the power supply shutdown signal is not input from the power monitoring circuit 099IW127 at the start of control, the second production control CPU 012IW120b determines that the system reset of the second production control CPU 012IW120b has occurred (that is, only the second production control CPU 012IW120b has restarted), and stores the log information including the system reset date and time in the log area without waiting for the start of control (step 099IWS003). When a system reset or the like of the second performance control CPU 012IW120b occurs (that is, only the second performance control CPU 012IW120b is restarted), the main board 11 does not transmit a setting change command, a setting confirmation command, an initialization designation command, a command at the time of restoration, or the like at power-on, so the second performance control CPU 012IW120b does not execute processing based on those commands. In addition, the storage processing of log information including the date and time of power-on and the storage processing of log information including the date and time of power failure are not executed.

Thus, in this characteristic portion 099IW, when the control of the second effect control CPU 012IW120b is started (that is, when it becomes operable), it is possible to specify which of the power failure of the game machine itself (that is, the game machine itself is restarted) and the system reset of the second effect control CPU 012IW120b (that is, only the second effect control CPU 012IW120b is restarted). Then, when the system reset of the second effect control CPU012IW120b occurs, while executing the storage processing of log information including the system reset date and time, the processing of waiting for the start of control (Y of step 099IWS001, 099IWS002), the storage processing of log information including power on date and time (step 099IWS204), the storage processing of log information including power failure date and time (step 012IWS847 described later), etc. Unnecessary processing is not executed at the time of system reset of the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b even if it is necessary when power failure occurs. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately determine the situation when the power is turned on, and to execute optimum processing according to the situation.

In the present characteristic part 099IW, the backup data memories 099IW210A to 210D of the backup memory board 099IW14 are configured so as to provide a first log area for recording log information for a game shop and a second log area for recording log information for a game machine maker as log areas for recording log information. Then, when power failure occurs in the gaming machine itself, a storage process is executed to store log information including power-on date and time and power failure date/time information in the first log area (corresponding to steps 012IWS204 and 012IWS847). On the other hand, when the system reset of the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b occurs instead of the power failure of the gaming machine itself, a storage process is executed to store the log information including the system reset date and time in the second log area (corresponding to the process of step 012IWS003).

In this characteristic part 099IW, the log information recorded in the second log area is read by connecting an inspection device to the pachinko game machine 1 and inputting/outputting an inspection signal between the inspection device and the second effect control CPU 012IW120b of the second effect control board 012IW12b. In other words, it has output means for outputting log information that can identify the activation history. With such a configuration, the log information including the system reset date and time can be used as information for development and debugging by game machine manufacturers.

There are various types of log information to be backed up, such as system data, effect control error data, and received command data. In this example, the first log area stores log information displayed as history information in the maintenance mode. For example, log information such as power-on date and time, setting change start date and time, setting confirmation start date and time, and RAM clear date and time are stored (parts that execute processes such as steps 099IWS204, 012IWS802, 012IWS805, and 012IWS809, see FIGS. 8-45 and 8-47).

On the other hand, the second log area stores log information used as information for development and debugging. For example, log information such as system reset date and time, exceptional event information, received command data, etc., which will be described later, is stored (portion for executing processes such as steps 099IWS003 and 099IWS42).

In addition, in the characteristic part 099IW, the log information recorded in the second log area is not displayed as history information on the maintenance history screen in the maintenance mode. However, the configuration is not limited to such a configuration, and part or all of the log information recorded in the second log area (excluding log information that overlaps with the log information recorded in the first log area) may be displayed as history information on the maintenance history screen in the maintenance mode.

Further, for example, when a predetermined backup condition is established such as when a system reset of the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b occurs, a storage process for storing the log information in both the first log area and the second log area may be executed. The division of log information stored in the first log area and the second log area is not limited to the configuration of this example. Also, three or more log areas may be provided.

Also, the backup method may be different between the first log area and the second log area. For example, when the backup method is batch backup, the data to be backed up by one backup is stored in the interrupt processing based on the occurrence of the performance control timer interrupt processing once, and when the backup method is divided backup, the backup target data by the one backup is stored in the interrupt processing based on the occurrence of the performance control timer interrupt processing a plurality of times. In this way, by properly using the backup method, it is possible to suitably perform backup according to the log information.

Also, the backup multiplicity may be different between the first log area and the second log area. The degree of multiplicity is the degree of mirroring in which data to be backed up indicating the same log information is distributed and stored in a plurality of different log areas while overlapping. For example, when the multiplicity is "1", the data to be backed up indicating the same log information is stored and backed up only once without performing mirroring. When the multiplicity is "2", mirroring is performed with the number of times of storage being two, and backup target data indicating the same log information is stored twice in different storage areas and backed up. When the multiplicity is "3", mirroring is performed with a storage count of 3, and the backup target data indicating the same log information is stored 3 times in different storage areas and backed up. By increasing the degree of multiplicity, redundancy (availability) can be improved and the reliability of stored data can be enhanced.

8-19 show execution examples of backup processing with different degrees of multiplicity. The second effect control CPU012IW120b has functions of memory write processing units 43AKM11 and 43AKM12 and functions of event information creation processing units 43AKM21 and 43AKM22 by executing a program read from ROM012IW121b. The backup data memories 099IW210A to 210C of the backup memory board 099IW14 are provided with the backup storage units 43AKA11 to 43AKA13 as well as the backup storage unit 43AKA21. The backup storage storage unit 43AKA11 has a backup memory area 43AKA111-43AKA113 as a log area, and the backup memory unit 43AKA12 has a backup memory area 43AKA121-43AKA123 as a log area, and has a backup memory part. 43AKA13 is equipped with a backup memory area 43AKA131-43AKA133 as a log area. On the other hand, the backup storage unit 43AKA21 has backup storage areas 43AKA211 to 43AKA213 as log areas.

Occurrence event information creation processing unit 43AKM21 creates backup data corresponding to the case where a backup condition with a multiplicity of "3" is satisfied. The memory write processing unit 43AKM11 acquires the backup data created by the event information creation processing unit 43AKM21. The backup data acquired at this time is transferred to the backup memory board 099IW14 and stored in the log areas of the backup storage units 43AKA11 to 43AKA13. In the three backup storage units 43AKA11 to 43AKA13, the same backup data created by the event information creation processing unit 43AKM21 are stored in a distributed manner while overlapping. For example, the backup data first obtained from the event information creation processing unit 43AKM21 is stored by copying and writing to the backup storage area 43AKA111 of the backup storage unit 43AKA11, the backup storage area 43AKA121 of the backup storage unit 43AKA12, and the backup storage area 43AKA131 of the backup storage unit 43AKA13. The backup data acquired next from the event information creation processing unit 43AKM21 is stored by copying and writing in the backup storage area 43AKA112 of the backup storage unit 43AKA11, the backup storage area 43AKA122 of the backup storage unit 43AKA12, and the backup storage area 43AKA132 of the backup storage unit 43AKA13. The backup data obtained next from the event information creation processing unit 43AKM21 is stored by copying and writing to the backup storage area 43AKA113 of the backup storage unit 43AKA11, the backup storage area 43AKA123 of the backup storage unit 43AKA12, and the backup storage area 43AKA133 of the backup storage unit 43AKA13.

Occurrence event information creation processing unit 43AKM22 creates backup data corresponding to the case where a backup condition with a multiplicity of "1" is satisfied. The memory write processing unit 43AKM12 acquires the backup data created by the event information creation processing unit 43AKM22. The backup data acquired at this time is transferred to the backup memory board 099IW14 and stored in the log area of the backup storage unit 43AKA21. Also, when the multiplicity is "1", mirroring is not performed and single backup data is stored without distribution. For example, the backup data first obtained from the event information creation processing unit 43AKM22 is stored by writing it to the backup storage area 43AKA211 of the backup storage unit 43AKA21 without copying. The backup data acquired next from the event information creation processing unit 43AKM22 is stored by writing it to the backup storage area 43AKA212 of the backup storage unit 43AKA21 without copying. The next backup data acquired from the event information creation processing unit 22 is stored by writing it to the backup storage area 43AKA213 of the backup storage unit 43AKA21 without copying.

The log information recorded in the second log area is not displayed as history information on the maintenance history screen in the maintenance mode, and cannot be confirmed, for example, by using a dedicated inspection device. Therefore, even if some log information is missing, it is permissible (at least it is not a problem for the manager of the game machine in the game parlor).

However, if, for example, some or all of the backup data memories 099IW210A to 210D of the backup memory board 099IW14 are configured using a nonvolatile ferroelectric memory such as FRAM (registered trademark) (Ferroelectric RAM), and are configured to transmit and receive communication data by a serial communication method via the serial communication circuit 099IW137 and the serial communication circuit 099IW202 (for example, the communication speed is lower than that of the bus connection method), multiplexing is required. If the backup is performed with a large degree, it may take a long time to complete the backup. Then, when the manager of the game parlor immediately restarts the game machine in a situation where a predetermined error occurs, the predetermined error is not recorded as log information (that is, it is not displayed as history information on the maintenance history screen), and there is a possibility of causing distrust.

Therefore, for the log information to be stored in the first log area, the multiplicity of backup is set to "1", and the data to be backed up indicating the log information is stored and backed up only once. The log information to be stored in the second log area is backed up by setting the backup multiplicity to "2" or "3" and storing the backup target data indicating the log information only two or three times. Alternatively, the method of backing up the first log area may be a batch backup so that the processing can be completed quickly, and the method of backing up the second log area may be a divided backup so as to distribute the processing load. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the log information to be displayed as history information on the maintenance history screen in the maintenance mode is missing (for example, the backup processing is not completed until the game machine is restarted), and it is possible to improve the redundancy (availability) of the log information stored in the second log area used as information for development and debugging by the game machine maker. That is, it is possible to implement suitable backup according to the characteristics of the log information.

Next, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b executes an interrupt initialization process (step 099IWS205). In the interrupt initial setting process of step 099IWS205, it is sufficient if the interrupt priority controlled by the interrupt controller mounted on the second effect control board 012IW12b can be initialized. The priority of interrupts controlled by the interrupt controller may be set based on the interrupt priority data pre-stored in the program management area provided in the ROM 012IW 121b. For example, the order of priority of interrupts may be set such that the serial reception interrupt has a higher priority than the effect control timer interrupt. Then, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b sets the interrupt permission (step 099IWS206), and then enters the loop process.

FIG. 8-18 (B) shows a setting example of processing priority in the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b. The processing priority in the second effect control CPU 012IW120b may be determined in advance based on the specifications of the second effect control board 012IW12a together with the priority of the interrupt controlled by the interrupt controller mounted on the second effect control board 012IW12a. As an example, the processing priority may be set in advance so that the CPU exception event occurrence processing has the highest priority, the serial reception interrupt has the next highest priority, and then the processing has the priority according to the priority of the interrupt controlled by the interrupt controller.

The CPU exception event occurrence process is a process that is executed when an exception event due to an internal state abnormality or the like occurs in the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b. The exception event of the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b may occur when an undefined instruction that is not defined in the instruction set is decoded. The exception event of the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b may occur when an invalid operation such as zero division or overflow is executed. The exception event of the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b may occur when a memory protection violation occurs in the virtual memory. The exception event of the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b may occur in the case of a TLB (Translation Lookaside Buffer) miss that causes an abnormality in translation from a virtual address to a physical address. Thus, the CPU exception event occurrence processing is executed when an exception event of the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b occurs. Therefore, when the event occurrence condition corresponding to the internal state of the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b is established, the CPU exception event occurrence processing is executed. The CPU exception event occurrence process can be executed when an event occurrence condition that can be established according to the internal state of the control device or the processing device, such as the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b, is established.

FIG. 8-20 is a flow chart showing an example of processing when a CPU exception event occurs. In the CPU exception event occurrence processing, first, exception preprocessing is executed (step 099IWS41). In the pre-exception processing of step 099 IWS41, control information for instruction code execution is saved in a predetermined area (such as a stack area) of the RAM 012IW 122b, for example. The control information for instruction code execution may include a stored value of a program counter (PC) and a value of a program status word (PSW). Following the exceptional preprocessing, exceptional backup processing is executed (step 099IWS42). In the exceptional backup process of step 099 IWS 42, log information including exceptional event information is stored. In this case, a control signal corresponding to the backup command for exception event occurrence is sent to the backup memory board 099IW14. The backup command for the occurrence of an exception event may include exception event information that allows the exception event that has occurred in the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b to be specified, and date and time information obtained from the real-time clock 012IW 126 (for example, date and time information obtained from the RTC 099IW 201 may be used). The exception event information may identifiably indicate the type of exception event. When the memory controller 099IW200 of the backup memory board 099IW14 receives the backup command for exception event occurrence, the memory controller 099IW200 may execute the write process of the log information including the exception event information.

After the exceptional backup process, other exceptional processes are executed (step 099IWS43). At step 099 IWS43, for example, the vector table may be accessed and an exception handling routine may be started by jumping to the acquired exception handler address. At this time, the stored value of the internal register (general-purpose register, etc.) of the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b may be saved. When the exceptional event can be resolved by the exception processing routine, or when the exception event cannot be resolved and a reset occurs, backup processing similar to step 099IWS42 may be executed to store log information when the exceptional event is resolved or not resolved. When the exception handling is finished, the exception post-treatment is executed (step 099IWS44), and the CPU exception event occurrence handling is finished. In the post-exception process of step 099 IWS44, the stored value of the internal register (general-purpose register, etc.) of the second effect control CPU 012IW120b is restored, and the control information for executing the instruction code is restored.

The CPU exception event occurrence processing includes exception backup processing in step 099 IWS42. In the exception backup process of step 099IWS42, as backup data indicating log information, data including exception event information regarding the second effect control CPU012IW120b among the plurality of electronic components is written in the log area provided in the backup data memories 099IW210A to 210D of the backup memory board 099IW14. The CPU exception event occurrence processing is executed when an exception event occurs in the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b, assuming that the event occurrence condition corresponding to the internal state of the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b is established. In this way, when an event occurrence condition corresponding to the internal state of the control device or the processing device, such as the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b, is satisfied, a writing process for writing and storing information on a plurality of electronic components can be executed in a storage area such as a log area.

After the interruption permission is set by step 099IWS206 of the performance control main processing, a timeout occurs in a predetermined channel of the timer circuit 135 every predetermined time (2 milliseconds or the like), so that an interrupt request signal corresponding to the timer interrupt for the performance control is outputted from the interrupt controller mounted on the second performance control board 012IW12a to the second performance control CPU 012IW120b. The second effect control CPU 012IW 120b that receives this interrupt request signal and accepts the interrupt request starts execution of the effect control timer interrupt process.

FIG. 8-21 is a flow chart showing an example of effect control timer interrupt processing. In this characteristic portion 099IW, the processing of steps 012IWS204 to S208 is the same as the processing of steps S73 to S77 shown in FIG. When the effect random number update process of step 012IWS208 is executed, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b executes effect mode change process for changing the effect mode (step 012IWS209).

In this characteristic part 099IW, it is possible to control three kinds of performance modes of performance mode A to performance mode C, and depending on which performance mode is controlled, for example, the background screen of the image display device 5 differs, and the types of characters appearing in the notice performance and ready-to-win performance are different. In the effect mode change process of step 012IWS209, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b performs control to change from the current effect mode to a different effect mode when a predetermined effect mode change condition is satisfied. For example, based on the date and time information from the real-time clock 012IW126, the production mode may be changed based on a predetermined date and time. Moreover, for example, the lottery process based on a random number may be performed and the production mode may be changed based on the decision to change the production mode.

In step 012IWS209, when the effect mode is changed, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b may, for example, set a flag corresponding to the effect mode after change and reset a flag corresponding to effect mode before change. For example, when the effect mode is changed to A, the effect mode A flag is set, and the effect mode B flag or effect mode C flag before the change is reset. Further, for example, when the effect mode is changed to B, the effect mode B flag may be set, and the effect mode A flag or effect mode C flag before the change may be reset. Also, for example, when the effect mode is changed to C, the effect mode C flag is set, and the effect mode A flag or effect mode B flag before the change is reset.

The performance mode may be changed in a predetermined order such as performance mode A→performance mode B→performance mode C→performance mode A→ .

Next, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b executes error notification processing for performing various error notifications (step 012IWS210). Next, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b controls the maintenance mode during setting confirmation, and executes maintenance mode processing for displaying the maintenance history screen and the setting change/confirmation history screen (step 012IWS211).

In the maintenance mode process of step 099 IWS 211, control is performed to enable display of the maintenance history screen and setting change/confirmation history screen. The maintenance history screen can be displayed when it is determined that the maintenance history selection operation has been performed based on the detection result of the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B, which is the operation of the game parlor clerk, while the setting confirmation display corresponding to the setting confirmation state or the maintenance mode menu screen is being displayed, for example. When displaying the maintenance history screen, all the log information is read from the log areas provided in the backup data memories 099IW210A to 210D of the backup memory board 099IW14 (strictly speaking, only the log information for the game store is read out of the log information, and the log information for the game machine maker is not read). The image display device 5 displays a maintenance history screen including the read log information as history information. The setting change/confirmation history screen can be displayed when it is determined that a setting change/confirmation history selection operation has been performed based on the detection result of the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B by the game hall attendant. When displaying the setting change/confirmation history screen, all setting change and setting confirmation log information is read from the log areas provided in the backup data memories 099IW210A to 210D of the backup memory board 099IW14. The image display device 5 displays a setting change/confirmation history screen including log information of the read setting change and setting confirmation as history information. Note that the maintenance history screen and the setting change/confirmation history screen may be displayed based on the detection result of the operation performed by the person in charge of the pachinko game machine 1 manufacturer, unlike the game hall staff. The maintenance history screen and the setting change/confirmation history screen are screens that the player of the pachinko gaming machine 1 cannot see while playing the game.

Next, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b executes a setting change time recording process for recording the date and time when the setting value is changed in the setting change process (step 012IWS212). Next, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b executes current time setting processing for setting the current time during the maintenance mode (step 012IWS213). Next, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b executes power failure date and time recording processing for recording the power failure date and time when the power failure occurs (step 012IWS214). Then, after executing the effect control backup process (step 099IWS215), the effect control timer interrupt process is terminated.

In the effect control backup process executed at step 099IWS215 of the effect control timer interrupt process, it is determined whether or not a preset backup condition is established. Then, when it is determined that the backup condition is met, a backup process is executed for storing and storing the data to be backed up according to the backup condition that has been met. As for the backup condition, a plurality of different conditions may be set according to occurrence of events including various changes and settings in the pachinko gaming machine 1 . A backup control table indicating a plurality of backup conditions may be stored in advance, for example, in a predetermined area (such as a program management area) provided in the ROM 012IW 121b. The backup target data may include different data depending on the backup conditions. Alternatively, the backup target data may include data common to multiple backup conditions. Data to be backed up indicating log information including date and time information may be stored when any of the backup conditions are met. A batch backup and a divided backup may be prepared as backup methods for storing data to be backed up. In the case of batch backup, data to be backed up by one backup is stored in interrupt processing based on the occurrence of one timer interrupt for effect control. In the case of split backup, data to be backed up by one backup is stored in interrupt processing based on multiple occurrences of timer interrupts for effect control.

A backup process for storing and storing data to be backed up according to the backup condition may be executed when the backup condition is met in the backup process during control of the performance in step 099 IWS215 each time the performance control timer interruption process is executed, or may be collectively executed when the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped. When the backup processing is collectively executed at the time of power failure, when it is determined that the backup condition is established in the backup processing during performance control, data to be backed up indicating log information including date and time information is stored in a predetermined area of a RAM012IW122b, for example.

(Command analysis processing)
FIGS. 8-22 and 8-23 are flow charts showing a specific example of the command analysis process (step 012IWS206). The effect control command received from the main board 11 is stored in the received command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b confirms the contents of the command stored in the command receive buffer.

In the command analysis process, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b first checks whether or not a received command is stored in the command receiving buffer (step 012IWS301). Whether or not it is stored is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter and the read pointer. The case where the two match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the command reception buffer stores the reception command, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step 012IWS302). After reading, the value of the read pointer is incremented by 2 (step 012IWS303). The reason for incrementing by 2 is that 2 bytes (1 command) are read out at a time.

If the received effect control command is a set value command (step 012IWS304), the second effect control CPU012IW120b stores the set value indicated by the received set value command in the set value storage area formed in the RAM012IW122b (step 012IWS305). In addition, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b sets a setting value command reception flag indicating that the setting value command has been normally received at least once after the game machine is powered on (step 012IWS306). In this characteristic part 099IW, the set value stored in the set value storage area and the set value command reception flag are reset in the initialization process (step 012IWS201) when the power supply to the game machine is started.

In addition, in this characteristic part 099IW, the setting value command is transmitted when the game machine is turned on and the setting change processing is performed. However, if the setting value command cannot be normally received due to the missing command or garbled data, the processing of step 012 IWS305 is not executed and the setting value is not stored in the setting value storage area. However, in this characteristic part 099IW, even if the setting value command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on, the setting value command is transmitted for each change display, so the processing of step 012IWS305 is executed based on the setting value command received thereafter, and the setting value can be stored in the setting value storage area.

Further, even if the setting value command is received, the setting value included in the setting value command may be an abnormal value, so when reading the setting value command on the side of the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b, it may be configured to determine whether the setting value included in the setting value command is a normal value. For example, in this example, the setting value is configured to be set to any value from "1" to "3", but if a value such as "5" or "10" that should not be set is included, the setting value included in the setting value command may be determined to be abnormal. Also, for example, the setting value indicated by the received setting value command may be stored on the side of the second effect control CPU 012IW120b, and then, when a new setting value command is received, it may be determined that a mismatch has occurred when the setting value indicated by the newly received setting value command and the previously stored setting value do not match, and may be determined to be abnormal. Then, even when it is determined that the setting value included in the setting value command is an abnormal value, the setting value command may be regarded as not being received normally, and the effect may be restricted according to the processing method shown in this characteristic part 099IW.

(Initial roll setting)
In this characteristic part 099IW, when either the initialization designation command or the recovery command is received from the main board 11 in the command analysis processing on the side of the second effect control board 012IW12b, the image display device 5 performs control to display a predetermined initial result (specifically, a combination of decorative symbols, which is displayed on the image display device 5 until the first variable display is started) (hereinafter also referred to as initial display effect).

If the received effect control command is an initialization designation command or a command at the time of restoration (step 012IWS307), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b checks whether or not the set value command reception flag is set (step 012IWS308). If the setting value command reception flag is set (that is, if the setting change process is executed and the setting value command is normally received), the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b uses the initial value determination table to determine even initial values (for example, "246" or "224"), which are combinations of even number decoration symbols, and odd number decoration symbols, based on the setting values stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 012IW 122b. Either an odd initial outcome, which is a combination of patterns (for example, "135" or "113"), or a special initial outcome, which is a combination of decorative symbols including a special symbol (eg, a star symbol), is determined (step 012 IWS309). Then, the process proceeds to step 012 IWS 314 .

FIG. 8-24 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the initial outcome determination table. In step 012 IWS 309, the initial payout decision table shown in FIG. 8-24(A) is used to perform lottery processing based on random numbers in accordance with the allocation of determination values according to the set values stored in the set value storage area, thereby deciding the initial payout. In the initial outcome determination table shown in FIG. 8-24(A), the percentage of odd initial outcomes determined increases in the order of set values "1"<"2"<"3". Therefore, if the odd initial outcome is displayed on the image display device 5 before the start of the game, it is suggested that the setting has been changed and that the set value is set to be more advantageous than when the even initial outcome is displayed. Also, as shown in FIG. 8-24(A), there are cases where a special initial roll is determined only when the set value is "3". Therefore, if the special initial result is displayed on the image display device 5 before the game is started, it is determined that the setting has been changed and the set value is "3". With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player interested in the state of the pachinko game machine 1 before the start of the game, to give the player a motivation to start playing the game from an early time zone of the business hours of the game parlor, and to enhance the amusement.

If the setting value command reception flag is not set (that is, if the setting value command cannot be normally received due to a command failure, data corruption, etc., although the setting change process is executed), the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b confirms whether the current effect mode is the effect mode A (step 012IWS310). Incidentally, whether or not it is the production mode A can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the production mode A flag is set. If the effect mode is A, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b assumes that the set value is "1" and determines the initial outcome using the initial outcome determination table shown in FIG. 8-24(A) (step 012IWS311). Then, the process proceeds to step 012 IWS 314 .

By executing the processing of steps 012IWS310 to S311, in this characterizing part 099IW, when the setting value command cannot be received normally and the effect mode is A, the initial output is determined as the setting value "1" which is the most disadvantageous setting. As shown in FIG. 8-24(A), for the set value "1", odd initial rolls are determined to be the lowest, and special initial rolls are not determined. Such a configuration reduces the situation in which a player is rather discouraged by displaying an odd-numbered initial outcome or a special initial outcome in spite of the setting of a disadvantageous set value, thereby preventing the player from losing interest in the game.

If it is not production mode A, the second production control CPU 012IW120b checks whether the current production mode is production mode C (step 012IWS312). It should be noted that whether or not it is the production mode C can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the production mode C flag is set. If it is effect mode C, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b determines the initial outcome using the initial effect determination table for effect mode C (step 012IWS313). Then, the process proceeds to step 012 IWS 314 .

FIG. 8-24(B) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the initial outcome determination table for effect mode C. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 8-24(B), in the initial outcome determination table for the effect mode C, compared to the setting value "3", which is most advantageous for the player, odd initial outcomes are determined less often, and special initial outcomes are not determined.

By executing the processing of steps 012IWS312 to S313, this characteristic part 099IW, when the setting value command cannot be received normally and in the production mode C, reduces a situation in which the player is rather discouraged by displaying an odd initial outcome or a special initial outcome in spite of the fact that a disadvantageous setting value is set, thereby preventing a decrease in interest in the game.

Then, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b controls the image display device 5 to display the initial numbers determined in steps 012IWS309, S311 and S313 (step 012IWS314).

In this characteristic part 099IW, it is described that the image display device 5 performs display control, the game effect lamp 9 is lit, and the speaker 8L, 8R outputs sound. A command for controlling the image display device 5, the game effect lamp 9, and the speakers 8L and 8R is transmitted to the effect control CPU 012IW120a. On the side of the first effect control CPU 012IW120a, based on commands from the second effect control CPU 012IW120b, the image display device 5, the game effect lamp 9, and the speakers 8L and 8R are controlled to perform various effects and notifications. This is the same for other similar descriptions in this characterizing portion 099IW.

On the other hand, if the effect mode is not the effect mode C (that is, if the current effect mode is the effect mode B), the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b determines the initial outcome to be an even initial outcome, and controls the image display device 5 to display the even initial outcome (step 012IWS315).

By executing the processing of step 012IWS315, the characterizing part 099IW uniformly displays an even-numbered initial outcome when the set value command cannot be normally received and the performance mode is B, thereby reducing a situation in which the player is rather discouraged by displaying an odd-numbered initial outcome or a special initial outcome despite the setting of an unfavorable set value, thereby preventing a decrease in interest in the game.

Even if the set value command is not normally received in the performance mode B, the odd initial appearing symbols may be determined at a low rate. In this case, for example, the initial appearing symbols may be determined by using a table in which the determination ratio of odd initial appearing symbols is set lower than the setting value "1" of the initial appearing symbol determination table shown in FIG. 8-24(A).

In this example, when the set value command could not be received normally and the effect mode B is set, even initial numbers are uniformly displayed, but the mode is not limited to this. For example, when the setting value command cannot be normally received and the presentation mode B is set, the initial result may be configured to display an exclusive initial result when the setting value command cannot be normally received, such as a combination of symbols "???". Any combination of symbols that does not suggest a setting value at all in some form may be displayed as an initial outcome.

Further, the processing when the setting value command cannot be received normally (or when the setting value cannot be stored normally) is not limited to that shown in this example. For example, when it is judged as N in step 012 IWS 308, the setting value "1" may be stored in the setting value storage area as a default to determine the initial outcome. Further, for example, a dedicated setting value (for example, setting value "4") indicating that the setting value command could not be received normally may be stored in the setting value storage area to determine the initial output.

If the received production control command is a setting value abnormality error command (step 012IWS316), the second production control CPU 012IW120b executes setting value abnormality error notification (step 012IWS317). For example, the second performance control CPU 012IW120b performs control such as displaying characters such as ``A set value abnormality error has occurred'' on the image display device 5, outputting a sound indicating a set value abnormality error or an error sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, or causing the game effect lamp 9 or the LED to emit light in a predetermined error pattern. In this case, when announcing the set value abnormality error, it is desirable to output a sound with the maximum volume or an error sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, or to emit light from the game effect lamp 9 or LED at maximum brightness (for example, in the case of a full-color LED, emit white light).

If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (effect control command specifying a variation pattern) (step 012IWS320), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b stores the received variation pattern command in the variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM 012IW122b (step 012IWS321). Then, the fluctuation pattern command reception flag is set (step 012IWS322).

If the received effect control command is a display result specifying command (a effect control command specifying whether to make a big win or a small win, a big win type and a small win type) (step 012IWS323), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b stores the received display result specifying command in a display result specifying command storage area formed in the RAM 012IW122b (step 012IWS324).

If the received effect control command is a pattern confirmation designation command (effect control command for designating the fixed display of the decorative pattern stop pattern) (step 012IWS325), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets a confirmation command reception flag (step 012IWS326).

If the received effect control command is a jackpot start designation command (effect control command for designating the start of a jackpot game) (step 012IWS327), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets a jackpot start designation command reception flag (step 012IWS328).

If the received effect control command is a jackpot end designation command (effect control command designating the end of the jackpot game) (step 012IWS329), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets a jackpot end designation command reception flag (step 012IWS330).

If the received effect control command is another command, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b stores the received effect control command or sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (step 012IWS331). Then, the process proceeds to step 012 IWS 301 .

In this characteristic part 099IW, when the setting change process is not executed when the power is turned on, the initial odd numbers are not displayed, but the odd initial numbers may be displayed. Also in this case, the percentage determined for odd-numbered initial results may differ according to the set value (that is, the set value may be suggested).

Further, for example, instead of or in addition to the odd initial outcome or the even initial outcome, an initial outcome that denies the possibility of a specific set value (for example, the possibility of a set value of 1 is denied and a set value of 2 or 3 is confirmed) or an initial outcome that confirms a specific set value may be provided and displayed according to the set value. For example, in the case of the set value 1, the possibility of the set value 1 is denied and the set value 2 or the set value 3 is decided when the specific initial result is displayed by preventing the determination of the set value 1.例文帳に追加Also, for example, by determining a particular initial outcome only in the case of the set value 3, the preset value 3 is determined when the particular initial outcome is displayed. Further, when determining the initial outcome, any one of these initial outcomes may be determined by lottery. In this case, the ratio determined according to the set value may be different.

(Setting suggestion production)
This characteristic part 099IW is configured to be able to change the set value, and as the setting suggestion performance to suggest the set value, it is configured to be able to execute the pre-game suggestion performance executed before the start of the game, the above-mentioned initial appearance performance, the mid-game suggestion performance executed during the game (for example, during the display of the variation of the decorative pattern), the setting suggestion based on the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern determination tendency, and the big win suggestion performance executed during the big win (for example, during the big win game). In this characteristic part 099IW, the pre-game suggestive performance, the mid-game suggestive performance, and the jackpot-in-progress suggestive performance can be executed in a plurality of types of performance modes with different degrees of reliability of suggestion. For example, the reliability of the suggestion may be increased in the order of pre-game suggestive performance>in-game suggestive effect>in-game suggestive effect, or in the order of pre-game suggestive effect>in-game suggestive effect>in-jackpot suggestive effect, or in the order of mid-game suggestive effect>in-game suggestive effect>pre-game suggestive effect, or in the order of big-win suggestive effect>in-game suggestive effect>pre-game suggestive effect. Also, it may be configured such that the execution ratio of each setting suggestion effect can be set. For example, the manager of the game machine may change the settings so as not to execute some or all of the setting suggesting effects (for example, the pre-game suggesting effect and the initial appearance effect suggesting that the setting has been changed) or to lower (or increase) the execution ratio. For example, after the power is turned on, a setting screen is displayed, and by operating operating means such as the push button 31B or operating means such as a switch provided inside the game machine (only the administrator can operate), the setting regarding the setting suggestion effect may be changed.

(variable display start waiting process)
FIG. 8-25 is a flow chart showing an example of variable display start waiting processing. In the variable display start waiting process, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b checks whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step 012IWS501).

When the fluctuation pattern command reception flag is set, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b performs control to end the customer waiting demonstration effect if it is being executed (step 012IWS502, step 012IWS503).

Then, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b resets the variation pattern command reception flag (step 012IWS504), updates the value of the effect process flag to "1" (step 012IWS505), and ends the variable display start waiting process.

When the fluctuation pattern command reception flag is not set, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b confirms whether or not the result of time measurement by the time measuring means meets a predetermined condition (step 012IWS507) unless the customer waiting demonstration effect is being executed (step 012IWS507). In step 012 IWS 507, for example, when the timer (for example, set for 30 seconds) that was set when the previous variable display (display result "loss") ended timed out, it is determined that the predetermined condition is met. Also, when the timer is not set (that is, when the variable display has not been executed even once after the power is turned on and before the game is started), it is determined that the predetermined condition is met. That is, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed without execution of the variable display (and when the game is not controlled to the jackpot game state), or before the start of the game, a predetermined condition is established, and the customer waiting demonstration effect is executed by processing to be described later.

If the result of time measurement by the time measurement means meets a predetermined condition, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b determines whether or not the number of fluctuations after power-on is 0 (step 012IWS508). That is, at step 012 IWS 508, it is checked whether the game has not yet started. Whether or not the number of fluctuations after power-on is 0 can be determined by confirming whether or not the value of a fluctuation number counter (see step 012 IWS603) for counting the number of executions of variable display of decorative symbols after power-on of the gaming machine, which will be described later, is 0.

If the number of fluctuations after power-on is 0 times, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b checks whether or not the set value command reception flag is set (step 012IWS509). If the set value command reception flag is set (i.e., if the set value command is normally received), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b determines whether or not to execute the pre-game suggestive effect and the effect mode in the case of executing the pre-game suggestive effect, according to the set values using the pre-game suggestive effect determination table based on the set values stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 012IW122b (step 012IWS510). Then, the process proceeds to step 012 IWS515.

In this characteristic portion 099IW, when the customer waiting demonstration effect including the pre-game suggestive effect of the first effect mode is executed, the decorative lamp is controlled to a first special color (blue) different from the normal color (for example, white), when the customer waiting demo effect of the mode including the pre-game suggestive effect of the second effect mode is executed, the decorative lamp is controlled to the second special color (red), and when the customer waiting demo effect of the mode including the pre-game suggestive effect of the third effect mode is executed, the decorative lamp is controlled to the third. Controlled to a special color (rainbow color).

FIG. 8-26 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a pre-game suggestion effect determination table. At step 012 IWS 510, a pre-game suggestive effect determination table shown in FIG. 8-26(A) is used to perform a lottery process based on random numbers according to the allocation of determination values corresponding to the set values stored in the set value storage area, to determine whether or not to execute the pre-game suggestive effect and the effect mode. In the pre-game suggestive effect determination table of FIG. 8-26(A), determination values are assigned so that the pre-game suggestive effect is executed in the order of setting values "1"<"2"<"3". In addition, determination values are assigned so that the ratio of determination to the second effect mode increases in the order of setting values "1"<"2"<"3". With such a configuration, the execution of the pre-game suggesting effect and the execution of the second effect mode rather than the first effect mode suggest that an advantageous set value is set. In addition, by executing the pre-game suggestion effect, it is suggested that the setting has been changed when the power is turned on. Also, as shown in FIG. 8-26(A), the third effect mode may be determined only when the set value is "3". Therefore, by executing the pre-game suggestive effect in the third effect mode, it is determined that the setting has been changed and the set value is "3".

If the setting value command reception flag is not set (that is, if the setting value command cannot be normally received due to a command failure or data garbled although the setting change process is executed), the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b confirms whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode A (step 012IWS511). Incidentally, whether or not it is the production mode A can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the production mode A flag is set. If the effect mode is A, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b assumes that the set value is "1", and uses the pre-game suggestive effect determination table shown in FIG. Then, the process proceeds to step 012 IWS515.

By executing the processing of steps 012IWS511 to S512, in this characteristic part 099IW, when the setting value command cannot be received normally and the effect mode is A, the presence or absence of execution of the pre-game suggestive effect and the effect mode are determined assuming that the setting value is "1" which is the most disadvantageous setting. As shown in FIG. 8-26(A), with respect to the setting value "1", the rate of determination of the second rendering mode is the lowest, and there is no case of determination of the third rendering mode. By such a constitution, the situation in which the pre-game suggesting performance is executed by the second performance mode or the third performance mode despite the setting of the disadvantageous set value is reduced, and the situation in which the player is rather discouraged, and the decrease in interest in the game is prevented.

If it is not the production mode A, the second production control CPU 012IW120b checks whether the current production mode is the production mode C (step 012IWS513). It should be noted that whether or not it is the production mode C can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the production mode C flag is set. If it is effect mode C, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b uses the pre-game suggestive effect determination table for effect mode C to determine whether or not to execute the pre-game suggestive effect and the effect mode (step 012IWS514). Then, the process proceeds to step 012 IWS515.

FIG. 8-26(B) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a pre-game suggestion effect determination table for effect mode C. FIG. As shown in FIG. 8-26(B), in the pre-game suggestive effect determination table for the effect mode C, compared with the case of the set values ``2'' and ``3'', the ratio of determining to execute the pre-game suggestive effect itself is low, the ratio of determining the first effect mode and the second effect mode is low, and the third effect mode is not determined.

By executing the processing of steps 012IWS513 to S514, in this characteristic part 099IW, when the set value command cannot be normally received and the performance mode is C, the pre-game suggestive performance is executed in the second performance mode or the third performance mode in spite of the disadvantageous set value being set, thereby reducing the situation in which the player is rather discouraged, thereby preventing the decrease in interest in the game.

Then, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b performs control to execute the customer waiting demonstration effect including the pre-game suggestive effect determined in steps 012IWS510, S512 and S514 (step 012IWS515). Then, the process proceeds to step 012 IWS517.

On the other hand, if it is not the production mode C (that is, if the current production mode is the production mode B), the second production control CPU 012IW 120b proceeds directly to step 012IWS516. That is, in the case of the effect mode B, the pre-game suggestive effect is restricted so as not to be executed.

By executing the processing of step 012IWS513, the characteristic part 099IW does not execute the pre-game suggestive performance when the set value command cannot be normally received and in the performance mode B, thereby reducing the situation in which the pre-game suggestive performance is executed in spite of the disadvantageous set value being set and the player is rather discouraged, thereby preventing the decrease in interest in the game.

Even when the set value command is not normally received in the effect mode B, the pre-game suggestive effect may be executed at a low rate. In this case, for example, using a table in which the execution ratio of the pre-game suggestive effect is set lower than the setting value "1" of the pre-game suggestive effect determination table shown in FIG.

8-26(A), only a specific rendering mode (for example, the second rendering mode) among the plurality of rendering modes may be executed at a different rate according to the set value.

Further, for example, when a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) among the plurality of effect modes is executed, the possibility of being a specific set value may be denied. For example, in the case of the set value 1, the setting value 2 or the set value 3 is decided when the specific performance mode (for example, the second performance mode) is not determined, so that when the specific performance mode (for example, the second performance mode) is executed, the possibility of the set value 1 is denied. Further, when a specific effect mode (for example, a second effect mode) is executed, a specific set value may be determined. For example, only when the set value is 3, a specific performance mode (for example, a second performance mode) is determined, so that when the specific performance mode (for example, the second performance mode) is executed, the set value is determined to be 3.

In this characteristic part 099IW, the pre-game suggestive effect can be executed at different ratios depending on the set value, but this is a concept including that the execution ratio of the pre-game suggestive effect (including the first effect mode, the second effect mode and the third effect mode) differs according to the set value, the execution ratio of the first effect mode, the second effect mode and the third effect mode differs according to the set value, and the execution rate of only the specific effect mode differs according to the set value.

The characteristic part 099IW is configured not to execute the pre-game suggestion performance when the setting value command is not yet received and the setting change is not performed when the power is turned on. In this case, whether or not to execute the pre-game suggestion effect and the effect mode in the case of execution may be determined at different ratios depending on when the setting change is performed and when the setting change is not performed.

For example, FIG. 8-26(C) is a pre-game suggestive effect determination table used when a recovery command is received. Comparing the pre-game suggestive effect determination table shown in FIG. 8-26(A) with the pre-game suggestive effect determination table shown in FIG. 8-26(C), when the command at the time of restoration is received, that is, when the setting change is not performed, the pre-game suggestive effect execution ratio is lower than when the setting change is performed, and the difference in the execution ratio between the set values is also small. By doing so, the reliability of the suggestion by the pre-game suggestion effect can be made different between when the setting change is performed and when it is not performed.

If the number of fluctuations after power-on is not 0, the CPU 120 performs control to execute the customer waiting demonstration effect including the execution history information of the setting suggestive effect (excluding the pre-game suggestive effect) (step 012IWS516).

When the processing of step 012 IWS 516 is executed, for example, in the image display device 5, a customer waiting demonstration performance is executed in a manner in which execution history information indicating the number of executions of setting suggesting performances (in-game suggesting performances and jackpot-in-progress suggesting performances) and execution contents (performance modes at the time of execution), etc. is displayed. When the process of step 012 IWS516 is executed, the customer waiting effect is executed, and when a predetermined operation (for example, operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B) is performed during the execution of the customer waiting demonstration effect, the image display device 5 may display execution history information of the setting suggesting effect. In addition, the first performance control board 012IW12a and the second performance control board 012IW12b may store information indicating the number of times of execution and execution contents (performance mode at the time of execution) of setting suggestive performance (initial appearance performance, pre-game suggestive performance, during-game suggestive performance, big-hit suggestive performance, etc.), and perform performance to estimate and notify set values from these information. Note that this performance notifies the setting expectation degree (or estimated set value) calculated based on a predetermined standard from the execution status of the setting suggestion performance, but does not notify the actual set value.

In this characteristic portion 099IW, the pre-game suggestion effect is executed only before the game is started by the processing of steps 012IWS508 to 012IWS515. In addition, the execution history information of the setting suggesting effect during the customer waiting demonstration effect is shown by the processing of step 012 IWS516, but the information related to the pre-game suggesting effect is excluded. With such a configuration, the player is interested in the state of the pachinko game machine 1 before the start of the game, and is motivated to start the game from an early time zone of the business hours of the game parlor, thereby increasing interest. Note that the pre-game suggestion effect may be executed only during a predetermined time period (for example, from 9:00 am to 11:00 am) by using the real-time clock 012IW126 or the like, without being limited to the example of the characteristic portion 099IW. Further, the execution history information of the setting suggesting effect may not include the information about the in-game suggesting effect during the special period.

In addition to the configuration of the characteristic portion 099IW, the number of executions of the setting suggestive effect and the execution details may be accumulated as execution history information, and a two-dimensional code or the like including the execution history information may be displayed on the image display device 5 at the end of the game, as will be described later. Further, when a player uses a portable terminal such as a mobile phone with a camera function to photograph a two-dimensional code displayed on a game machine and transmits the image to a web server on the Internet, the web server may manage the game history of the player based on the received information, and perform processing for giving a predetermined privilege according to the game history. Alternatively, the player may access the web server using the mobile terminal (or analyze the two-dimensional code) to acquire the execution history information and display it on the display device of the mobile terminal. Alternatively, a setting suggestion image suggesting a setting value may be displayed on a display device of the mobile terminal by the player using the mobile terminal to read the two-dimensional code including the execution history information. For example, setting values that are estimated based on predetermined criteria may be calculated from the execution history information, and a setting suggestion image that suggests the calculated setting values (which are only estimates and differ from actual setting values) may be displayed.

Next, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b checks whether or not it has detected that the player has performed a game end operation (step 012IWS517). For example, the second effect control CPU012IW120b, based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B, confirms whether or not it has detected that the game end option has been selected and the determination operation has been performed. If it is detected that the game end operation is performed, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b extracts log information from the log area provided in the backup data memories 099IW210A to 210D of the backup memory board 099IW14, and generates a two-dimensional code including the extracted log information (for example, log information of probability variation non-establishment date and time described later) (step 012IWS518). Then, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b performs control to display the generated two-dimensional code on the image display device 5 (step 012IWS519), and ends the variable display start waiting process.

It should be noted that, in this characteristic portion 099IW, it is described that the operation has been performed, such as detection, but the second effect control CPU012IW120b does not directly input the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B, but more specifically, the first effect control CPU012IW120a first inputs the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B, and the second effect control CPU012IW12. 0b inputs a command indicating that the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B has been operated via the first effect control CPU 012IW120a. This is the same for other similar descriptions in this characterizing portion 099IW.

(Variable display start setting process)
FIG. 8-27 is a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b first reads the variation pattern command from the variation pattern command storage area (step 012IWS601). Next, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b determines the display result (stop pattern) of the decoration pattern according to the variation pattern command read in step 012IWS601 and the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command) (step 012IWS602). That is, by executing the process of step 012IWS602 by the second effect control CPU 012IW120b, a display result determination means for determining the display result of the variable display of the identification information (decoration pattern stop pattern) according to the variable display pattern (variation pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determination means is realized. It should be noted that the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b stores the data indicating the stop design of the determined decoration design in the decoration design display result storage area. In step 012IWS602, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b may determine whether or not the game is a big hit based on the received variation pattern command, and may determine the decorative symbols to be stopped based on only the variation pattern command.

At step 012IWS 602, for example, when the received display result designation command indicates a variable probability big hit, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b determines a combination of decorative symbols in which three symbols are the same odd number symbols as stop symbols. In addition, for example, when the received display result designation command indicates a normal jackpot (unprobable variable jackpot), the second performance control CPU 012IW120b determines a combination of decoration patterns in which three patterns are the same even-numbered patterns as stop patterns.

Further, when the received display result designation command indicates a small win, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b determines a combination of decoration patterns of small win patterns according to the small win type designated by the display result designation command. In this example, a combination of '135' is determined as a small winning pattern when the small winning type is A, a combination of '357' is determined as a small winning pattern when the small winning type is B, and a combination of '579' is determined as a small winning pattern when the small winning type is C.

Also, when the received display result designation command indicates a failure, a combination of decoration patterns other than the above is determined. However, when the ready-to-win effect is involved, a combination of decorative patterns in which the left and right two patterns are aligned is determined.

Incidentally, when a pseudo-run is designated by the variation pattern command, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b also determines, in step 012IWS602, a chance symbol as a temporary stop symbol of the pseudo-run (for example, a combination of a jackpot symbol that does not become a reach and a symbol shifted by one symbol, such as "223" or "445").

The second effect control CPU 012IW120b extracts, for example, a random number for determining the stop pattern, and determines the stop pattern of the decoration pattern using a stop pattern determination table in which data indicating the combination of the decoration patterns are associated with numerical values. That is, the stop symbol is determined by selecting the data indicating the combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the numerical value that matches the extracted random number.

Next, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b adds 1 to the value of the variation number counter for counting the number of times the variation display of decorative symbols is executed after the gaming machine is powered on (step 012IWS603). In this characteristic part 099IW, the value of the fluctuation number counter is reset in the initialization process (step 012IWS201) when the power supply to the gaming machine is started, and the value of the fluctuation number counter is 0 when the gaming machine is powered on.

Next, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b executes the during-game suggestive effect determination process for determining the presence or absence of the during-game suggestive effect and the effect mode (step 012IWS604).

Next, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b selects a process table corresponding to the during-game suggestive effect if the variation pattern and execution of the suggestive effect during the game have been determined (step 012IWS605). Then, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 012IWS606).

The process table is a table in which process data referred to when the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b controls the effect devices (parts for effect) such as the image display device 5 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table is composed of data in which a plurality of combinations of process timer setting values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data and sound number data are collected. The display control execution data includes data indicating each variation mode constituting the variation mode during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the decorative pattern. Specifically, data related to changing the display screen of the image display device 5 is described. In addition, the process timer set value is set with a variable time in the mode of variation. The second effect control CPU 012IW 120b refers to the process table and performs control to display the decoration pattern in the variable mode set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value. Moreover, the process table is stored in ROM012IW121b in 2nd production|presentation control board 012IW12b. Also, the process table is prepared according to each variation pattern.

In addition, process data indicating that the left pattern is stop-displayed when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the fluctuation and the right pattern is stop-displayed after the elapse of a predetermined time is set in a process table used when executing the performance control for the variation pattern accompanied by the ready-to-win performance. Instead of setting the symbols to be stopped and displayed in the process table, an image for displaying the symbols may be generated by synthesizing according to the determined stop symbols, the temporary stop symbols in the pseudo run or the sliding performance.

Further, when the execution of the suggestive effect during the game is determined in the step 012IWS604 for determining the suggestive effect during the game, the process table including the suggestive effect during the game is selected in the step 012IWS605, and the step 012IWS607 and the effect process during the variable display (step S172) are executed according to the selected process table, whereby the suggestive effect during the game is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols.

In addition, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b executes control of the effect device (image display device 5 as a component for effect, various lamps as components for effect, and speakers 8L and 8R as components for effect) according to the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1) (step 012IWS607).

In addition, in this characteristic part 099IW, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b controls so that the decorative pattern is variably displayed according to the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern command one-to-one.

Next, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b sets the variable time timer to a value corresponding to the variable time specified by the variable pattern command (step 012IWS608). Then, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b updates the value of the effect process flag to "2" (step 012IWS609), and terminates the variable display start setting process.

(During-game suggestion effect determination process)
FIG. 8-28 is a flow chart showing an example of the in-game suggestion effect determination process (step 012IWS604). The in-game suggestion effect determination process is executed in the variable display start setting process (step S171). In the during-game suggestive effect determination processing, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b selects the first during-game suggestive effect determination table when it is during the special period (Y at step 012IWS701), and selects the second during-game suggestive effect determination table when it is not during the special period (step 012IWS701, N) (step 012IWS703). For example, if a special period flag is set when a setting change end command or a set value command is received, and the special period flag is reset when the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example), it is possible to confirm whether or not the special period is in progress at step 012IWS 701 by confirming the state of the special period flag.

Next, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b confirms whether or not the setting value command reception flag is set (step 012IWS704). If the set value command reception flag is set (i.e., if the set value command is normally received), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b determines whether or not to execute the suggestive effect during the game, and the effect mode in the case of execution, using the selected in-game suggestive effect determination table based on the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 012IW122b (step 012IWS705).

FIG. 8-29(A) is an explanatory diagram showing a first during-game suggestive effect determination table used during the special period, and FIG. 8-29(B) is an explanatory diagram showing a second during-game suggestive effect determination table used during the non-special period.

8-29 (A) and (B), the first and second in-game suggestive effect determination tables both have set values "1"<"2"<"3" in order of determination values so that the ratio of execution of the in-game suggestive effect increases. With such a configuration, it is suggested that an advantageous set value is set by executing the in-game suggestion effect.

Also, for the second presentation mode (appearance of mini-characters A and B), determination values are assigned so that the ratio of execution in the order of setting values '1'<'2'<'3' is high and the difference in the execution rate between the setting values is greater than that of the first presentation mode (appearance of mini-character A). That is, the second effect mode has a high degree of reliability that the set value is set to be more advantageous than the first effect mode.

In addition, the first and second in-game suggestive effect determination tables shown in FIGS. 8-29 (A) and (B) are configured so that the in-game suggestive effect in the second effect mode with high reliability is executed only in the special period. With such a configuration, it is possible to motivate players to play games during the special period, and to enhance interest.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 8-29(A) and (B), the third rendering mode (character C appearance) may be determined only when the set value is "3". Therefore, the set value "3" is determined by executing the in-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode.

If the setting value command reception flag is not set (that is, if the setting value command cannot be normally received due to a command failure or data garbled although the setting change processing is executed), the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b confirms whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode A (step 012IWS706). Incidentally, whether or not it is the production mode A can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the production mode A flag is set. If the effect mode is A, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b assumes that the set value is "1", and uses the selected during-game suggestive effect determination table to determine whether or not to execute the during-game suggestive effect and the effect mode (step 012IWS707).

By executing the processing of steps 012IWS706 to S707, in this characteristic part 099IW, when the setting value command cannot be received normally and the effect mode is A, the setting value "1", which is the most disadvantageous setting, is set, and whether or not to execute the suggestive effect during the game and the effect mode are determined. As shown in FIGS. 8-29 (A) and (B), for the set value "1", the ratio of deciding to execute the in-game suggestive effect itself is low, and the ratio of deciding to execute the second effect mode is the lowest, and there is no case of deciding to the third effect mode. By constructing in this way, it is possible to reduce the situation in which the suggestive performance during the game is executed by the second performance mode or the third performance mode in spite of the setting of the disadvantageous set value, and the player is rather discouraged, thereby preventing the decrease in interest in the game.

If it is not the production mode A, the second production control CPU 012IW 120b checks whether the current production mode is the production mode C (step 012IWS708). It should be noted that whether or not it is the production mode C can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the production mode C flag is set. If it is effect mode C, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b uses the during-game suggestive effect determination table for effect mode C to determine whether or not to execute the during-game suggestive effect and the effect mode (step 012IWS709).

FIG. 8-29(C) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the in-game suggestive effect determination table for the effect mode C. FIG. As shown in FIG. 8-29(C), in the during-game suggestive effect determination table for the effect mode C, compared with the case of the set value "3", the rate of determination to execute the during-game suggestive effect is low, and the third effect mode is not determined.

By executing the processing of steps 012IWS708 to S709, in the present characteristic part 099IW, when the set value command cannot be normally received and the performance mode is C, the situation in which the suggestion performance during the game is executed by the second performance mode or the third performance mode despite the disadvantageous set value being set and the player is rather discouraged can be reduced, thereby preventing the decrease in interest in the game.

On the other hand, if it is not the production mode C (that is, if the current production mode is the production mode B), the second production control CPU 012IW 120b ends the process as it is. That is, in the case of the production mode B, it is restricted so as not to execute the suggestion production during the game.

By executing the processing of step 012IWS708, the characterizing part 099IW does not execute the suggestive performance during the game when the set value command cannot be normally received and in the performance mode B, thereby reducing the situation in which the suggestive performance during the game is executed in spite of the disadvantageous set value being set and the player is rather discouraged, thereby preventing the decrease in interest in the game.

Incidentally, even when the set value command is not normally received in the effect mode B, the in-game suggestive effect may be executed at a low rate. In this case, for example, by using a table in which the execution ratio of the during-game suggestive effect is set lower than the set value "1" of the during-game suggestive effect determination table shown in FIGS.

8-29A and 8-29B, only a specific rendering mode (for example, the second rendering mode) among the plurality of rendering modes may be executed at a different rate according to the set value.

Further, for example, when a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) among the plurality of effect modes is executed, the possibility of being a specific set value may be denied. For example, in the case of the set value 1, the setting value 2 or the set value 3 is decided when the specific performance mode (for example, the second performance mode) is not determined, so that when the specific performance mode (for example, the second performance mode) is executed, the possibility of the set value 1 is denied. Further, when a specific effect mode (for example, a second effect mode) is executed, a specific set value may be determined. For example, only when the set value is 3, a specific performance mode (for example, a second performance mode) is determined, so that when the specific performance mode (for example, the second performance mode) is executed, the set value is determined to be 3.

In this characterizing part 099IW, it is possible to execute the in-game suggestive effects at different ratios according to the set values, but this is a concept including the execution ratio of the in-game suggestive effects (including the first effect mode, the second effect mode and the third effect mode) differing according to the set values, the execution ratio of the first effect mode, the second effect mode and the third effect mode differing according to the set values, and the execution ratio of only the specific effect mode differing according to the set values.

In this characteristic part 099IW, a common mode (for example, the first performance mode) of the suggestive effect during the game is executable in the special period and the non-special period. For example, the size, color, etc. of the mini-character A may differ between the special period and the non-special period.

In addition, this characteristic part 099IW is configured so that the presence or absence of the execution of the suggestive effect during the game and the effect mode when it is executed differ depending on whether it is a special period or a non-special period and the set value. , the presentation mode may be different when executed.

For example, it may be possible to execute the during-game suggestion effect only when the variation pattern includes at least the ready-to-win effect (that is, the variation time is longer than the non-ready-to-win variation pattern). Further, for example, between a variation pattern including super reach B and a variation pattern including super reach A having a higher degree of expectation than super reach B, the latter may have a higher ratio of execution of suggestive performance during game, may have higher reliability when suggestive performance during game is executed, or may have a higher ratio of executed suggestive performance during game and higher reliability when executed.

Further, for example, between a variation pattern including a pseudo-continuous performance and a variation pattern not including a pseudo-continuous performance (or the number of pseudo-continuous performances is smaller than that of the former), the former may have a higher ratio of execution of the suggestive performance during the game, may have a higher reliability when the suggestive performance during the game is executed, or may have a higher ratio of executing the suggestive performance during the game and a higher reliability when it is executed.

Further, for example, between a variation pattern in which the display result is a big win and a variation pattern in which the display result is not a big win, the former may have a higher ratio of execution of the suggestive performance during the game, may have a higher reliability when the suggestive performance during the game is executed, or may have a higher ratio of the suggestive performance during the game executed and a higher reliability when it is executed.

(Production decision processing during jackpot)
FIG. 8-30 is a flow chart showing an example of the effect determination process during the big hit. During the big hit, the effect determination process is executed in the big hit opening pre-process (step S114). In the big hit production determination process, the second production control CPU 012IW 120b checks whether or not the set value command reception flag is set (step 012IWS901). If the setting value command reception flag is set (that is, if the setting value command is normally received), the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b determines whether or not to execute the suggesting effect during the big win and the effect mode in the case of execution based on the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 012IW 122b (step 012IWS 902). Then, the process moves to step 012 IWS 907 .

In step S012IWS902, when it is a period (hereinafter also referred to as a specific period) from the start of the game until the variable display is executed a specific number of times (100 times in this example), the first big hit suggesting effect determination table shown in FIG. Then, whether or not to execute the middle-big-hit suggesting performance and the manner of performance in the case of execution are determined based on the selected table for determining the middle-big-hit suggesting performance and the set value. Here, the "game start time point" refers to the time point at which the first variable display is started after the power is turned on, but is not limited to this, and may be, for example, the time point at which the first variable display is started after the end of the previous consecutive game, or the time point at which the first variable display is started after the end of the customer waiting demonstration. In addition, in the characteristic portion 099IW, the period from the start of the game until the variable display is executed a specific number of times (100 times in this example) is defined as the specific period, regardless of whether or not the setting is changed when the power is turned on. Further, for example, the specific period may be divided into a plurality of periods, and a big-win suggestive performance determination table may be used in which the presence or absence of the big-win suggestive performance and the determination ratio of the performance mode are different between the first specific period (the period from the start of the game until the variation display is executed 50 times) and the second specific period (the period from the 51st variable display to the 100th variable display after the start of the game).

8-31 (A) and (B) show the first and second big win suggestive performance determination tables, both of which are assigned determination values in the order of set values ``1''<``2''<``3'' so that the ratio of execution of the big win suggestive performance increases. With such a configuration, it is suggested that an advantageous set value is set by executing the effect suggesting during the big hit.

Further, regarding the second effect mode and the third effect mode, the execution ratio is high in the order of the setting values "1"<"2"<"3", and the determination values are assigned so that the difference in the execution ratio between the setting values becomes large between the specific period and the non-specific period. In other words, during the specific period, it is configured such that the suggesting production during the big hit with higher reliability than the non-specific period is executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to motivate the player to play the game during the specific period, and to increase the interest. It should be noted that not only the configuration of this characteristic portion 099IW, but also the effect suggesting during the jackpot (or a specific effect mode thereof) may be executed only during a specific period and may not be executed during a non-specific period.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 8-31 (A) and (B), the fourth effect mode may be determined only when the set value is "3". Therefore, the set value "3" is determined by executing the effect suggesting that the game is a big win in the fourth effect mode.

In this characterizing part 099IW, when the effect suggesting during the big win is executed in the third effect mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-43 (A1), the image display device 5 stops displaying the decoration pattern that will be the big win, and then, as shown in FIG.

Further, when the big hit suggesting effect is executed in the fourth effect mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-43 (A1), in the image display device 5, after the decoration pattern to be a big hit is stopped and displayed, the dialogue D image (“high setting confirmed”) 012IW105 is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-44 (C1).

If the setting value command reception flag is not set (that is, if the setting value command cannot be normally received due to a command failure or data garbled although the setting change processing is executed), the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b confirms whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode A (step 012IWS903). Incidentally, whether or not it is the production mode A can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the production mode A flag is set. If the performance mode is A, the second performance control CPU 012IW 120b assumes that the set value is "1", and uses the selected mid-jackpot suggestive performance determination table to determine whether or not to execute the mid-jackpot suggestive performance and the mode of performance (step 012IWS904). Then, the process moves to step 012 IWS 907 .

By executing the processing of steps 012IWS903 to S904, this characterizing part 099IW decides whether or not to execute a suggesting performance during a big hit and the performance mode assuming that the set value "1", which is the most disadvantageous setting, is set when the set value command cannot be normally received and the performance mode is A. As shown in FIGS. 8-31 (A) and (B), for the set value "1", the rate of determination of the second rendering mode and the third rendering mode is the lowest, and there is no case of determination of the fourth rendering mode. By constructing in this way, it is possible to reduce the situation in which the player is rather discouraged by the second performance mode, the third performance mode, and the third performance mode in spite of the setting of the disadvantageous set value, and the situation in which the player is rather discouraged by the second performance mode, the third performance mode, and the third performance mode, and the decrease in the interest in the game can be prevented.

If it is not production mode A, the second production control CPU 012IW 120b checks whether the current production mode is production mode C (step 012IWS905). It should be noted that whether or not it is the production mode C can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the production mode C flag is set. If the effect mode is C, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b uses the during-big-hit suggestive effect determination table for effect mode C to determine whether or not to execute the during-big-hit suggestive effect and the effect mode (step 012IWS906). Then, the process moves to step 012 IWS 907 .

FIG. 8-31(C) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a jackpot mid-jackpot effect determination table for effect mode C. FIG. As shown in FIG. 8-31(C), in the big-hit suggesting performance determination table for the performance mode C, the ratio itself of deciding to execute the big-hit suggesting performance is low, and compared to the case of the set values ``2'' and ``3'', the ratio of determining the second performance mode and the third performance mode is low, and there is no case of determining the fourth performance mode.

By executing the processing of steps 012IWS905 to S906, in this characterizing part 099IW, when the set value command cannot be normally received and the performance mode is C, the situation in which the player is rather discouraged by the second performance mode, the third performance mode, or the third performance mode in spite of the fact that the disadvantageous set value is set, the implying performance is executed in the second performance mode, the third performance mode, or the third performance mode, and the decrease in interest in the game can be prevented.

On the other hand, if it is not the production mode C (that is, if the current production mode is the production mode B), the second production control CPU 012IW 120b proceeds directly to step 012IWS907. That is, in the case of the performance mode B, it is restricted so as not to execute the suggestive performance during the big hit.

By executing the processing of step 012IWS905, this characteristic part 099IW, when the set value command cannot be normally received and in the performance mode B, does not execute the suggesting performance during the big win, thereby reducing the situation in which the suggesting performance during the big win is executed despite the setting of the disadvantageous set value and the player is rather discouraged, and the decrease in interest in the game can be prevented.

In addition, even if the set value command is not normally received in the performance mode B, it may be constructed such that the performance suggesting during the big hit can be executed at a low rate. In this case, for example, by using a table in which the execution ratio of the suggesting effect during the big win is set lower than the setting value "1" of the table for determining the suggesting effect during the big win shown in FIGS.

8-31 (A) and (B), only a specific rendering mode (for example, the third rendering mode) among the plurality of rendering modes may be executed at a different rate according to the set value.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 8-31(A), when a big win is achieved in a specific period, the performance suggesting that the game is a big win is always executed, but it may not be executed at a low rate. In this case, the non-execution rate may be varied according to the set value. In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 8-31(B), the ratio of non-execution of the suggestion effect during the big win is the same regardless of the setting value, but the ratio of non-execution may be changed according to the setting value.

In addition, in this characteristic part 099IW, when a big win is achieved in a specific period, a mid-jackpot suggesting effect is executed as a setting suggesting effect, but in addition to or instead of such a structure, a setting suggesting effect (for example, a dialogue image suggesting a set value is displayed when a predetermined condition is satisfied) may be executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition during a specific period. In this case, the predetermined condition may be established, for example, when the number of executions of the ready-to-win effect or pseudo-continuous effect reaches a predetermined number of times, or when a specific super ready-to-win effect or advance notice effect is executed.

In this characteristic part 099IW, it is possible to execute the effect indicating that the jackpot is in progress at different ratios depending on the set value. ) is a concept that includes only different execution ratios.

Next, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b determines whether or not to execute the character product effect (step 012IWS907).

Here, it is assumed that the movable member 012IW101 is provided above the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 8-43(A1), for example. In such a configuration, when the character effect is executed, the movable member 012IW101 is controlled to move to the front of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 8-43 (B2).

As shown in FIGS. 8-43 (A1) and (B2), when the character effect is executed, the movable member 012IW101 moves to the front of the image display device 5, so that the position where the dialog image is displayed by the jackpot suggesting effect on the image display device 5 becomes difficult to see. In this characteristic part 099IW, since the performance suggesting during the big win and the character performance are executed at different timings in the fanfare period in the big win game, the movable member 012IW101 actually moved to the front of the image display device 5 does not cover the dialogue image displayed by the performance suggesting during the big win. However, when the movable member 012IW101 is operated by the performance of the character during the fanfare period, the player's attention is directed to the movable member 012IW101, and there is a possibility that the player may overlook the dialogue image displayed by the big-hit suggestive performance. Therefore, in step 012IWS907, by using the character effect determination table shown in FIG. 8-31(D), when the suggesting effect during the big hit is executed, the character effect is not executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decline in interest due to difficulty in recognizing the implying effect during the big win. Also, with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the impossibility of recognizing the during-big-win suggestive performance even if the during-big-win suggestive performance and the accessory performance are executed at the same timing.

When the execution of the suggesting performance during the big win is determined, the execution timing of either the suggestive performance during the big win or the performance of the character may be changed (for example, the performance suggesting during the big win is performed during the fanfare period and the suggestive performance during the big win is performed during the ending period) to prevent the suggestive performance during the big win from becoming difficult to recognize. In addition, when execution of the suggestive performance during the big win is determined, the operation mode of the movable member 012IW101 may be changed (for example, controlled so as not to stop at a position overlapping the dialogue image by the suggestive performance during the big win), or the display position of the dialogue image by the suggestive performance during the big win may be changed to prevent the suggestive performance during the big win from becoming difficult to recognize. Further, when execution of the suggesting effect during the big hit is determined, the execution of the character effect may be restricted by lowering the execution ratio of the character effect. Also, the execution of the performance of the character product may be restricted only during a specific period. Also, not only the example shown in FIG. 8-31(D), but also when the suggestive effect during the big win is executed, the character object effect may be executed at a low rate.

Next, when the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b does not execute the character effect (N of step 012IWS908), it determines the presence or absence of the light guide plate effect (step 012IWS909).

Here, a light-transmitting light guide plate 012IW103 that allows light to pass therethrough and a light emitter that allows light to enter from the end face of the light guide plate are provided on the front surface of the image display device 5. The light guide plate 012IW103 is provided with a reflecting portion that reflects the light that has entered the inside of the light guide plate 012IW103 from the end face of the light guide plate 012IW103 by the light emitter and emits the light to the front of the gaming machine. shall be Then, by causing the light emitter to emit light, it is possible to execute a light guide plate presentation in which light is emitted from the reflection portion provided on the light guide plate 012IW103 to the front of the gaming machine. In such a configuration, when the light guide plate effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 8-43 (B3), light is emitted from the reflection portion provided on the light guide plate 012IW103 to the front of the gaming machine, and the characters "big win" appear. In addition, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the image displayed on the image display device 5 during execution of the light guide plate effect.

In step 012IWS909, by using the light guide plate effect determination table shown in FIG. 8-31(E), the light guide plate effect is executed at different ratios depending on the presence or absence of the jackpot suggesting effect and the effect mode when executed. Specifically, it is constituted so that the ratio of executing the light guide plate performance is high when the performance suggesting during the jackpot in the first performance mode is executed, and the ratio of executing the performance of the light guide plate is low when the performance suggesting during the big win in the second performance mode, the third performance mode and the fourth performance mode is executed. That is, when the big-win suggestive performance is executed in a performance mode not suggesting an advantageous set value, the proportion of the light guide plate performance to be executed is high and the big-win suggestive performance is configured to be difficult to visually recognize. For example, as shown in FIG. 8-43 (B4), when the dialogue A image (“setting is…”) 012IW104 is displayed by the jackpot suggesting performance in the first performance mode, if the light guide plate performance is executed, the dialogue A image becomes difficult to see. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from deteriorating the interest in the game due to the effect suggesting during the jackpot, which is an undesirable effect mode for the player. When the big-win suggestive performance is executed in the second performance mode, the third performance mode and the fourth performance mode, the execution timing of either the big-win suggestive performance or the light guide plate performance may be changed (for example, the light guide plate performance is performed during the fanfare period and the big-win suggestive performance is performed during the ending period).

(Ending effect processing)
FIG. 8-32 is a flow chart showing the ending effect processing (step S177) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the ending effect process, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b first subtracts 1 from the value of the effect period measurement timer (step 012IWS951). It should be noted that the effect period measuring timer is set based on the completion of all the rounds of the big win game in the effect process during the big win (see step S176). Next, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b confirms whether or not the effect period measurement timer has timed out (step 012IWS952).

When the effect period measurement timer has not timed out (step 012IWS952 N), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step 012IWS953), and executes processing for controlling the effect devices (image display device 5, game effect lamp 9, speakers 8L, 8R, etc.) according to the contents of process data n (step 012IWS954). For example, an effect such as displaying that the big win is over or displaying a predetermined character is executed.

Then, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b checks whether the process timer has timed out (step 012IWS955), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (step 012IWS956). Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer and the process timer is started (step 012IWS957).

If the effect period measuring timer has timed out (Y of step 012IWS952), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the big win game to be finished this time is a big win game based on the probability variable big win (step 012IW958). Whether or not it is a variable probability big hit can be determined, for example, by confirming the display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area. If it is not a probability variable jackpot (N of step 012IW958), the process proceeds directly to step 012IWS961.

If the jackpot game based on the variable probability jackpot is to be terminated (Y in step 012IWS958), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not it has received the V winning designation command (step 012IWS959). If the V winning designation command is received (Y of step 012IWS959), the process proceeds to step 012IWS961.

If the V winning designation command is not received (N of step 012IWS959), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b inputs the date and time information from the real-time clock 012IW126, and stores the log information in the log area provided in the backup data memories 099IW210A to 210D of the backup memory board 099IW14 as the date and time when the probability variation is not established (step 012IWS960). . That is, in this case, even though the game is controlled to the big win game based on the variable probability big win and the second special variable winning device 012IW007b is opened for a relatively long period of time (in this example, 29.5 seconds), the game ball does not enter the V winning area in the second special variable winning device 012IW007b and is not controlled to the variable probability state, so the log information is recorded as the date and time when the variable probability is not established. Then, the process proceeds to step 012 IWS961.

After that, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b updates the value of the effect process flag to "0" (step 012IWS961), and ends the ending effect process.

In addition, in this example, a case is shown in which probability variation non-establishment is detected and log information is recorded in the ending period at the end of the jackpot game, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, in this example, since the second special variable winning device 012IW007b is opened in the fourth round during the jackpot game, at the end of the fourth round (when the second special variable winning device 012IW007b is closed after the fourth round) or during the fifth round after the fourth round (during the opening of the second special variable winning device 012IW007b in the fifth round), it is detected whether or not the definite variable winning device 012IW007b is established, and the log information is recorded. It may be configured to

(Error notification process)
8-33 to 8-36 are flow charts showing the error notification process (step 012IWS210). In the error notification process, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b first checks whether or not the first left-handed informing flag indicating that the first left-handed informing is being executed is set (step 012IWS101). If the first hitting left informing flag is not set, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the second hitting left informing flag indicating that the second hitting to the left is being executed is set (step 012IWS102).

If the second left hitting informing flag is not set, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the jackpot game is in progress (step 012IWS103). It should be noted that whether or not the big hit game is being played can be determined by confirming whether or not the value of the performance process flag updated in the performance control process is a value indicating the performance processing during the big win (step S176) to the ending performance processing (step S177). If it is not during the jackpot game, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not it is during the high base state (step 012IWS104). It should be noted that whether or not in the high base state, for example, whether or not a command that can be specified in the high base state (for example, probability variable state background designation command, time saving state background designation command) is received It can be determined by checking.

If it is not in the high base state (that is, if it is in the low base state), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b checks whether or not it has received a gate passage designation command (step 012IWS105). If the gate passage designation command is received (that is, if the passage of the game ball through the passage gate 012IW041 is detected), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b adds 1 to the value of the gate passage counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed through the passage gate 012IW041 (step 012IWS106), and checks whether the value of the gate passage counter after the addition is 5 (step 012IWS10). 7).

If the value of the gate passage counter is 5, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b performs control to start displaying the left-handed notification display on the image display device 5 (step 012IWS108). For example, the image display device 5 is controlled to start displaying characters such as "Aim left!". In addition, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b sets the first left-handed informing flag (step 012IWS 109). In addition, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets a value corresponding to a predetermined period (5 seconds in this example) to the first left-handed notification timer for measuring the execution period of the first left-handed notification (step 012IWS110). That is, in this case, since the player is in the low base state and is not in the big winning game, the left-handed operation is originally performed, but the fact that the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 012IW041 provided in the right area of the game area is detected five times in total means that the right-handed operation is performed, so the first left-handed notification is given to prompt the player to perform the left-handed operation.

If the value of the gate passage counter after addition is not 5, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b checks whether the value of the gate passage counter after addition is 10 (step 012IWS111). If the value of the gate passage counter is 10, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b controls the image display device 5 to start displaying a left-handed notification display (step 012IWS112). For example, the image display device 5 is controlled to start displaying characters such as "Aim left!". In this case, for example, it may be configured to display a large-sized hitting-to-left informing display as compared with the case where the first hitting-to-left informing is executed. Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b performs control to start all lighting of the game effect lamp 9 (step 012IWS113). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b performs control to start outputting a predetermined notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R (step 012IWS114). In addition, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b sets the flag during the second left hitting notification (step 012IWS 115). In addition, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b sets a value corresponding to a predetermined period (33 seconds in this example) to the second left-handed notification timer for measuring the execution period of the second left-handed notification (step 012IWS116). That is, in this case, when the game ball is in the low base state and not in the big winning game, it means that the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 012IW041 provided in the right area of the game area is detected 10 times in total, so that the second left-handed notification is given to urge the player to perform the left-handed operation. In addition, CPU012IW120b for 2nd production|presentation control will reset a flag and a 1st hitting left information timer during 1st hitting left information, if set.

In this example, the execution condition for the second left-handed notification is satisfied based on the fact that the passage of the game ball through the passage gate 012IW041 is detected a total of 10 times. The conditions are satisfied.

Also, in this example, a case is shown in which the execution condition for the left-handed notification is established based on the fact that the passage of the game ball through the passage gate 012IW041 has been detected a total of 5 or 10 times, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, when the second start winning hole is provided in the right area of the game ball, if the winning of the game ball into the second starting winning hole is detected even once, the execution condition of the left hitting notice is established, and the left hitting notice may be executed.

In addition, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b inputs the date and time information from the real-time clock 012IW126, and stores the log information in the log area provided in the backup data memories 099IW210A to 210D of the backup memory board 099IW14 as the input date and time information as the left-handed notification date and time (step 012IWS117). In this way, in this example, there are two types of left-handed information, the first left-handed information and the second left-handed information, but the log information is recorded only when the second left-handed information with high importance is executed, and the log information is not recorded when the first left-handed information with low importance is executed.

If the gate passing designation command is not received (N of step 012IWS105, that is, if the passage of the game ball through the passage gate 012IW041 is detected, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the winning opening winning designation command is received (step 012IWS118). If so), the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b clears the value of the gate passage counter to 0 (step 012IWS 119).In other words, receiving the winning opening winning designation command means that the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening 10 provided in the left area of the game area is detected, and the player is performing a left-handed operation.

Also, when the jackpot game is in progress (Y in step 012IWS103) or in the high base state (Y in step 012IWS104), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b proceeds to step 012IWS119 and clears the value of the gate passage counter to 0 (step 012IWS119). That is, the value of the gate passing counter is cleared to 0 because the fact that the player is in the jackpot game or in the high base state means that the right-handed operation is performed.

When the first left hitting informing flag is set (Y in step 012IWS101), that is, when the first left hitting informing is being executed, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the first left hitting informing timer has timed out (step 012IWS120). If the first left-handed notification timer has timed out, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b performs control to end the display of the left-handed notification display on the image display device 5 (step 012IWS121). In addition, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b resets the first left-handed informing flag (step 012IWS122).

When the second hitting to left informing flag is set (Y in step 012IWS102), that is, when the second hitting to left is being executed, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the second hitting to left informing timer has timed out (step 012IWS123). If the second hitting-to-left notification timer has timed out, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b performs control to terminate the display of hitting-to-left notification display on the image display device 5 (step 012IWS124). In addition, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b performs control to terminate all lighting of the game effect lamps 9 (step 012IWS125), and performs control to terminate output of predetermined notification sounds from the speakers 8L and 8R (step 012IWS126). In addition, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b resets the second hitting to left informing flag (step 012IWS127). Also, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b clears the value of the gate passage counter to 0 (step 012IWS128).

In this example, a case is shown in which the value of the gate passage counter is cleared to 0 based on the detection of the winning of the game ball into the general winning opening 10, the fact that the jackpot game is in progress, the fact that the high base state is in progress, and the lapse of the notification period (33 seconds) of the second left-handed notification, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, the value of the gate passage counter may be cleared to 0 based on the detection of the winning of the game ball into the general prize winning port 10, the fact that the jackpot game is being played, and the fact that the player is in the high base state, while the value of the gate passage counter may not be cleared even after the notification period (33 seconds) of the second left-handed notification has passed, and various processing modes are conceivable.

Next, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the first full-tank informing flag indicating that the first full-tank informing is being executed is set (step 012IWS129). If the first full tank informing flag is not set, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b checks whether or not the second full tank informing flag indicating that the second full tank informing is being executed is set (step 012IWS130).

If the second full-tank informing flag is not set, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b checks whether or not a full-tank detection command has been received (step 012IWS131). If the full tank detection command is received, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b confirms whether or not a full tank flag indicating that the full tank state of the batted ball supply tray (lower tray) is being detected is set (step 012IWS 132). If the full-tank flag is not set, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets the full-tank flag (step 012IWS133) and sets a full-tank timer for measuring the duration of the full-tank state of the ball supply tray (lower tray) (step 012IWS134).

If the full-tank flag is set, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b checks whether the value of the full-tank timer corresponds to 10 seconds (step 012IWS135). If the value of the full-tank timer is equivalent to 10 seconds (that is, if the batted ball supply tray (lower tray) remains full for 10 seconds), the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b controls the image display device 5 to start displaying a full-tank notification display (step 012IWS136). For example, the image display device 5 is controlled to start displaying characters such as "The bottom tray is full!". In addition, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b sets the first full tank informing flag (step 012IWS137). In addition, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets a value corresponding to a predetermined period (5 seconds in this example) to the first full tank notification timer for measuring the execution period of the first full tank notification (step 012IWS138).

If the value of the timer during full tank is not a value corresponding to 10 seconds, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b checks whether the value of the timer during full tank is a value corresponding to 30 seconds (step 012IWS139). If the value of the full-tank timer is equivalent to 30 seconds (that is, if the batted ball supply tray (lower tray) remains full for 30 seconds), the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b controls the image display device 5 to start displaying the full-tank notification display (step 012IWS140). For example, the image display device 5 is controlled to start displaying characters such as "The lower tray is full!". In this case, for example, the full-tank notification display may be displayed in a larger size than when the first full-tank notification is performed. Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b performs control to start all lighting of the game effect lamp 9 (step 012IWS141). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b performs control to start outputting a predetermined notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R (step 012IWS142). In addition, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b sets a second full-tank informing flag (step 012IWS143). In addition, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets a value corresponding to a predetermined period (33 seconds in this example) to the second full tank notification timer for measuring the execution period of the second full tank notification (step 012IWS144). It should be noted that the second effect control CPU012IW120b, if set, resets the first full tank notification flag and the first full tank notification timer.

In this example, when executing the second full-tank notification, the game effect lamp 9 is fully lit and a predetermined notification sound is output in the same manner as when executing the second left-handed notification. However, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, the game effect lamps 9 may be fully lit or a predetermined notification sound may be output, or only some of the game effect lamps 9 may be lit.

In addition, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b inputs the date and time information from the real-time clock 012IW126, and stores the log information in the log area provided in the backup data memories 099IW210A to 210D of the backup memory board 099IW14 as the full tank notification date and time (step 012IWS145). Thus, in this example, there are two types of full-tank notification, the first full-tank notification and the second full-tank notification, but the log information is recorded only when the second full-tank notification with high importance is executed, and the log information is not recorded when the first full-tank notification with low importance is executed.

On the other hand, if the full tank detection command is not received (N of step 012IWS131), that is, if the full tank state of the batted ball supply tray (lower tray) is not detected, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b resets the full tank flag and the full tank timer if set (step 012IWS146).

When the first full-tank notification flag is set (Y in step 012IWS129), that is, when the first full-tank notification is being executed, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b checks whether the first full-tank notification timer has timed out (step 012IWS147). If the first full-tank notification timer has timed out, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b performs control to terminate the display of the full-tank notification display on the image display device 5 (step 012IWS148). In addition, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b resets the first full tank informing flag (step 012IWS149).

When the second full-tank notification flag is set (Y in step 012IWS130), that is, when the second full-tank notification is being executed, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b checks whether the second full-tank notification timer has timed out (step 012IWS150). If the second full-tank notification timer has timed out, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b performs control to terminate the display of the left-handed notification display on the image display device 5 (step 012IWS151). In addition, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b performs control to terminate all lighting of the game effect lamps 9 (step 012IWS152), and performs control to terminate output of predetermined notification sounds from the speakers 8L and 8R (step 012IWS153). In addition, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b resets the second full tank informing flag (step 012IWS154). In addition, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b resets the full tank flag and resets the full tank timer (step 012IWS155).

(Maintenance mode processing)
FIG. 8-37 is a flowchart showing maintenance mode processing (step 012IWS211). In the maintenance mode process, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b first checks whether or not the maintenance mode flag indicating that the maintenance mode is in progress is set (step 012IWS451). If the maintenance mode flag is not set, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b checks whether or not the setting confirmation flag indicating that the setting is being confirmed is set (step 012IWS452).

If the setting confirmation flag is not set, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b confirms whether or not the setting confirmation command is received (step 012IWS453). If the setting confirmation command is received, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b controls the image display device 5 to start displaying the setting confirmation in progress display (step 012IWS454). For example, the image display device 5 is controlled to start displaying characters such as "Confirming settings". Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b sets a setting confirmation flag (step 012IWS455).

If the setting confirmation flag is set (Y in step 012IWS452), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the push button 31B is turned on (specifically, whether or not the detection signal from the push sensor 35B is input) (step 012IWS456). If the push button 31B is ON, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b performs control to start displaying the maintenance mode menu screen on the image display device 5 (step 012IWS457). In addition, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b sets the maintenance mode flag (step 012IWS458).

As described above, by executing the processing of steps 012IWS452 to S458, in this example, when the push button 31B is pressed while confirming the settings at power-on of the gaming machine, the maintenance mode is controlled and the display of the maintenance mode menu screen is started.

If the push button 31B is not turned on (N of step 012IWS456), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b checks whether or not the command for restoration is received (step 012IWS459). If the command at the time of restoration is received, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b performs control to end the display of the setting confirmation in progress display on the image display device 5 (step 012IWS460). In addition, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b resets the setting confirmation flag (step 012IWS461). That is, receiving a command for recovery during setting confirmation means that the setting key 012IW051 is turned off by the player and the setting confirmation processing is terminated (N in step 012IWS043, see step 012IWS049), so control is performed to end the display of the setting confirmation in progress display.

If the maintenance mode flag is set (Y in step 012IWS451), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not it has detected that the maintenance history selection operation has been performed by the player (step 012IWS462). For example, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b checks whether or not it has detected that the maintenance history selection operation has been performed, based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B. If it is detected that the maintenance history selection operation has been performed, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b extracts all log information from the log area provided in the backup data memories 099IW210A to 210D of the backup memory board 099IW14 (step 012IWS463). Strictly speaking, at step 012 IWS 463, only the log information for the game shop is read, and the log information for the game machine maker is not read. Then, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b performs control to display a maintenance history screen including the extracted log information as history information in the image display device 5 (step 012IWS464).

If the maintenance history selection operation is not detected (N of step 012IWS462), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not it has detected that the setting change/confirmation history selection operation has been performed by the player (step 012IWS465). For example, the second effect control CPU012IW120b, based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B, confirms whether or not it has detected that the setting change / confirmation history selection operation was performed. If it is detected that the setting change/confirmation history selection operation has been performed, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b extracts all the setting change and setting confirmation log information among the log information stored in the log areas provided in the backup data memories 099IW210A to 210D of the backup memory board 099IW14 (step 012IWS466). Then, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b controls the image display device 5 to display a setting change/confirmation history screen including the extracted setting change and setting confirmation log information as history information (step 012IWS467).

If it is not detected that the setting change/confirmation history selection operation is performed (N of step 012IWS465), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the command at the time of restoration is received (step 012IWS468). If the command at the time of restoration is received, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b performs control to erase the maintenance mode menu screen, the maintenance history screen, and the setting change/confirmation history screen in the image display device 5 (step 012IWS469). Further, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b resets the maintenance mode flag (step 012IWS470). That is, the fact that the command for recovery is received during setting confirmation means that the setting key 012IW051 is turned off by the player, and the setting confirmation processing ends (N in step 012IWS043, see step 012IWS049), so control is performed to end the maintenance mode.

In this example, it is determined that the setting key 012IW051 has been turned off based on the reception of the recovery command, and the maintenance mode is ended, but the mode is not limited to this. For example, in this example, when the setting key 012IW051 is turned off, the setting value command is also transmitted (see step 012IWS047), so it may be determined that the setting key 012IW051 has been turned off based on the reception of the setting value command, and the maintenance mode may be ended.

(Setting change time recording process)
FIG. 8-38 is a flow chart showing the setting change time recording process (step 012 IWS 212). In the setting change time recording process, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b first checks whether or not a setting change command is received (step 012IWS801). If the setting change command is received, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b inputs the date and time information from the real-time clock 012IW126, and stores the log information in the log area provided in the backup data memories 099IW210A to 210D of the backup memory board 099IW14 as the setting change start date and time (step 012IWS802). In addition, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b sets a setting change command reception flag indicating that the setting change command has been received (step 012IWS803).

If the setting change command is not received (N of step 012IWS801), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b checks whether or not the setting confirmation command is received (step 012IWS804). If the setting confirmation command is received, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b inputs the date and time information from the real time clock 012IW 126, and stores the log information in the log area provided in the backup data memories 099IW 210A to 210D of the backup memory board 099IW 14 as the setting confirmation start date and time (step 012IWS 805). Also, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b sets a setting confirmation command reception flag indicating that the setting confirmation command has been received (step 012IWS 806).

If the setting confirmation command is not received (N of step 012IWS804), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the initialization designation command is received (step 012IWS807). If the initialization designation command is received, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b checks whether or not the setting change command reception flag is set (step 012IWS808). If the setting change command reception flag is not set (that is, if the setting change process is not executed and only the initialization process is executed), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b inputs the date and time information from the real-time clock 012IW126, and stores the log information in the log area provided in the backup data memories 099IW210A to 210D of the backup memory board 099IW14 as the RAM clear date and time (step 012I). WS809).

On the other hand, if the setting change command reception flag is not set (Y in step 012IWS808), that is, if both the setting change process and the initialization process are executed, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b reads the current setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 012IW122b (step 012IWS810). In this example, when the setting change process is executed, the set value command is transmitted before the initialization designation command (see steps 012IWS047 and S052), so the latest set value should be stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 012IW122b. Then, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b inputs the date and time information from the real-time clock 012IW126, associates it with the read setting value, and stores the log information in the log area provided in the backup data memories 099IW210A to 210D of the backup memory board 099IW14 as the setting change end date and time (step 012IWS811). In addition, CPU012IW120b for 2nd production|presentation control resets the setting change command reception flag which was set.

In this example, the processing of steps 012 IWS810 and S811 is executed, and if the setting change processing is executed, the initialization processing should also be executed.

If the initialization command is not received (N of step 012IWS807), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b checks whether or not the command at the time of recovery is received (step 012IWS812). If the command at the time of restoration is received, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b checks whether or not the setting confirmation command reception flag is set (step 012IWS813). If the setting confirmation command reception flag is not set (that is, if the setting confirmation process is not executed and only the recovery process is executed), the process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the setting confirmation command reception flag is not set (Y in step 012IWS813), that is, if both the setting confirmation process and the recovery process are executed, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b reads the current setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 012IW122b (step 012IWS814). Then, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b inputs the date and time information from the real-time clock 012IW126, associates it with the read set value, and stores the log information in the log area provided in the backup data memories 099IW210A to 210D of the backup memory board 099IW14 as the setting confirmation end date and time (step 012IWS815). In addition, CPU012IW120b for 2nd production|presentation control resets the setting confirmation command reception flag which was set.

In this example, when the setting confirmation process is not executed and only the recovery process is executed, the log information is not particularly recorded, but the log information may be recorded. In this case, for example, when step 012IWS813 is N, the date and time information is input from the real-time clock 012IW126, and the log information is stored in the log areas provided in the backup data memories 099IW210A to 210D of the backup memory board 099IW14 as the recovery date and time.

(Current time setting process)
FIG. 8-39 is a flow chart showing the current time setting process (step 012IWS213). In the current time setting process, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b first checks whether or not the maintenance mode flag is set (step 012IWS821). If the maintenance mode flag is set (that is, if the maintenance mode is in progress), the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b confirms whether or not the current time setting flag indicating that the current time is being set is set (step 012IWS822).

If the current time setting flag is not set, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b checks whether or not it has detected that the player has performed the current time setting selection operation (step 012IWS823). For example, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b checks whether or not it has detected that the current time setting selection operation has been performed, based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B. If it is detected that the current time setting selection operation has been performed, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b performs control to start displaying the current time setting screen on the image display device 5 (step 012IWS824). In addition, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b sets the current time setting flag (step 012IWS825).

If the current time setting flag is set (Y of step 012IWS822), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not the waiting flag indicating that the current time setting log information is being recorded is set (step 012IWS826). If the waiting flag is not set, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b checks whether or not the hour signal is received from the first effect control CPU 012IW120a (step 012IWS827).

In this example, as already explained, the detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B are first input to the first effect control CPU 012IW120a. Therefore, when the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is operated by the player to input the current time setting information, a signal capable of specifying the input current time setting information is sent from the first effect control CPU 012IW120a to the second effect control CPU 012IW120b. are sent sequentially to In this case, in this example, an hour signal indicating the hour, a minute signal indicating the minute, a second signal indicating the second, a year signal indicating the year, a month signal indicating the month, a day signal indicating the day, and a day of the week signal indicating the day of the week are transmitted in this order. Also, in this example, as already explained, the first effect control CPU 012IW 120a generates a timer interrupt every 10 ms, and these signals are transmitted every 10 ms.

If the hour signal is received (Y of step 012IWS827), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets the hour information of the real-time clock 012IW126 to the time indicated by the received hour signal (step 012IWS828). In addition, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b sets a value corresponding to 500ms to the waiting timer for measuring the waiting period until the log information of the current time setting is recorded (step 012IWS829). Also, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b sets a waiting flag (step 012IWS830).

If the waiting flag is set (Y of step 012IWS826), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b checks whether or not the waiting timer has timed out (step 012IWS831). If the standby timer has not timed out, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b confirms whether or not any of the minute signal, second signal, year signal, month signal, day signal, or day of the week signal has been received from the first effect control CPU 012IW 120a (step 012IWS832).

If any signal is received (Y of step 012IWS832), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets the information of the real-time clock 012IW126 to the information indicated by the received signal (step 012IWS833). For example, when the minute signal is received, the minute information of the real-time clock 012IW 126 is set to the minute indicated by the received minute signal. Also, for example, when a second signal is received, the second information of the real-time clock 012IW 126 is set to the second indicated by the received second signal. Also, for example, when the year signal is received, the year information of the real-time clock 012IW 126 is set to the year indicated by the received year signal. Also, for example, when the month signal is received, the month information of the real-time clock 012IW 126 is set to the month indicated by the received month signal. Further, for example, when the date signal is received, the date information of the real-time clock 012IW 126 is set to the date indicated by the received date signal. Further, for example, when a day-of-the-week signal is received, the day-of-the-week information of the real-time clock 012IW 126 is set to the day of the week indicated by the received day-of-the-week signal.

If the standby timer has timed out (Y in step 012IWS831), that is, if 500 ms has passed since the time signal was first received, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b reads the time, minute, second, year, month, date, and day of the week from the real-time clock 012IW126 (step 012IWS834). Then, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b stores the log information in the log area provided in the backup data memories 099IW210A to 210D of the backup memory board 099IW14 as the time setting date and time based on the read date and time information (step 012IWS835). In addition, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b resets the current time setting flag and the waiting flag (step 012IWS836).

FIG. 8-40 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the setting timing of the current time. When the player operates the stick controller 31A or push button 31B to set the current time, detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and push sensor 35B are first input to the first effect control CPU 012IW120a. Then, as shown in FIG. 8-40, the hour signal, minute signal, second signal, year signal, month signal, day signal, and day of the week signal are sequentially transmitted from the first effect control CPU 012IW120a to the second effect control CPU 012IW120b every 10 ms in accordance with the setting operation by the player.

When the second effect control CPU012IW120b receives these signals, it immediately sets the information of the real-time clock 012IW126 based on the received signals, as shown in FIG. 8-40. As shown in FIG. 8-40, when the hour signal is received, the hour information of the real-time clock 012IW126 is immediately set based on the received hour signal. When the minute signal is received 10 ms later, the minute information of the real-time clock 012IW126 is immediately set based on the received minute signal. Further, when the second signal is received 10 ms later, the second information of the real-time clock 012IW126 is immediately set based on the received second signal. Further, when the year signal is received 10 ms later, the year information of the real-time clock 012IW126 is immediately set based on the received year signal. Also, when the moon signal is received 10 ms later, the month information of the real-time clock 012IW126 is immediately set based on the received moon signal. When the date signal is received 10 ms later, the date information of the real-time clock 012IW126 is immediately set based on the received date signal. Furthermore, when the day-of-the-week signal is received 10 ms later, the day-of-the-week information of the real-time clock 012IW 126 is immediately set based on the received day-of-the-week signal.

On the other hand, the log information of the time setting date and time is not recorded immediately, but the standby timer is set when the first hour signal is received, the standby timer times out, and as shown in FIG.

If the player sets the current time before 500 ms has passed since the hour signal was received, the information of the real-time clock 012IW126 may be set by receiving another hour signal, minute signal, second signal, year signal, month signal, date signal, and day of the week signal before 500 ms has passed. Based on the date and time information of the real-time clock 012IW 126 set based on the received signal, the log information of the set date and time is recorded.

If log information is recorded each time an hour signal, minute signal, second signal, year signal, month signal, day signal, and day-of-week signal are individually transmitted, the log information of the current time setting becomes redundant more than necessary. However, in this example, as shown in FIG.

In addition, in this example, in addition to the second effect control CPU012IW120b, the first effect control CPU012IW120a to which the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B is temporarily input is provided, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, an input circuit to which detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B are input is provided, and an hour signal, a minute signal, a second signal, a year signal, a month signal, a day signal, and a day of the week signal may be sequentially transmitted from the input circuit to the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b. As long as it is configured such that the signal corresponding to the operation in some form is sequentially transmitted to the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b.

Also, in this example, the case where the real-time clock 012IW126 is mounted on the side of the second effect control board 012IW12b is shown, but the real-time clock may be mounted on the side of the first effect control board 012IW12a, and the date and time information of the real-time clock may be updated at any time by the side of the first effect control CPU 012IW120a according to the player's operation. Then, the first effect control CPU 012IW120a transmits the updated date and time information of the real-time clock to the second effect control CPU 012IW120b, and the second effect control CPU 012IW120b may be configured to manage the date and time by updating a counter or the like based on the received date and time information.

(power outage date and time record processing)
FIG. 8-41 is a flow chart showing the power failure date and time recording process (step 012IWS214). In the power interruption date and time recording process, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b first checks whether or not a temporary storage enable flag indicating that the temporary storage of date and time information from the real-time clock 012IW 126 is permitted is set (step 012IWS841). If the temporary storage enable flag is set, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b checks whether or not the temporary storage timer for measuring the time for temporarily storing the date and time information from the real time clock 012IW 126 has timed out (step 012IWS842). If the temporary storage timer has timed out, the second effect control CPU012IW120b reads the date and time information from the real-time clock 012IW126, and stores the read date and time information in a temporary area provided in the RAM012IW122b (step 012IWS843). Also, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b sets a value corresponding to 100 ms to the temporary storage timer (step 012IWS844).

The date and time information is stored in the temporary area of the RAM 012IW 122b every 100 ms. If the previous date and time information is stored in the temporary area, new date and time information is overwritten and stored in the temporary area every 100 ms.

If the temporary storage enabled flag is not set (N of step 012IWS841), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not an initialization designation command or a command at the time of recovery is received (step 012IWS845). If the initialization designation command or the recovery command is received, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether the log information of the previous power-on date and time is stored in the log area provided in the backup data memories 099IW210A to 210D of the backup memory board 099IW14 (step 012IWS846). If the log information of the previous power-on date and time is not stored (N of step 012IWS846), the process proceeds to step 012IWS849. If the log information of the previous power-on date and time is stored (Y in step 012IWS846), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b reads the date and time information stored in the temporary area of the RAM 012IW122b, and stores the log information in the log area provided in the backup data memories 099IW210A to 210D of the backup memory board 099IW14 as the power failure date and time (step 012). IWS847). Then, the process proceeds to step 012 IWS849.

If neither the initialization designation command nor the command at the time of restoration is received (N of step 012IWS845), the second effect control CPU 012IW120b confirms whether or not other commands (except for commands transmitted when the power is turned on, such as setting confirmation commands and setting change commands) are received (step 012IWS848). If other commands have been received, for example, if a variation pattern command or a display result designation command has been received, the process proceeds to step 012 IWS849.

At step 012IWS849, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b sets a temporary storage flag (step 012IWS849). Also, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b sets a value corresponding to 100 ms to the temporary storage timer (step 012IWS844).

In addition, when the temporary storage flag is set at step 012IWS849, the power supply to the game machine is stopped or the system reset of the second effect control CPU 012IW120b is maintained. Then, when the effect control main process shown in FIG. 8-18 is started due to power-on to the game machine, system reset, etc., it is reset by the initialization process of step 012 IWS201.

FIG. 8-42 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the recording timing of the log information of the date and time of power failure. As shown in FIG. 8-42, the 2nd production control CPU012IW120B is determined to be Y in the step 012IWS841 for the electrical disconnection and time recording process if the CPU012IW120B for the second production control is running, and the process of step 012IWS842 to S844 is executed. , Date and time information is temporarily memorized in the temporary region of RAM012IW122B for every 100 ms.

Next, when the power supply to the game machine is stopped or the system reset of the second effect control CPU 012IW120b occurs, the initialization process (see step 012IWS201) is executed and the temporary storage enable flag is reset. , RAM 012IW 122b, the last stored date and time information is maintained in the temporary area.

If the power supply to the game machine is stopped and then the power supply to the game machine is started, at least the initialization designation command or the recovery command should be received. Therefore, in this example, as shown in FIG. 8-42 (1), as shown in FIG. 8-42 (1), read the date and time of the date and time maintained in the temporary area, based on the condition that the initialization designated command or the command at the time of recovery is received, and the date and time of the read date and time are backup memory board 0999IW14 backup data memory 099IW2. Remember log information in the log area provided in 10a to 210d (see step 012IWS845 Y, step 012IWS847). After that, the temporary storage enable flag is set, and the temporary storage of date and time information every 100 ms is resumed (see steps 012IWS849 and S850). However, in this example, the log information of the date and time of power-on is also recorded (see step 012 IWS 203), but if the log information of the date and time of power-on before the occurrence of power failure is not recorded, there is a possibility that some abnormality has occurred, so in this case, the log information of the date and time of power failure is not recorded (see N of step 012 IWS846).

On the other hand, if the system reset of the second effect control CPU 012IW120b occurs, the power supply to the game machine itself is not stopped, and the game control microcomputer 100 does not transmit power-on commands such as initialization designation commands and recovery commands. Therefore, in this example, as shown in FIG. 8-42 (2), when the command for specifying initialization or the command for restoration is not received, it is determined that the power failure of the game machine itself has not occurred, and the date and time information maintained in the temporary area is controlled so as not to record the log information as the date and time of power failure. In this case, as shown in FIG. 8-42 (2), based on the reception of other commands (except for commands transmitted when the power is turned on, such as the setting confirmation command and the setting change command), for example, based on the reception of the fluctuation pattern command and the display result designation command, the temporary storage enable flag is set, and the temporary storage of the date and time information every 100 ms is resumed (steps 012 IWS849, S850).

If it is configured to record the log information of the power failure date and time only based on the detection of the stop of the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b side, when the system reset of the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b occurs (when the power supply of the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b is temporarily stopped due to the system reset of the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b). log information is recorded, and the log information of the date and time of the power failure may be recorded even though the power failure of the gaming machine itself has not occurred. Therefore, in this example, as shown in FIG. 8-42, the date and time when the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b is stopped is temporarily stored as a temporary power failure date and time, and the log information of the power failure date and time is officially recorded on the condition that a power-on command such as an initialization designation command or a command at the time of restoration is received. This prevents such a situation from occurring.

In this example, it is determined that power failure of the game machine itself has occurred on the condition that an initialization designation command or a command for restoration has been received, and the date and time of power failure is recorded in the log information, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, the date and time of the power failure may be recorded in the log information based on the reception of other commands, such as a setting confirmation command and a setting change command, which are transmitted when the power is turned on. Further, in the process of step 099IWS001 of the effect control main process, it may be determined that the game machine itself has been cut off based on the fact that the power cutoff signal is input from the power monitor circuit 099IW127.

Next, a specific example of the display screen during maintenance mode will be described. 8-45 to 8-48 are explanatory diagrams for explaining specific examples of display screens during the maintenance mode. In FIGS. 8-45 to 8-48, the display screen transitions in the order of (A), (B), (C), . . .

First, with reference to FIGS. 8-45 and 8-46, a specific example of a display screen when a maintenance history selection operation is performed during maintenance mode will be described. When a setting confirmation command is received when the power supply to the game machine is started, as shown in FIG. In addition, as shown in FIG. 8-45(A), when the setting confirmation display is being displayed, the image display device 5 displays a character display such as "press the push button to shift to maintenance mode", and displays a display prompting an operation to shift to maintenance mode.

Next, when the player presses the push button 31B, the maintenance mode menu screen is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 8-45(B), and the maintenance mode is entered (see steps 012IWS456-S458). As shown in FIG. 8-45(B), the maintenance mode menu screen displays options of "maintenance history", "setting change/confirmation history", and "current time setting", as well as the current time.

When the “maintenance history” option 012IW106 is selected, the image display device 5 switches to display the maintenance history screen as shown in FIG. 8-45(C). As shown in FIG. 8-45(C), on the maintenance history screen, date and time and log contents are displayed in association with each other, and the latest log information is displayed in order from the top. In the example shown in FIG. 8-45(C), log information of an illegal winning error indicating that an illegal winning to a winning opening such as the first and second big winning openings has been detected, a switch abnormality error indicating that an abnormality of various switches such as the first count switch 012IW023a and the second count switch 012IW023b has been detected, a prize ball error indicating that a prize abnormality has been detected, and a magnet error indicating that an abnormal magnetism has been detected are displayed. In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 8-45(C), the log information to the effect that probability variation is not established is also displayed (see steps 012 IWS958 to S960).

Also, if the maintenance history screen has a plurality of pages, performing the selection operation for the next page will shift to the second page of the maintenance history screen, as shown in FIG. 8-45(D). In the example shown in FIG. 8-45(D), log information of the start and end of setting change (see steps 012IWS802 and S811) and log information of power failure date and time and power-on date and time are displayed (see steps 012IWS203 and S847). In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 8-45(D), the log information of left driving notification and full tank notification are also displayed (see steps 012 IWS117 and S145).

Further, if there is a further next page, when the next page is selected, the maintenance history screen moves to the third page as shown in FIG. 8-46 (E), and when the next page is selected, the maintenance history screen moves to the fourth page as shown in FIG. 8-46 (F). In the example shown in FIG. 8-46(E), log information indicating the start and end of setting confirmation is displayed (see steps 012 IWS805 and S815), and log information indicating that the current time was set during the maintenance mode during setting confirmation is also displayed (see step 012 IWS835).

In this example, when the current time is set, the date and time information after setting is read and the log information is recorded. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 8-46(E) , the setting confirmation was started at 09:36:28 on Wednesday, March 21, 2018, whereas the current time was set at 09:36:16 on Wednesday, March 21, 2018, which is earlier than the start of the setting confirmation. Thus, in this example, even if the date and time do not match before and after setting the current time, the log information is recorded in the log area in the order in which it was generated, and as shown in FIG. 8-46 (E), the log information is displayed in the order in which it was generated.

Also, in the example shown in FIG. 8-46(F), log information of an RWM abnormality error (see steps 012IWS017 to S020) indicating that some kind of RAM abnormality has occurred when the gaming machine is powered on is displayed. Then, since the RWM abnormal error occurred, the game clerk once stopped the power supply to the game machine and then turned on the power again while turning on the clear switch, and as shown in FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 8-47, a specific example of a display screen when a setting change/confirmation history selection operation is performed during the maintenance mode will be described. 8-47(A), the maintenance mode menu screen shown in FIG. 8-47(B) is displayed by pressing the push button 31B while the setting confirmation display shown in FIG.

When the option 012IW107 of "setting change/confirmation history" is selected, display of the setting change/confirmation history screen is switched on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 8-47(C). As shown in FIG. 8-47(C), on the setting change/confirmation history screen, the date and time, whether it is a setting change or a setting confirmation, and the setting value after change or the setting value that has been confirmed are displayed in association with each other, and the latest log information is displayed in order.

Next, with reference to FIG. 8-48, a specific example of the display screen when the current time setting selection operation is performed during the maintenance mode will be described. 8-48(A), the player presses the push button 31B to display the maintenance mode menu screen shown in FIG. 8-48(B), and the option 012IW108 of "current time setting" is selected and operated while the maintenance mode menu screen is displayed.

When the option 012IW108 of "current time setting" is selected, the display is switched to the current time setting screen on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 8-48(C). As shown in FIGS. 8-48(C) and 8-48(D), tilting the stick controller 31A left and right selects items of year, month, day, day of the week, hour, minute, or second, and tilting the stick controller 31A back and forth selects a number for each item. For example, to change the hour from 16 to 15 in the state shown in FIG. 8-48(C), the stick controller 31A is tilted four times to the right to move to the hour item, and the stick controller 31A is tilted forward (toward the player) once to change from "16" to "15". Then, as shown in FIG. 8-48(D), when the player presses the push button 31B, the current date and time is set to the date and time currently being displayed.

In this characterizing part 099IW, the character performance and the light guide plate performance are executed in a manner in which it is difficult to recognize the suggesting performance during the big win. That is, the error display is displayed with priority over the suggesting effect during the big hit (or the suggesting effect before the game or the suggesting effect during the game). With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately notify the occurrence of an error. In addition, a predetermined performance (for example, a specific mode of performance among fanfare performances) that can be executed simultaneously with the performance suggesting during the big win is provided, and when the predetermined performance is in a mode that makes it difficult to recognize the performance suggesting during the big win, priority may be given to the performance suggesting during the big win. Specifically, when the image displayed on the image display device 5 by the predetermined performance is in a mode that makes it difficult to recognize the image displayed by the suggestive performance during the big win, the image displayed by the suggestive performance during the big win may be preferentially displayed. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it easier to recognize the suggestive effect during the big hit.

In addition, in this characteristic part 099IW, the decorative pattern is variably displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, but the decorative pattern may be variably displayed by driving a drum-shaped movable body on which the decorative pattern is arranged (that is, it may be applied to a so-called drum-type game machine). Alternatively, by driving a belt-shaped movable body having a decorative pattern on its surface, the decorative pattern may be variably displayed (that is, it may be applied to a so-called belt reel type game machine). In such a drum-type or belt-reel type game machine, the drum-shaped or belt-shaped movable body may perform a characteristic operation different from the normal operation (or a characteristic operation may occur) when the initial fluctuation starts after the setting is changed. Therefore, in the initial variation after the setting change, a light guide plate rendering that makes the movable body difficult to see at the start of variation may be executed (or the execution ratio may be increased). With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the setting has been changed.

Further, in the present characteristic part 099IW, the character object effect and the light guide plate effect are configured to reduce the visibility of the suggestive effect during the big hit, but instead of or in addition to such a structure, for example, by executing the character object effect and the light guide plate effect, the visibility of the initial eye effect effect, the pre-game suggestive effect, and the during-game suggestive effect may be reduced. Also in this case, visibility may be lowered at a high rate when an undesirable suggestion is given to the player. For example, when an even number initial outcome is displayed, when the pre-game suggestive performance of the first performance mode is executed, and when the suggestive performance of the first performance mode during the game is executed, the performance of the character object in which the movable member operates or the light guide plate performance of displaying characters or pictures by the light guide plate may be increased so as to reduce the visibility of these. In addition, not only the effect of the role object and the light guide plate, but also the control of outputting a predetermined sound, the control of vibrating the movable member and the stick controller 31A, and the control of emitting light from a decorative light emitting body such as a decorative LED in a predetermined manner may be performed, thereby reducing the visibility (or making it difficult to notice) of the initial appearance effect, the pre-game suggestion effect, and the during-game suggestion effect by directing the player's attention to others.

Further, in addition to the setting suggesting effect of the characteristic part 099IW, the setting may be suggested by executing a simultaneous effect in a specific manner based on the measurement result (measurement result using the measurement timer set when the power is turned on or the real time clock 012IW126).

In addition, depending on the number of times the variable display is performed continuously without the reserved memory becoming 0 or the number of times the starting winning exceeding the upper limit reserved memory number occurs, a setting suggesting performance (for example, display control of a predetermined image, output control of a predetermined sound, light emission control of a predetermined lamp, etc.) may be executed.

In addition, based on detection of operation of the stick controller 31A or push button 31B during a predetermined operation effective period, a setting suggestion effect (for example, display control of a predetermined image, output control of a predetermined sound, light emission control of a predetermined lamp, etc.) may be executed.

The characteristic portion 099IW has been described above with reference to the drawings, but the specific configuration is not limited to that shown in this example, and any changes or additions within the scope of the present invention are included in the present invention.

(Modification 1)
For example, the characteristic portion 099IW exemplifies a form in which the security cover 012IW500A is fixed to the outer frame 012IW001a, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the security cover may be provided on the gaming machine frame 012IW003 side. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8-49(A) and 8-49(B) as Modified Example 1, a security cover 012IW500B comprising a short piece 012IW500Ba and a long piece 012IW500Bb is attached to the board case 012IW201. 01 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction between a covering position covering the right side of the body 01 and a covering uncovering position on the right side of the covering position.

On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is opened, the security cover 012IW500B is slid to the right with respect to the board case 012IW201, so that the setting key 012IW051 can be operated through the through hole 012IW500Bc formed on the left side of the long piece 012IW500Bb. That is, in the present modification 1, when the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is closed, the security cover 012IW500B (long piece 012IW500Bb) covers the setting key 012IW051, and the horizontal sliding movement of the board case 012IW201 is restricted, thereby maintaining the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the restricted state. On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is open, the security cover 012IW500B is slid to the right with respect to the board case 012IW201 to release the covering state of the setting key 012IW051, whereby the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be brought into a state in which the restricted state can be released (changed to a permitted state).

More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8-49(A) and 8-49(B), when the game machine frame 012IW003 is closed, the security cover 012IW500B protrudes from the board case 012IW201 with a length L1, while when the game machine frame 012IW003 is opened, the security cover 012IW500B is attached to the board case 012IW201. By sliding, the projection dimension of the security cover 012IW500B from the board case 012IW201 is extended to length L2 (L2>L1).

In other words, as shown in FIG. 8-50(A), when the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is rotated about a predetermined rotation axis and opened, the security cover 012IW500B is slid with respect to the substrate case 012IW500B until the projected dimension from the substrate case 012IW201 reaches the length L2 (putting the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the allowable state). By operating 1, the setting value of the pachinko game machine 1 can be changed. On the other hand, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the allowable state, as shown in FIG. 8-50(B), the security cover 012IW500B must be slid relative to the board case 012IW201 until the length L1 protrudes from the board case 012IW201 (unless the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed to the restricted state). , and it is impossible to close the gaming machine frame 012IW003.

Therefore, in Modification 1, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine frame 012IW003 from being closed while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the permissive state, so that the security cover 012IW500B can be prevented from forgetting to cover the setting key 012IW051, that is, the gaming machine frame 012IW003 can be prevented from being closed without restricting the operation of the operation unit, thereby improving security.

When the game machine frame 012IW003 is closed, the front end of the short piece 012IW500Ba is arranged between the outer frame 012IW001a and the game machine frame 012IW003, thereby restricting movement in the horizontal direction from the covering position. 2IW 500B may be moved in the horizontal direction.

(Modification 2)
Furthermore, as a form in which the security cover is provided on the side of the game machine frame 012IW003, as shown in FIGS. 8-51(A) and 8-51(B), as a modification 2, the left end of the security cover 012IW500C is centered on the vertical axis 012IW500Cd provided on the back side of the game machine frame 012IW003. It may be rotatably pivoted between a covering position covering the right side of the 012IW 201 and a covering release position rotated from the covering position. In such a case, when the game machine frame 012IW003 is closed, the front end of the short piece 012IW500Ca is locked by the locking portion 012IW500Cc provided on the right side of the outer frame 012IW001a, and the long piece 012IW500Cb covering the setting key 012IW051 from the back side is restricted from rotating to the back side.

When the game machine frame 012IW003 is opened, the security cover 012IW500C is rotated around the pivot 012IW500Cd (counterclockwise in plan view) with respect to the board case 012IW201 to release the cover of the setting key 012IW051 and make it operable. That is, in the present modification 2, when the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is closed, the security cover 012IW500C (long piece 012IW500Cb) covers the setting key 012IW051 and restricts rotation, thereby maintaining the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the restricted state. On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 012IW003 is open, the security cover 012IW500C is rotated with respect to the board case 012IW201 around the pivot 012IW500Cd (counterclockwise in plan view) to release the covering of the setting key 012IW051, whereby the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be released from the restricted state (changed to the permitted state).

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-52(A), the security cover 012IW500C in Modification 2 rotates around the pivot 012IW500Cd (puts the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the permissible state), so that the setting values of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed by the game hall clerk or the like operating the setting key 012IW051. On the other hand, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the allowable state, as shown in FIG. 8-52(B), the security cover 012IW500C must be rotated clockwise in a plan view to cover the setting key 012IW051 (unless the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed to the restricted state), and the security cover 012IW500C is positioned in front of the outer frame 012IW001a. It abuts against the edge, making it impossible to close the gaming machine frame 012IW003.

Therefore, in Modification 2, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine frame 012IW003 from being closed while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the permissive state, so that the security cover 012IW500C can be prevented from forgetting to cover the setting key 012IW051, that is, the gaming machine frame 012IW003 can be prevented from being closed without restricting the operation of the operation unit, thereby improving security.

(Modification 3)
In addition, in the characteristic part 099IW, the setting value of the pachinko game machine 1 can be changed by opening the game machine frame 012IW003, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the setting value of the pachinko game machine 1 may be changed by opening the glass door frame 012IW003a. In addition, when the setting value of the pachinko game machine 1 can be changed by opening the glass door frame 012IW003a in this way, as shown in FIGS. It should be possible. In this case, the IC mounting surface of the main board 11 is arranged facing the back side of the pachinko game machine 1, and the setting key 012IW051 is arranged on the surface of the main board 11 opposite to the mounting surface.

When the setting key 012IW051 can be operated through the through hole 012IW003b in this manner, a door 012IW003c capable of opening and closing the through hole 012IW003b is provided, and the operation of the setting key 012IW051 is restricted when the door 012IW003c is closed. As shown in FIGS. 8-53(B) and 8-53(C), when the door 012IW003c is provided on the front side of the game machine frame 012IW003, the door 012IW003c can be sandwiched between the glass door frame 012IW003a and the game machine frame 012IW003 by closing the glass door frame 012IW003a. Therefore, it is possible to strongly prevent unauthorized operation of the setting key 012IW051 when the glass door frame 012IW003a is closed, thereby improving security.

(Modification 4)
Information that can be recorded as log information is not limited to the information shown in this characteristic portion 099IW, and various log information can be recorded. FIG. 8-54 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the maintenance history screen in Modification 4. As shown in FIG. Modification 4 shows a case where information indicating unsuccessful setting suggestion or "unsuccessful point provision" is recorded as log information and configured to be displayed on the maintenance history screen. The log information 012IW109a of ``unsuccessful setting suggestion'' is log information indicating that the setting value suggestion performance was not executed or the setting value suggestion performance with low suggestion accuracy was executed for reasons such as the player's failure to perform an operation or the failure of the operating means, although the conditions for execution of the setting value suggestion performance suggesting the current set value were met. The log information 012IW109b of "unsuccessful in giving points" is log information indicating that points were not given due to reasons such as the player not performing an operation or the operating means malfunctioning, even though the conditions for giving points necessary for customizing the display screen of the image display device 5 and obtaining image contents were satisfied. In this way, it may be configured such that it is possible to provide benefits related to presentation or benefits related to content in some form, and log information thereof is recorded.

(Modification 5)
Information that can be recorded as log information is not limited to the information shown in this characteristic portion 099IW, and various log information can be recorded. FIG. 8-55 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the maintenance history screen in Modification 5. As shown in FIG. In modification 5, the case where the log information 099IW109 indicating that the system reset of the second effect control CPU012IW120b or the like has occurred is configured to be displayable on the maintenance history screen. In the configuration of this characteristic part 099IW, the log information indicating that the system reset of the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b has occurred is stored only in the second log area, so it is not displayed as history information on the maintenance history screen. etc.) is displayed as history information on the maintenance history screen in the maintenance mode.

Further, for example, in a gaming machine equipped with a sorting device that alternately distributes game balls to the first start prize winning port and the second start prize winning port, based on the detection of a predetermined number (for example, 5) of consecutive winnings in either one of the start winning prize ports, it may be configured to detect as a start opening unit abnormality error, record it in the log information, and display it on the maintenance history screen. Further, for example, a vibration error indicating that an abnormal vibration has been detected in a game machine or a radio wave error indicating that an abnormal radio wave has been detected may be recorded as log information and displayed on the maintenance history screen, and various forms of log information are conceivable.

As described above, according to the present characteristic portion 099IW, the power supply means (for example, the power supply board), the first control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11) that receives power supply from the power supply means and performs control, and the second control means that receives power supply from the power supply means and performs control based on the instruction information from the first control means (for example, the second effect control CPU012IW mounted on the second effect control board 012IW12b. 120b) and monitoring means for monitoring the power supplied to the second control means and notifying the second control means (for example, the power supply monitoring circuit 099IW127 for monitoring the power supplied to the second effect control board 012IW12b and for the second effect control CPU 012IW120b when the power supply voltage is less than a predetermined value (for example, +8V)), and the second control means receives a notification from the monitoring means at the start of control. (For example, if the power off signal is input from the power monitoring circuit 099IW127 at the start of control, the start of control waits until the input of the power off signal stops. The second effect control CPU 012IW120b executes the processing of steps 099IWS001 and 099IWS002. On the other hand, when the power off signal is not input from the power monitoring circuit 099IW127 at the start of control In, without waiting for the start of control, log information including the acquired date and time information as the system reset date and time of the second effect control board 012IW12b is stored in the log area.Second effect control CPU 012IW 120b executes the processing of steps 099IWS001 and 099IWS003). With such a configuration, optimal processing can be executed depending on the situation.

Further, according to the present characteristic portion 099IW, power supply means (for example, power supply board), first control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11) that receives power supply from the power supply means and performs the first control, and second control means that receives power supply from the power supply means and performs the second control (for example, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b mounted on the second effect control board 012IW12b) and the second control means. Monitoring means for monitoring the power supplied and notifying the second control means (e.g., monitoring the power supplied to the second effect control board 012IW12b, and when the power supply voltage is less than a predetermined value (e.g., +8V), the second effect control CPU012IW120b). , setting confirmation command, initialization command, etc.) to the second control means, and when the second control means is notified by the monitoring means that the power supply voltage of the supplied power has changed from less than the predetermined value to the predetermined value or more at the start of control, the second control means specifies that at least the first control means and the second control means have restarted, and starts the second control based on the instruction information from the first control means (for example, when the power off signal is input from the power monitoring circuit 099IW127 at the start of control). In the case, after waiting for the start of control until the input of the power-off signal stops, the process is executed based on the command at the time of power-on such as setting change command, setting confirmation command, initialization command, etc. The second effect control CPU012IW120b is step 099IWS001, 099IWS002, 099IWS204, 012IWS802, 012IWS805, 012IWS8. 09), at the start of control, when the monitoring means notifies that the power supply voltage of the supplied power supply is equal to or higher than a predetermined value, it specifies that only the second control means has restarted, and starts the second control (for example, if a power-off signal is not input from the power monitoring circuit 099IW127 at the start of control, log information including the acquired date and time information as the system reset date and time of the second effect control board 012IW12b is stored in the log area without waiting for the start of control. A portion where the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b executes the processing of steps 099IWS001 and 099IWS003). With such a configuration, optimum processing can be executed depending on the situation.

In addition, according to this characteristic portion 099IW, power supply means (for example, power supply board), first control means (for example, game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11) that receives power supply from the power supply means and performs control, and second control means that receives power supply from the power supply means and performs control based on instruction information from the first control means (for example, second effect control CPU012IW120b mounted on the second effect control board 012IW12b) And, monitoring means for monitoring the power supplied to the second control means and notifying the second control means (e.g., monitoring the power supplied to the second effect control board 012IW12b, and when the power supply voltage is less than a predetermined value (e.g., +8V), a power supply monitoring circuit 099IW127 for outputting a power-off signal to the second effect control CPU012IW120b), and the second control means is provided with a second control means in response to a notification from the monitoring means at the start of control. (For example, by displaying different initial images when it is determined that the system reset of the second effect control CPU 012IW120b has occurred and when the power failure of the game machine itself has occurred, the start history can be recognized. In addition, log information 099IW109 indicating that the system reset of the second effect control CPU 012IW120b has occurred can be displayed on the maintenance history screen (Fig. 8- 55).Also, the log information recorded in the second log area is read by connecting an inspection device to the pachinko game machine 1 and inputting and outputting an inspection signal between the inspection device and the second effect control CPU 012IW120b of the second effect control board 012IW12b). With such a configuration, it is possible to check the status when the power is turned on, and to execute optimum processing according to the status.

In addition, the above-mentioned "first control means" and "second control means" are not limited to the combination of the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 and the second effect control CPU012IW120b mounted on the second effect control board 012IW12b, and the second effect control CPU012IW120b and the first effect control board 012IW12 mounted on the second effect control board 012IW12b. The configuration of this characteristic portion 099IW can also be applied to the combination with the first effect control CPU 012IW 120a mounted in a. In this case, a power supply monitoring circuit that monitors the power supplied to the first effect control board 012IW12a and outputs a power off signal to the first effect control board 012IW12a when the power supply voltage is less than a predetermined value (eg, +8V) may be provided. With such a configuration, it is possible to start the processing after the power is stably supplied to the first performance control board 012IW12a, and it is possible to specify the occurrence of system reset in the first performance control board 012IW12a when the power is turned on, so that the optimum processing can be executed according to the situation.

In this characteristic portion 099IW, as shown in FIG. 8-2, the first effect control board 012IW12a and the second effect control board 012IW12b are mounted instead of the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. In this case, a power monitor circuit for monitoring the power supplied to the performance control board 12 and outputting a power cutoff signal to the performance control board 12 when the power supply voltage is less than a predetermined value (for example, +8V) may be provided. With such a configuration, processing can be started after the power is stably supplied to the first performance control board 12, and occurrence of system reset or the like can be specified in the performance control board 12 when the power is turned on, and optimum processing can be executed according to the situation.

In addition, according to this characteristic portion 099IW, the second control means does not start control until the monitoring means notifies that the power supply voltage of the supplied power supply is a predetermined value (for example, +8V) or higher (for example, until the power supply monitoring circuit 099IW127 stops inputting the power-off signal) (for example, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b executes steps 099IWS001 and 099IWS002). . With such a configuration, optimal processing can be executed depending on the situation.

In addition, according to this characteristic part 099IW, it is provided with storage means (for example, backup data memories 099IW210A to 210D of the backup memory board 099IW14) that can retain the stored contents even if the power supply to the game machine is stopped, and the second control means is notified by the monitoring means that the power supply voltage of the supplied power supply has changed from less than a predetermined value to a predetermined value or more at the start of control (for example, a power supply disconnection signal from the power supply monitoring circuit 099IW127 at the start of control). is input, and then the input of the power-off signal is stopped), based on the instruction information from the first control means, predetermined information (for example, power-on date and time, setting change start date and time, setting confirmation start date and time, RAM clear date and time, etc.) WS809, etc.), at the start of control, when the monitoring means notifies that the power supply voltage of the supplied power supply is equal to or higher than a predetermined value, the predetermined image is displayed on the display means, and the predetermined information is not stored in the storage means (for example, when the system reset of the second effect control board 012IW12b occurs, the initial image is displayed on the image display device 5, but the processing of step 099IWS204 is not executed, and the setting change command, setting confirmation command, and initialization designation are performed. It also does not receive power-on commands, such as commands, so it does not store log information about them). With such a configuration, optimal processing can be executed depending on the situation.

Further, according to the characteristic part 099IW, the storage means includes a first storage means (e.g., a first log area for recording log information for amusement arcades) and a second storage means (e.g., a second log area for recording log information for game machine manufacturers), and the second control means, at the start of control, when notified by the monitoring means that the power supply voltage of the supplied power supply has changed from less than a predetermined value to not less than the predetermined value, gives predetermined information regarding startup based on instruction information from the first control means. is stored in the first storage means (for example, the part where the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b executes the processing of step 099IWS204, step 012IWS802, step 012IWS805, step 012IWS809, etc.), and when the monitoring means notifies that the power supply voltage of the supplied power supply is equal to or higher than a predetermined value at the start of control, specific information that can specify that only the second control means has restarted ( For example, log information including the system reset date and time) is stored in the second storage means (for example, the part where the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b executes the process of N of step 099IWS001 and step 099IWS003). With such a configuration, optimum processing can be executed depending on the situation.

Further, according to the present characteristic part 099IW, the second control means can execute a first backup process for storing control-related information in the first storage means (for example, a backup process for storing log information in the first log area) and a second backup process for storing control-related information in the second storage means (for example, a backup process for storing log information in the second log area). (see, eg, FIGS. 8-19). With such a configuration, optimal processing can be executed depending on the situation.

Further, according to the characteristic portion 099IW, it is possible to set one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value "1" to setting value "3") having different advantages for the player. In addition, a storage area (for example, RAM 102) capable of storing information generated during a game is provided, and history information (for example, log information) of abnormalities related to the game can be displayed in a identifiable manner. An initialization process (for example, RAM clear 1) for initializing the contents of the storage area can be executed, and when the initialization process is executed, a setting change process (for example, setting change process) for changing the setting value can be executed. In addition, when the initialization process is executed but the setting change process is not executed, it is possible to identifiably display that the initialization process has been executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-46 (E), the log information of RAM clearing is displayed). Only log information indicating the end of setting change is displayed). Therefore, since unnecessary information is not displayed, it is possible to prevent history information from becoming difficult to check. That is, in this example, when the setting change process is executed, it is assumed that the initialization process is executed. However, if the log information of the setting change is displayed, it is obvious that the initialization process has been executed. Therefore, it is redundant to record and display the log information of the initialization process. Therefore, by not recording or displaying unnecessary log information of initialization processing, unnecessary recording of log information is prevented, and on the contrary, it is prevented that history information becomes difficult to check.

In addition, according to the present characteristic part 099IW, it is possible to execute setting confirmation processing (for example, setting confirmation processing) for confirming setting values, and history information can be displayed in a identifiable manner based on the detection of the player's action during execution of the setting confirmation processing (for example, as shown in FIGS. 8-45 to 8-48, the maintenance mode menu screen is displayed based on the push button 31B being pressed while the setting confirmation display is being displayed). Therefore, it is possible to suitably check the history information.

Further, according to the present characterizing portion 099IW, game control means (for example, game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103)) for controlling the game, and production control means (for example, second production control CPU 012IW 120b) for controlling production based on information from the game control means. In addition, the game control means can output initialization information (for example, an initialization designation command) indicating that the initialization process has been performed, and can output setting change information (for example, a setting change command) indicating that the setting change process is to be performed. In addition, the effect control means can identifiably display different history information depending on whether the initialization information and the setting change information are output (for example, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b receives the initialization designation command and the setting change command, records the log information of the end of the setting change, and displays it on the maintenance history screen as shown in FIG. 8-45 (D)). Therefore, it is possible to suitably check the history information.

In addition, according to the present characteristic part 099IW, it is possible to detect a predetermined abnormality (for example, a left-handed notification state), and history storage means capable of storing history information (for example, backup data memory 099IW of the backup memory board 099IW14). In addition, it is possible to detect a first abnormal state (e.g., first left-handed notification state) indicating that a predetermined abnormality has a predetermined importance and a second abnormal state (e.g., second left-handed notification state) indicating that the predetermined abnormality is more important than the first abnormal state. Information indicating that the first abnormal state has been detected is not stored as history information, and information indicating that the second abnormal state has been detected can be stored as history information (e.g., if the second left-handed notification state has occurred. log information only when Therefore, history information can be preferably stored.

Further, according to the characteristic portion 099IW, it is possible to detect a first abnormality (eg, first left-handed alert state) and a second abnormality (eg, second left-handed alert state) having a higher degree of importance than the first abnormality. In addition, a history storage means capable of storing history information of abnormalities related to the game (for example, a log area provided in the backup data memories 099IW210A to 210D of the backup memory board 099IW14 and a log area of the RAM 012IW122b) is provided, and the history information stored by the history storage means can be displayed in a identifiable manner (for example, as shown in FIGS. When the second abnormality is detected, information indicating that the second abnormality has been detected is stored as history information, while information indicating that the first abnormality has been detected when the abnormality detection means detects the first abnormality is not stored as history information (for example, log information is recorded only when the second left-handed notification state occurs, and log information is not recorded even when the first left-handed notification state occurs). Therefore, history information can be preferably stored and displayed. That is, since the storage capacity of log information is also limited, if it is recorded as the first pre-abnormality log information with low importance, the history of necessary abnormalities may disappear early. However, in this example, only the second or higher importance with high importance is recorded, so the history information can be preferably stored and displayed.

Further, according to the characteristic portion 099IW, the second abnormality is detected according to the detection result of the first abnormality per unit period (for example, the execution condition for the second left-handed notification is satisfied based on the fact that two first left-handed notification execution conditions are satisfied). Therefore, history information can be preferably stored and displayed.

In this example, a case is shown in which the execution condition for the second hitting-to-left notification is satisfied according to the number of times the execution condition for the first hitting-to-left notification is satisfied, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, based on the fact that the execution condition for the first hitting left notification continues for a predetermined period, it may be determined that the execution condition for the second hitting left notification is established and the second hitting left notification may be executed.

Further, according to this characteristic portion 099IW, it is possible to notify that the first abnormality is detected and that the second abnormality is detected (for example, execute the first left hitting notification and the second left hitting notification). In this case, the detection of the first abnormality can be notified in a predetermined manner, and the detection of the second abnormality can be notified in a manner different from the predetermined manner (for example, in the first left-handed notification, only the left-handed notification display is performed, and in the second left-handed notification, all the game effect lamps 9 are lit and the notification sound is output in addition to the left-handed notification display). Therefore, it is possible to appropriately notify the abnormality.

In addition, according to this characteristic portion 099IW, it is possible to detect a plurality of types of first abnormality and second abnormality (for example, in addition to the first left-handed notification state and the second left-handed notification state, the first full tank notification state and the second full tank notification state are detected). Also, the first abnormality and the second abnormality are detected by different detection conditions for each type of the first abnormality and the second abnormality (for example, the first left-handed notification state and the second left-handed notification state are determined by detecting the game ball passing through the passage gate 012IW041 five or ten times. ). Therefore, history information can be preferably stored and displayed.

In addition, in this example, the case where the full-tank notification is executed in addition to the left-handed notification is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, it is configured to execute abnormal prize winning notification, magnet error notification, ball clogging error notification, etc., and there are a first notification with low importance and a second notification with high importance, and it may be configured to record log information only when executing the second notification and display it on the maintenance history screen.

In addition, according to this characteristic portion 099IW, predetermined control means (for example, game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU103), and specific control means (for example, second effect control CPU012IW120b) that performs control based on information from the predetermined control means.In addition, the specific control means can temporarily store the date and time when the power supply to the specific control means is stopped (for example, every 100 ms RAM012IW122 The date and time information is stored in the temporary area b), and when the power supply to the specific control means is started, the temporarily stored date and time can be stored as the power failure date and time based on the input of the information (for example, initialization designation command, command at the time of restoration) that can specify that the power supply has started by the predetermined control means (for example, the log information is stored as the power failure date and time in the log area).Therefore, the power failure date and time can be preferably stored. Even when the system reset of the second effect control CPU 012IW120b or the like occurs, it is possible to prevent the situation from being recorded as the date and time of power failure, and to suitably store the date and time of power failure.

Further, according to this characteristic part 099IW, when the power supply to the specific control means is started, if the information that can specify the start of the power supply cannot be input, the temporarily stored date and time is not stored as the power failure date and time (for example, if the initialization designation command or the command at the time of restoration is not received, the log information is not stored in the log area as the power failure date and time). Therefore, the date and time of power failure can be preferably stored.

Further, according to the characteristic part 099IW, the date and time can be temporarily stored at predetermined timing (for example, 100 ms) (for example, the date and time information is stored in the temporary area of the RAM 012IW 122b). Therefore, the date and time of power failure can be preferably stored.

Although this example shows the case where the date and time information is temporarily stored every 100 ms, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, only when the stop of the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b is detected, the current date and time information may be temporarily stored and stored as temporary power failure date and time.

Further, according to the characteristic part 099IW, the temporary storage of the date and time is stopped at each predetermined timing based on the stop of the power supply to the specific control means (for example, the temporary storage enable flag is reset, and the temporary storage of the date and time information is not executed every 100 ms). Then, based on the input of predetermined information output by the predetermined control means (for example, an initialization designation command, a command at the time of recovery, and other commands), the temporary storage of the date and time is restarted at each predetermined timing (for example, a temporary storage enable flag is set, and the temporary storage of the date and time information every 100 ms is restarted). Therefore, the date and time of power failure can be preferably stored.

Further, according to the characteristic portion 099IW, the specific control means can store the date and time when power supply to the specific control means is started (for example, the power-on date and time are recorded as log information). When the date and time when the power supply is started is not stored, the temporarily stored date and time is not stored as the date and time of power failure (for example, when the log information of the power-on date and time before the occurrence of the power failure is not recorded, the log information of the date and time of power failure is not recorded). Therefore, it is possible to prevent an abnormal storage state. In other words, since there is no record of power-on of the gaming machine, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of an abnormal state in which the date and time of power failure are recorded.

Further, according to the present characteristic part 099IW, the first control means (for example, the first effect control CPU012IW120a), and the second control means (for example, the second effect control CPU012IW120b) for performing control based on the information from the first control means. Further, the first control means sequentially outputs a plurality of pieces of information relating to the change of date and time to the second control means over a predetermined period of time (for example, the hour signal, minute signal, second signal, year signal, month signal, date signal, and day of the week signal are sequentially transmitted) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (e.g., lapse of 10 ms). In addition, the second control means stores the change history of the date and time after a specific period of time, which is equal to or longer than a predetermined period, has elapsed since part of the information regarding the change of the date and time was input (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-40, wait until 500 ms has passed since the time signal was received, and then record it in the log information as the time setting date and time). Therefore, the date and time change history can be preferably stored.

In addition, according to the present characteristic part 099IW, the second control means changes the internal date and time information each time the information on changing the date and time is input (for example, immediately sets the information of the real-time clock 012IW 126 based on the received hour signal, minute signal, second signal, year signal, month signal, date signal, or day of the week signal, as shown in FIG. 8-40). Therefore, the date and time change history can be preferably stored.

Further, according to the characteristic part 099IW, when the second control means inputs information regarding date and time change multiple times before the specific period elapses, the second control means stores the date and time change history based on the last input information regarding date and time change. based on the date and time information of the time setting date and time log information is recorded). Therefore, the date and time change history can be preferably stored.

Further, according to the present characteristic portion 099IW, the second control means can display the date and time change history (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-46 (E), the maintenance history screen displays log information indicating that the current time has been set). In addition, according to the changed date and time, the date and time change history is stored and displayed (for example, the date and time information is read from the set real-time clock 012IW 126 and the log information is recorded as the time setting date and time). Therefore, the date and time change history can be preferably stored.

In addition, according to this characteristic portion 099IW, the second control means stores the history information according to the order in which the game-related abnormality occurred, regardless of the date and time change (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-46 (E), even if the date and time are not consistent before and after setting the current time, the log information is recorded in the log area in the order in which the log information was generated, and the log information is displayed in the order in which the log information is generated). Therefore, it is possible to preferably store abnormality history information.

In addition, according to the characteristic part 099IW, it is possible to give a profit to the player based on the establishment of a specific condition (for example, that the game ball has won the V prize area in the second special variable prize winning device 012IW007b) (for example, control to the probability variable state after the jackpot game is over). Moreover, the specific condition can be established based on at least the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, the occurrence of a variable probability big hit). Then, when the specific condition is not satisfied even though the predetermined condition is satisfied, it is possible to store specific information (for example, log information of the date and time when the specific condition is not satisfied) that can specify that the specific condition is not satisfied. Therefore, information can be preferably stored. That is, troubles other than errors can also be recorded, and information can be preferably stored.

In addition, according to this characteristic part 099IW, it is possible to give a benefit related to performance or a benefit related to content (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-54, log information 012IW109a of "unsuccessful suggestion of setting" or log information 012IW109b of "unsuccessful point provision" is recorded). Therefore, information can be preferably stored.

In this example, regarding profit, when the V prize is not established and the probability variation is not established, when the setting suggestion is unsuccessful, or when the point award is unsuccessful, the log information is recorded and displayed on the maintenance history screen. However, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, in a game machine configured to perform a role game that shifts to a jackpot game based on the winning of a game ball in a specific area (V winning area) in the role, log information may be recorded and displayed on a maintenance history screen when the game ball does not win the V winning area. Further, for example, it may be configured to record log information and display it on the maintenance history screen when a setting value suggestion effect is executed but a low setting value is suggested. Further, for example, when an image with a low frequency of appearance is expected to be displayed or a sound is not displayed or output in a scene, log information may be recorded and displayed on the maintenance history screen. Further, for example, in the case of application to a slot machine, log information may be recorded and displayed on the maintenance history screen when the pressing order is incorrect while the pressing order navigation is being executed. As such, various aspects of "benefits" are conceivable.

In addition, according to the present characteristic portion 099IW, it is possible to display specific information in a recognizable manner (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-45(C), the maintenance history screen displays the tool information of probability variation failure, or FIG. 8-54. As shown in the maintenance history screen, log information 012IW109a of “unsuccessful setting suggestion” and log information 012IW109b of “unsuccessful point provision” are displayed). Therefore, information can be preferably displayed.

In this example, the log information of unsuccessful setting suggestions, unsuccessful setting suggestions, and unsuccessful point grants are displayed on the maintenance history screen, but the maintenance history screen may be configured not to display them. Also, these log information may be stored in the second log area for recording the log information for the game machine maker, instead of the first log area for recording the log information for the game arcade. Then, the game machine maker may check what kind of trouble has occurred and utilize it for the development of the game machine.

In addition, according to the characteristic portion 099IW, it is possible to output information including specific information as a two-dimensional code (for example, to generate and display a two-dimensional code including log information of probability variation non-establishment date and time). Therefore, information can be preferably output.

In this example, log information is recorded in association with date and time information including both date and time, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, log information may be recorded in association with date information including only year, month and day, or log information may be recorded in association with time information including only hour, minute and second. Various modes are conceivable as a method of recording log information. Similarly, in the present characteristic portion 099IW, "date and time" is not necessarily limited to the case of including both date information and time information, but is a concept including the case of including only date information and the case of including only time information.

In addition, the characteristic portion 099IW includes a second invention described below. That is, conventionally, there is a pachinko game machine that can be set to one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player, for example, disclosed in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902. Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 describes that setting change processing is executed when the power switch is turned on while the front frame is opened and the setting key switch is turned on. Further, it is described that the RAM area other than the setting value storage means is cleared in the setting change process. However, in the gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a possibility that appropriate processing cannot always be performed in a gaming machine configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of set values with different advantages for the player. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a game machine of means 1 of the second invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine that can be set to any one of a plurality of set values (for example, set value "1" to set value "3") with different degrees of advantage for a player,
an operation means (e.g., clear switch) provided to enable execution of initialization processing (e.g., RAM clear 1 processing, RAM clear 2 processing) based on an operation performed when power supply to the gaming machine is started;
specific information storage means (for example, RAM012IW122b) capable of storing specific information (for example, a RAM clear flag) indicating that the operation means has been operated when power supply to the gaming machine is started;
The game machine is characterized by comprising a process executing means (for example, a part for executing steps 012IWS025, S034, and S048 in the game control microcomputer 100) that executes processes using the specific information multiple times when executing a plurality of processes including a set value change process for changing a set value. According to this feature, the game machine can be set to any one of a plurality of set values with different advantages for the player. It is possible to suitably perform the processing in the gaming machine that has been used. In particular, in the process of changing the set value, which takes a certain amount of processing time, the specific information (RAM clear flag in this example) is stored, and the RAM clear flag is confirmed to execute the process, whereby the process can be suitably performed.

In this example, as the processing to be executed "using the specific information multiple times", the processing of transmitting a setting confirmation command or a setting change command is executed in steps 012IWS026 and S207 depending on whether the RAM clear flag is set in step 012IWS025, and the processing of changing the set values in steps 012IWS035 to S042 is executed depending on whether the RAM clear flag is set in step 012IWS034. , and the recovery processing or RAM clear 1 processing of steps 012IWS049 and S051 are executed depending on whether or not the RAM clear flag is set in step 012IWS048, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, depending on whether or not specific information (RAM clear flag) is set, it may be controlled whether or not to validate the operation switch immediately before the operation to change the set value.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 2 of the second invention,
The process execution means changes the set value based on the operation of the operation means in the set value change process (for example, the part that executes steps 012IWS039 to S042 in the game control microcomputer 100)
According to such a configuration, the operating means can also be used, so an increase in cost can be suppressed. That is, in this example, the clear switch can be used as both the operation means for initializing the RAM 102 and the operation means for changing the setting value, so that an increase in cost can be suppressed.

In this example, by using the clear switch as a dual function, it is necessary to check the state of the clear switch multiple times when the game machine is powered on. Therefore, the RAM clear flag is set when the ON state of the clear switch is detected for the first time when the game machine is powered on. By doing so, it is possible to perform processing in a favorable manner.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 3 of the second invention,
An initialization processing executing means (for example, a part that executes steps 012IWS015 and S051 in the game control microcomputer 100) for executing normal initialization processing (for example, RAM clear 1 processing) based on the operation means being operated when power supply to the gaming machine is started, and executing initialization processing for abnormal times (for example, RAM clear 2 processing) based on the detection of an abnormality when power supply to the gaming machine is started;
A first storage area (for example, a clear storage area 1 of the RAM 102) whose storage contents are cleared in the normal initialization process;
A second storage area (for example, a clear storage area 2 of the RAM 102) in which storage contents are cleared in the initialization process at the time of abnormality,
The specific information storage means can store the specific information in the second storage area (for example, the RAM clear flag is set in the clear storage area 2 of the RAM 102).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably perform processing in a gaming machine configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 4 of the second invention,
Based on the state of the operation means is switched from the OFF state to the ON state, determination means that can determine that the operation means has been operated (for example, step 012IWS041 in the game control microcomputer 100 is provided),
The process execution means can change the set value based on the fact that the operation means has been operated by the determination means in the set value change process (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 012IWS042 when Y in step 012IWS041),
The determination means determines whether or not the operation means has been operated by setting the state of the operation means for the first time when the power supply to the gaming machine is started to the ON state (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 012IWS037 when N at step 012IWS036).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably perform processing in a gaming machine configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 5 of the second invention,
Timer interrupt processing execution means capable of executing timer interrupt processing each time a predetermined timer interrupt occurs (for example, a portion that executes steps S21 to S27 in the game control microcomputer 100),
The process executing means executes the process using the specific information multiple times until the timer interrupt process is executed after the power supply to the game machine is started (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 012IWS025, S034, and S048).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably perform processing in a gaming machine configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 6 of the second invention,
Information output means (for example, step 012IWS047, S178 in game control microcomputer 100) capable of outputting setting value information (for example, setting value command) that can specify which setting value is set, and
Suggestion production execution means,
Based on the set value information input from the information output means, it is possible to execute a suggestive effect (for example, a pre-game suggestive effect, a suggestive effect during the game, a suggestive effect during the jackpot) (for example, a part that executes steps 012IWS509 to S515, S704 to S709, and S901 to S906 in the second effect control CPU 012IW120b),
The suggestion effect execution means is
As the suggestive effect, a first suggestive effect (for example, a pre-game suggestive effect and a suggestive effect during the game according to the third effect mode, a suggestive effect during the big hit according to the fourth effect mode) and a second suggestive effect (for example, a pre-game suggestive effect, a suggestive effect during the game, and a suggestive effect during the big hit according to the first effect mode) can be executed.
When the set value information is not input normally, the first suggesting effect is not executed as the suggesting effect, and the second suggesting effect can be executed as the suggesting effect (for example, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b executes steps 012IWS514, S709, and S906 so as not to execute the pre-game suggesting effect, the during-game suggesting effect, and the fourth effect mode suggesting effect during the jackpot).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in games in a gaming machine configured to be able to set one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player.

In addition, the characteristic portion 099IW includes a third invention shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko game machine that can be set to one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player, for example, there is one described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2017-60546. Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-60546 describes that when the RAM clear switch is operated and the setting key switch is in the ON state, the initial setting 2 is executed and the lottery probability is changed. In addition, it is described that the setting key switch is used to activate the setting switch, and the winning lottery probability of the special figure corresponding to the setting 1 to 3 indicated by the setting switch is set. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-60546, there is a possibility that appropriate processing cannot always be performed in a gaming machine configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of set values with different advantages for the player. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a game machine of means 1 of the third invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine that can be set to any one of a plurality of set values (for example, set value "1" to set value "3") with different degrees of advantage for a player,
an operating means (e.g., a clear switch);
a processing execution means (for example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 that executes steps 012IWS039 to S042) capable of executing a set value change process for changing the set value based on the operation of the operation means when power supply to the gaming machine is started;
Based on the state of the operation means is switched from the OFF state to the ON state, determination means that can determine that the operation means has been operated (for example, step 012IWS041 in the game control microcomputer 100 portion) and,
The process execution means can change the setting value based on the fact that the operating means has been operated by the determining means in the setting value change process (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 012IWS042 when Y in step 012IWS041),
The determination means determines whether or not the operation means is operated by turning on the state of the operation means for the first time when the set value change process is started (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 012IWS037 when N at step 012IWS036)
According to this characteristic, the game machine configured so that any one of a plurality of set values with different advantages for the player can be set can perform processing favorably. That is, it is possible to prevent the setting value from being unintentionally changed even though the operation means (in this example, the clear switch) is continuously pressed, and the process can be preferably performed.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 2 of the third invention,
Specific information storage means (for example, RAM012IW122b) capable of storing specific information (for example, RAM clear flag) indicating that the operation means is operated when power supply to the gaming machine is started;
When executing a plurality of processes including a set value change process, the process execution means executes the process using the specific information a plurality of times (for example, a part that executes steps 012IWS025, S034, and S048 in the game control microcomputer 100).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably perform processing in a gaming machine configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 3 of the third invention,
An initialization processing executing means (for example, a part that executes steps 012IWS015 and S051 in the game control microcomputer 100) for executing normal initialization processing (for example, RAM clear 1 processing) based on the operation means being operated when power supply to the gaming machine is started, and executing initialization processing for abnormal times (for example, RAM clear 2 processing) based on the detection of an abnormality when power supply to the gaming machine is started;
A first storage area (for example, a clear storage area 1 of the RAM 102) whose storage contents are cleared in the normal initialization process;
A second storage area (for example, a clear storage area 2 of the RAM 102) in which storage contents are cleared in the initialization process at the time of abnormality,
The specific information storage means can store the specific information in the second storage area (for example, the RAM clear flag is set in the clear storage area 2 of the RAM 102).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably perform processing in a gaming machine configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 4 of the third invention,
a first state storage means (for example, a previous clear switch buffer) for storing the state of the previous operation means;
A second state storage means (for example, clear switch buffer) for storing the current state of the operation means,
The determination means can determine that the operation means has been operated based on the fact that the storage contents of the first state storage means are in the OFF state and the storage contents of the second state storage means are in the ON state (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 012IWS041),
The first state storage means stores the ON state as the first state of the operation means when the set value change process is started (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 012IWS037).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably perform processing in a gaming machine configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 5 of the third invention,
Information output means (for example, step 012IWS047, S178 in game control microcomputer 100) capable of outputting setting value information (for example, setting value command) that can specify which setting value is set.
Suggestion production execution means,
Based on the set value information input from the information output means, it is possible to execute a suggestive effect (for example, a pre-game suggestive effect, a suggestive effect during the game, a suggestive effect during the jackpot) (for example, a portion that executes steps 012IWS509 to S515, S704 to S709, and S901 to S906 in the second effect control CPU 012IW120b),
The suggestion effect execution means is
As the suggestive effect, a first suggestive effect (for example, a pre-game suggestive effect and a suggestive effect during the game according to the third effect mode, a suggestive effect during the big hit according to the fourth effect mode) and a second suggestive effect (for example, a pre-game suggestive effect according to the first effect mode, a suggestive effect during the game, and a suggestive effect during the big hit) can be executed.
When the set value information is not input normally, the first suggesting effect is not executed as the suggesting effect, and the second suggesting effect can be executed as the suggesting effect (for example, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b executes steps 012IWS514, S709, and S906 so as not to execute the pre-game suggesting effect, the during-game suggesting effect, and the fourth effect mode suggesting effect during the jackpot).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game in a game machine configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player.

In addition, the characteristic portion 099IW includes a fourth invention shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko game machine that is configured to be able to set one of the set values in a plurality of stages based on the setting operation, and that is configured to be able to control the advantageous state based on the set set value, For example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 describes that a change stop command (set value designation command) corresponding to the setting value before and after the change is transmitted from the main control board to the production control board, and based on the setting value before and after the change obtained by the change stop command, three types of production patterns corresponding to three types of characters, giraffe, elephant, and lion, are displayed. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a possibility that an erroneous suggestive effect is executed when the set value information (set value designation command) is not normal, and in the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set set value, there is a risk that the interest in the game may rather be reduced. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a game machine of means 1 of the fourth invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
A setting means (for example, a part that executes step 012IWS042 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can be set to one of the setting values of multiple stages (for example, setting value “1” to setting value “3”) based on the setting operation,
Game control means capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set (for example, a portion that executes steps S114 to S117 in the game control microcomputer 100),
Information output means (for example, step 012IWS047, S178 in game control microcomputer 100) that can output setting value information (for example, setting value command) that can specify which setting value is set, and
Based on the set value information output from the information output means, a suggestive effect execution means (for example, a second effect control CPU 012IW 120b for executing steps 012IWS509 to S515, S704 to S709, and S901 to S906) capable of executing a suggestive effect (for example, a suggestive effect before a game, a suggestive effect during a game, a suggestive effect during a big hit),
When the set value information output from the information output means is not normal, the suggestive effect executing means can execute the suggestive effect assuming that the setting value of the plurality of stages is set to a predetermined set value that is less advantageous for the player (for example, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b executes steps 012IWS512, S707, and S904).
According to this feature, in a game machine configured so as to be able to control an advantageous state based on a set value, it is possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 2 of the fourth invention,
The information output means can output the set value information at a plurality of timings (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 012IWS047 and S178 to transmit the set value command when the power is turned on and when the variation starts).
According to such a configuration, even if the set value information cannot be normally input at a certain timing, the set value information can be normally input at the next timing, so that the interest in the game can be prevented from being lowered.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 3 of the fourth invention,
It is described that the suggestive effect executing means can execute, as the suggestive effect, a first suggestive effect with a high specified degree of set value (e.g., pre-game suggestive effect and during-game suggestive effect according to the third effect mode, mid-jackpot suggestive effect according to the fourth effect mode) and a second suggestive effect with a low specified degree of set value (e.g., pre-game suggestive effect, during-game suggestive effect, during-jackpot effect according to the first effect mode). , can enhance the performance effect.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 4 of the fourth invention,
Suggestive effect determination means (for example, steps 012IWS510, S512, S514, S705, S707, S709, S902, S in the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b) for determining the execution mode of the suggested effect by using a plurality of types of determination data (e.g., pre-game suggestive effect determination table, in-game suggested effect determination table, during-jackpot suggestion effect determination table) for determining the suggestive effect execution mode. 904, a part that executes S906),
The suggestive effect determining means includes:
Using the decision data corresponding to the set value set among the plurality of types of decision data, the execution mode of the suggestion effect is determined (for example, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b executes steps 012IWS510, S705, and S902 based on the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 012IW122b),
When the set value information is not input normally, the determination data corresponding to the predetermined set value (for example, the set value "1") is used to determine the execution mode of the suggested effect (for example, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b executes steps 012IWS512, S707, S904 based on the set value "1").
According to this configuration, it is possible to prevent an increase in data capacity.

In this characteristic part 099IW, "determining the execution mode of the suggestive effect" is a concept that includes determining whether or not to execute the suggestive effect and also determining the effect mode of the suggestive effect.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 5 of the fourth invention,
It is described that the suggestive effect executing means may be capable of executing the suggestive effect (for example, pre-game suggestive effect, initial result effect, etc.) at least in a period from when the set value is changed until the first variable display is executed, at different ratios according to the set value. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player interested in the state of the gaming machine before the start of the game, to motivate the player to start the game from an early time zone, and to increase the interest in the game.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 6 of the fourth invention,
The suggestive effect executing means can execute the suggestive effect at a different rate according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 8-9(A) and (B), FIGS. 8-29(A) and (B)) during the game until a predetermined period (for example, a special period (after the setting is changed until the variable display is executed 30 times)) elapses after the set value is changed.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide the player with a motivation to play a game for a predetermined period of time, thereby enhancing the interest in the game.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 7 of the fourth invention,
The suggestive effect execution means can execute the suggestive effect at different ratios according to the set value (for example, see FIGS. 8-29 (A), (B), etc.),
It is described that an informing means (for example, a part in which the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b executes step S012IWS516) capable of informing information about the executed suggestive effect may be further provided, and according to such a configuration, the suggestive effect executed in the past can be confirmed, and the amusement of the game can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 8 of the fourth invention,
The suggestive effect execution means can execute the suggestive effect at different ratios according to the set value (for example, see FIGS. 8-31 (A), (B), etc.),
Predetermined performance executing means capable of executing a predetermined performance (for example, a performance of a character object, a light guide plate performance, an error display, etc. in which the big win suggestive performance is difficult to recognize when executed in parallel with the big win suggestive performance) in a performance mode in which the suggestive performance is difficult to recognize when executed in parallel with the suggestive performance;
It is described that a limiting means for limiting the execution of the predetermined effect when the suggestive effect is executed (for example, when the suggestive effect is executed during the big win, the execution of the character object effect is limited. See FIG. 8-31 (D)).

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 9 of the fourth invention,
The setting suggestion executing means can execute setting suggestions at different ratios according to the set values (see, for example, FIGS. 8-31 (A) and (B)),
It is described that a predetermined notification means capable of executing a predetermined notification in a manner in which the setting suggestion becomes difficult to recognize when executed in parallel with the setting suggestion (for example, a character performance, a light guide plate performance, an error display, etc. in which the big win suggestion performance becomes difficult to recognize when executed in parallel with the big win suggestion performance) may be further provided, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 10 of the fourth invention,
A predetermined control period in an advantageous state (for example, a fanfare period, an interval period, an ending period, etc. during a jackpot game) differs depending on the set value (for example, see FIG. 8-8).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 11 of the fourth invention,
A predetermined control period (for example, variable time) for variable display differs depending on the set value (for example, see FIGS. 8-10)
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 12 of the fourth invention,
Equipped with an opening/closing body that can be opened and closed, and a regulation member (for example, security cover 012IW500A/security cover 012IW500B/security cover 012IW500C) capable of regulating the operation of the operation unit,
When the opening/closing body is closed, the regulating member maintains the regulated state in which the operation of the operation portion is regulated by the regulating member, and when the opening/closing member is opened, the regulated state can be released (for example, when the game machine frame 012IW003 is closed, the security cover 012IW500A maintains the regulated state in which the operation of the operation portion including the setting key 012IW051 is regulated, while the security cover 012IW003 is opened. The restricted state by 012IW500A is released, and the operation of the setting key 012IW051 is permitted (Figs. 8-5, 8-6, 8-49 to 8-52).
It is described that such a configuration may be used, and according to such a configuration, security is improved.

In addition, the characteristic portion 099IW also includes a fifth invention described below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko game machine that is configured to be able to set one of the set values in a plurality of stages based on the setting operation, and that is configured to be able to control the advantageous state based on the set set value, For example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 describes that a change stop command (set value designation command) corresponding to the setting value before and after the change is transmitted from the main control board to the production control board, and based on the setting value before and after the change obtained by the change stop command, three types of production patterns corresponding to three types of characters, giraffe, elephant, and lion, are displayed. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a possibility that an erroneous suggestive effect is executed when the set value information (set value designation command) is not normal, and in the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set set value, there is a risk that the interest in the game may rather be reduced. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a game machine of means 1 of the fifth invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
A setting means (for example, a part that executes step 012IWS042 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can be set to one of the setting values of multiple stages (for example, setting value “1” to setting value “3”) based on the setting operation,
Game control means capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set (for example, a portion that executes steps S114 to S117 in the game control microcomputer 100),
Information output means (for example, step 012IWS047, S178 in game control microcomputer 100) that can output setting value information (for example, setting value command) that can specify which setting value is set, and
Based on the set value information output from the information output means, a suggestive effect execution means (for example, a second effect control CPU 012IW 120b for executing steps 012IWS509 to S515, S704 to S709, and S901 to S906) capable of executing a suggestive effect (for example, a suggestive effect before a game, a suggestive effect during a game, a suggestive effect during a big hit),
The suggestive effect executing means limits the execution of the suggestive effect when the set value information output from the information output means is not normal (for example, the second effect control CPU 012IW120b does not execute the pre-game suggestive effect, during-game suggestive effect, and jackpot-indicative effect when N in step 012IWS513, N in S708, and N in S905).
According to this feature, in a game machine configured so as to be able to control an advantageous state based on a set value, it is possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 2 of the fifth invention,
The information output means can output the set value information at a plurality of timings (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 012IWS047 and S178 to transmit the set value command when the power is turned on and when the variation starts).
According to such a configuration, even if the set value information cannot be normally input at a certain timing, the set value information can be normally input at the next timing, so that the interest in the game can be prevented from being lowered.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 3 of the fifth invention,
It is described that the suggestive effect executing means can execute, as the suggestive effect, a first suggestive effect with a high specified degree of the set value (for example, a pre-game suggestive effect or a suggestive effect during the game according to the third effect mode, a suggestive effect during the big hit according to the fourth effect mode), and a second suggestive effect with a low specified degree of the set value (for example, a pre-game suggestive effect, a suggestive effect during the game, or a suggestive effect during the big win according to the first effect mode). , can enhance the performance effect.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 4 of the fifth invention,
It is described that the suggestive effect executing means can execute the suggestive effect (for example, a pre-game suggestive effect, an initial result effect, etc.) at least in a period from when the set value is changed until the first variable display is executed, at different ratios according to the set value. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player interested in the state of the gaming machine before the start of the game, to motivate the player to start the game from an early time zone, and to enhance the game interest.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 5 of the fifth invention,
The suggestive effect executing means can execute the suggestive effect at a different rate according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 8-9(A) and (B), FIGS. 8-29(A) and (B)) during the game until a predetermined period (for example, a special period (after the setting is changed until the variable display is executed 30 times)) elapses after the set value is changed.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide the player with a motivation to play a game for a predetermined period of time, thereby enhancing the interest in the game.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 6 of the fifth invention,
The suggestive effect execution means can execute the suggestive effect at different ratios according to the set value (for example, see FIGS. 8-29 (A), (B), etc.),
It is described that an informing means (for example, a part in which the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b executes step S012IWS516) capable of informing information about the executed suggestive effects may be further provided, and according to such a configuration, the suggestive effects executed in the past can be confirmed, and the game interest can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 7 of the fifth invention,
The suggestive effect execution means can execute the suggestive effect at different ratios according to the set value (for example, see FIGS. 8-31 (A), (B), etc.),
Predetermined performance execution means capable of executing a predetermined performance (for example, a performance of a character, a light guide plate performance, an error display, etc. in which the big win suggestive performance is difficult to recognize when executed in parallel with the big win suggestive performance) in a performance mode in which the suggestive performance is difficult to recognize when executed in parallel with the suggestive performance;
It is described that a limiting means for limiting the execution of the predetermined effect when the suggestive effect is executed (for example, when the suggestive effect is executed during the big win, the execution of the character object effect is limited. See FIG. 8-31 (D)).

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 8 of the fifth invention,
The setting suggestion executing means can execute the setting suggestion at a different rate according to the set value (for example, see FIGS. 8-31 (A), (B), etc.),
It is described that a predetermined notification means capable of executing a predetermined notification in a manner in which the setting suggestion becomes difficult to recognize when executed in parallel with the setting suggestion (for example, a character performance, a light guide plate performance, an error display, etc. in which the big win suggestion performance becomes difficult to recognize when executed in parallel with the big win suggestion performance, an error display, etc.), and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 9 of the fifth invention,
A predetermined control period in an advantageous state (for example, a fanfare period, an interval period, an ending period, etc. during a jackpot game) differs depending on the set value (for example, see FIG. 8-8).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 10 of the fifth invention,
A predetermined control period (for example, variable time) for variable display differs depending on the set value (for example, see FIGS. 8-10)
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 11 of the fifth invention,
Equipped with an opening/closing body that can be opened and closed, and a regulation member (for example, security cover 012IW500A/security cover 012IW500B/security cover 012IW500C) capable of regulating the operation of the operation unit,
When the opening/closing body is closed, the regulating member maintains the regulated state in which the operation of the operation portion is regulated by the regulating member, and when the opening/closing member is opened, the regulated state can be released (for example, when the game machine frame 012IW003 is closed, the security cover 012IW500A maintains the regulated state in which the operation of the operation portion including the setting key 012IW051 is regulated, while the security cover 012IW003 is opened. The restricted state by 012IW500A is released, and the operation of the setting key 012IW051 is permitted (Figs. 8-5, 8-6, 8-49 to 8-52).
It is described that such a configuration may be used, and according to such a configuration, security is improved.

In addition, the characteristic portion 099IW also includes a sixth invention described below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko game machine that is configured to be able to set one of the set values in a plurality of stages based on the setting operation, and that is configured to be able to control the advantageous state based on the set set value, For example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 describes that a change stop command (set value designation command) corresponding to the setting value before and after the change is transmitted from the main control board to the production control board, and based on the setting value before and after the change obtained by the change stop command, three types of production patterns corresponding to three types of characters, giraffe, elephant, and lion, are displayed. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a possibility that an erroneous suggestive effect is executed when the set value information (set value designation command) is not normal, and in the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set set value, there is a risk that the interest in the game may rather be reduced. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a game machine of means 1 of the sixth invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
A setting means (for example, a part that executes step 012IWS042 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can be set to one of the setting values of multiple stages (for example, setting value “1” to setting value “3”) based on the setting operation,
Game control means capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set (for example, a portion that executes steps S114 to S117 in the game control microcomputer 100),
Information output means (for example, step 012IWS047, S178 in game control microcomputer 100) that can output setting value information (for example, setting value command) that can specify which setting value is set, and
Based on the set value information output from the information output means, a suggestive effect execution means (for example, a second effect control CPU 012IW 120b for executing steps 012IWS509 to S515, S704 to S709, and S901 to S906) capable of executing a suggestive effect (for example, a suggestive effect before a game, a suggestive effect during a game, a suggestive effect during a big hit),
The suggestion effect execution means is
As the suggestive effect, a first suggestive effect (for example, a pre-game suggestive effect and a suggestive effect during the game according to the third effect mode, a suggestive effect during the big hit according to the fourth effect mode) and a second suggestive effect (for example, a pre-game suggestive effect, a suggestive effect during the game, and a suggestive effect during the big hit according to the first effect mode) can be executed.
When the set value information output from the information output means is not normal, the first suggestive effect is not executed as the suggestive effect, and the second suggestive effect can be executed as the suggestive effect (for example, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b executes steps 012IWS514, S709, and S906 to perform the pre-game suggestive effect, the mid-game suggestive effect, and the fourth effect mode suggestive effect during the big win by executing steps 012IWS514, S709, and S906. not run)
According to this feature, in a game machine configured so as to be able to control an advantageous state based on a set value, it is possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 2 of the sixth invention,
The information output means can output the set value information at a plurality of timings (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 012IWS047 and S178 to transmit the set value command when the power is turned on and when the variation starts).
According to such a configuration, even if the set value information cannot be normally input at a certain timing, the set value information can be normally input at the next timing, so that the interest in the game can be prevented from being lowered.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 3 of the sixth invention,
It is described that the suggestive effect executing means can execute, as the suggestive effect, a first suggestive effect with a high specified degree of the set value (for example, a pre-game suggestive effect or a suggestive effect during the game according to the third effect mode, a suggestive effect during the big hit according to the fourth effect mode), and a second suggestive effect with a low specified degree of the set value (for example, a pre-game suggestive effect, a suggestive effect during the game, or a suggestive effect during the big win according to the first effect mode). , can enhance the performance effect.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 4 of the sixth invention,
Suggestive effect determination means (for example, steps 012IWS510, S512, S514, S705, S707, S709, S902, S in the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b) for determining the execution mode of the suggested effect by using a plurality of types of determination data (for example, a pre-game suggestive effect determination table, a during-game suggested effect determination table, a during-jackpot suggestive effect determination table) for determining the suggestive effect execution mode. 904, a part that executes S906),
The suggestive effect determining means includes:
Using the decision data according to the set value set among the plurality of types of decision data, the execution mode of the suggestion effect is determined (for example, the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b executes steps 012IWS 510, S705, and S902 based on the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 012IW 122b),
When the set value information is not input normally, the execution mode of the suggested effect is determined using dedicated determination data (for example, the pre-game suggested effect determination table for effect mode C, the during-game suggested effect determination table, the during-jackpot suggested effect determination table) (for example, the second effect control CPU 012 IW 120b uses the pre-game suggested effect determination table for effect mode C, the mid-game suggested effect determination table, and the during-jackpot suggested effect determination table to perform step 012). Execute IWS514, S709, S906)
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 5 of the sixth invention,
It is described that the suggestive effect executing means can execute the suggestive effect (for example, a pre-game suggestive effect, an initial result effect, etc.) at least in a period from when the set value is changed until the first variable display is executed, at different ratios according to the set value. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player interested in the state of the gaming machine before the start of the game, to motivate the player to start the game from an early time zone, and to enhance the game interest.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 6 of the sixth invention,
The suggestive effect executing means can execute the suggestive effect at a different rate according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 8-9(A) and (B), FIGS. 8-29(A) and (B)) during the game until a predetermined period (for example, a special period (after the setting is changed until the variable display is executed 30 times)) elapses after the set value is changed.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide the player with a motivation to play a game for a predetermined period of time, thereby enhancing the interest in the game.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 7 of the sixth invention,
The suggestive effect execution means can execute the suggestive effect at different ratios according to the set value (for example, see FIGS. 8-29 (A), (B), etc.),
It is described that an informing means (for example, a part in which the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b executes step S012IWS516) capable of informing information about the executed suggestive effect may be further provided, and according to such a configuration, the suggestive effect executed in the past can be confirmed, and the amusement of the game can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 8 of the sixth invention,
The suggestive effect execution means can execute the suggestive effect at different ratios according to the set value (for example, see FIGS. 8-31 (A), (B), etc.),
Predetermined performance execution means capable of executing a predetermined performance (for example, a performance of a character, a light guide plate performance, an error display, etc. in which the big win suggestive performance is difficult to recognize when executed in parallel with the big win suggestive performance) in a performance mode in which the suggestive performance is difficult to recognize when executed in parallel with the suggestive performance;
It is described that a limiting means for limiting the execution of the predetermined effect when the suggestive effect is executed (for example, when the suggestive effect is executed during the big win, the execution of the character object effect is limited. See FIG. 8-31 (D)).

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 9 of the sixth invention,
The setting suggestion executing means can execute setting suggestions at different ratios according to the set values (see, for example, FIGS. 8-31 (A) and (B)),
It is described that a predetermined notification means capable of executing a predetermined notification in a manner in which the setting suggestion becomes difficult to recognize when executed in parallel with the setting suggestion (for example, a character performance, a light guide plate performance, an error display, etc. in which the big win suggestion performance becomes difficult to recognize when executed in parallel with the big win suggestion performance) may be further provided, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 10 of the sixth invention,
A predetermined control period in an advantageous state (for example, a fanfare period, an interval period, an ending period, etc. during a jackpot game) differs depending on the set value (for example, see FIG. 8-8).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 11 of the sixth invention,
A predetermined control period (for example, variable time) for variable display differs depending on the set value (for example, see FIGS. 8-10)
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 12 of the sixth invention,
Equipped with an opening/closing body that can be opened and closed, and a regulation member (for example, security cover 012IW500A/security cover 012IW500B/security cover 012IW500C) capable of regulating the operation of the operation unit,
When the opening/closing body is closed, the regulating member maintains the regulated state in which the operation of the operating portion is regulated by the regulating member, and when the opening/closing member is opened, the regulated state can be released (for example, when the game machine frame 012IW003 is closed, the security cover 012IW500A maintains the regulated state in which the operation of the operation portion including the setting key 012IW051 is regulated, while the security cover 012IW003 is opened. The restricted state by 012IW500A is released, and the operation of the setting key 012IW051 is permitted (Figs. 8-5, 8-6, 8-49 to 8-52).
It is described that it may be so, and according to such a configuration, security is improved.

The characteristic part 099IW is configured so that it can be changed to three types of presentation modes A to C, and when the presentation mode A is controlled, if the set value information is not normally input, it is configured to be set to a predetermined set value with a low degree of advantage for the player, so that the suggestive presentation can be executed (configuration of the above fourth invention), and when the presentation mode B is controlled, if the set value information is not normally input, the suggested presentation is restricted from being executed (above). Configuration of the fifth invention), and when the set value information is not normally input when the performance mode C is set, the first suggestion performance is not executed as the suggestion performance, and the second suggestion performance is executed as the suggestion performance (configuration of the sixth invention), but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, according to the game state, it is possible to switch which of the control methods of the fourth invention to the sixth invention is used to execute the suggestive effect. In this case, for example, if the game state is a normal state, the setting value information is set to a predetermined setting value that is low in the advantage to the player, and the suggestive effect can be executed (configuration of the fourth invention), if the game state is a time-saving state, the execution of the suggestive effect is restricted if the set value information is not normally input (the fifth invention configuration), and if the game state is the probability variable state, the setting value information is not normally input. In this case, the first suggestive effect may not be executed as the suggestive effect, and the second suggestive effect may be executed as the suggestive effect (configuration of the above-described sixth invention).

In addition, it is not necessary to configure the suggestive effect to be executable by all the control methods of the fourth invention to the sixth invention shown above, and the suggestive effect may be executed by using only one of the control methods.

In addition, in this characteristic part 099IW, when the set value command itself cannot be received due to reasons such as missing data or garbled data, the execution of the suggestive effect is controlled (restricted suggestive effect) by the control methods of the above-described fourth to sixth inventions, but the case is not limited to such a mode. For example, a setting value command is received, but if the received setting value command is inconsistent, the suggestive effect may be restricted. In this case, for example, each time a set value command is received, the set value indicated by the received set value command is stored on the effect control means side, and when a new set value command is received thereafter, if the set value indicated by the newly received set value command and the previously stored set value do not match, it is determined that a mismatch has occurred, and the execution of the suggestive effect is controlled (the suggestive effect is limited) by the control methods of the fourth to sixth inventions.

Also, the way in which the game is differentiated for each set value "1" to "3" is not limited to that shown in this example. For example, in the case of odd-numbered set values such as set value '1' and '3', it may be configured so that there is a large difference between the time when consecutive hits are likely to occur and when it is difficult to generate consecutive hits. In this case, if the set value command cannot be received normally, the control method of the fourth to sixth inventions may be used to control the execution of the suggestive effect suggesting that the set value is an odd number (limit the suggestive effect).

In addition, the characteristic portion 099IW also includes a seventh invention shown below. That is, conventionally, there is a pachinko game machine with a setting function, for example, disclosed in JP-A-2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that setting values are suggested only during variable display, and the interest cannot be enhanced sufficiently. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a game machine of means 1 of the seventh invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display and is controllable to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state, etc.) that is advantageous to a player,
a setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) that can be set to one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3);
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 5) that can execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set;
a suggestive effect executing means capable of executing a suggestive effect (for example, setting suggestive effect) suggesting the set value,
The game machine is characterized in that the suggestive effect executing means can execute the suggestive effect (for example, a pre-game suggestive effect, an initial result effect, etc.) at least in a period from when the set value is changed until the first variable display is executed, at a different rate according to the set value. According to this feature, it is possible to make the player interested in the state of the game machine before the start of the game, to motivate the player to start the game from an early time period, and to increase the interest in the game.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 2 of the seventh invention,
A gaming machine capable of executing variable display of performance identification information (for example, decoration pattern),
It is described that the suggestive effect executing means can execute a suggestive effect (for example, display of an odd initial number) in which different effect identification information is displayed according to the set value during the period from when the set value is changed until the first variable display is executed.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 3 of the seventh invention,
The suggestive effect executing means can execute a suggestive effect according to the set value when the power supply to the game machine is restored after the power supply to the game machine is stopped (for example, as shown in FIGS. 8-26 (A) and (B), pre-game suggestive effect determination tables with different determination values are used).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 4 of the seventh invention,
The suggestive effect execution means can execute a specific suggestive effect (for example, a suggestive effect during a game, a suggestive effect during a big win, etc.) that suggests the set value after the variable display is started,
It is described that the specific suggestive effect may have a higher degree of reliability for the set value suggested than the suggestive effect, and according to such a configuration, the amusement of the game can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 5 of the seventh invention,
A game machine capable of playing games using game media (for example, game balls),
a game value imparting means (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing of S12) for imparting a game value based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, the general winning opening 50A to the general winning opening 50D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first big winning opening, the second big winning opening 712);
an information display means (for example, a display monitor 012IW029) capable of displaying information about the game value given by the game value giving means;
The information display means is capable of displaying set values (for example, a portion of the display monitor 012IW029 that can display the continuous ratio, the role ratio, and the base).
According to this configuration, it is possible to suppress an increase in manufacturing costs.

In addition, the characteristic portion 099IW also includes an eighth invention shown below. That is, conventionally, there is a pachinko game machine with a setting function, for example, disclosed in JP-A-2010-200902. However, the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 has a problem that it cannot effectively motivate the player to play the game, and the interest cannot be enhanced sufficiently. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a game machine of means 1 of the eighth invention for solving the problem,
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
a setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) that can be set to one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3);
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 5) that can execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set;
a suggestive effect executing means capable of executing a suggestive effect (for example, setting suggestive effect) suggesting the set value,
The suggestive effect executing means is capable of executing the suggestive effect at a different rate according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 8-9 (A) and (B), FIGS. 8-29 (A) and (B)) during the game until a predetermined period (for example, a special period (from setting change to execution of 30 times of variable display)) elapses after the setting value is changed.
According to this feature, it is possible to give the player a motivation to play a game for a predetermined period of time, thereby enhancing the interest in the game.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 2 of the eighth invention,
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state for a player,
variable display pattern determination means for determining a variable display pattern;
variable display execution means for executing variable display based on the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination means;
The variable display pattern determination means determines one of a plurality of variable display patterns at different ratios depending on whether the set value is changed or not (see, for example, FIGS. 8-9 (A) and (B)),
It is described that the variable display execution means can execute variable display using a common background image when the set value is changed and when the set value is not changed.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 3 of the eighth invention,
variable display pattern determination means for determining a variable display pattern;
variable display execution means for executing variable display based on the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination means;
The variable display pattern determining means determines one of a plurality of variable display patterns according to different ratios when the set value is set to the first set value and when the set value is set to the second set value by the setting means (see, for example, FIGS. 8-9 (A), (B), etc.),
It is described that the variable display executing means may execute variable display using a common background image when the set value is set to the first set value and when the set value is set to the second set value by the setting means.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 4 of the eighth invention,
The suggestive effect executing means can execute a suggestive effect based on the establishment of a predetermined condition within a predetermined period (for example, a big hit during a specific period, the number of executions of a ready-to-win effect or a pseudo-continuous effect reaches a predetermined number, or the execution of a specific super ready-to-win effect or advance notice effect, etc.) (for example, when a big win occurs within a specific period, it is possible to execute a suggestive effect during a big win. See FIGS. 8-31 (A) and (B)).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 5 of the eighth invention,
A game machine capable of playing games using game media (for example, game balls),
a game value imparting means (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing of S12) for imparting a game value based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, the general winning opening 50A to the general winning opening 50D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first big winning opening, the second big winning opening 712);
an information display means (for example, a display monitor 012IW029) capable of displaying information about the game value given by the game value giving means;
The information display means is capable of displaying set values (for example, a portion of the display monitor 012IW029 that can display the continuous ratio, the role ratio, and the base).
According to this configuration, it is possible to suppress an increase in manufacturing costs.

In addition, the characteristic portion 099IW also includes a ninth invention described below. That is, conventionally, there is a pachinko game machine with a setting function, for example, disclosed in JP-A-2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that it is not possible to confirm the suggestive effects executed in the past, and thus the interest cannot be enhanced sufficiently. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a game machine of means 1 of the ninth invention for solving the problem,
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
a setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) that can be set to one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3);
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 5) that can execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set;
a suggestive effect executing means capable of executing a suggestive effect (for example, setting suggestive effect) suggesting the set value,
The suggestive effect executing means can execute the suggestive effect at different ratios according to the set value (for example, see FIGS. 8-29 (A), (B), etc.),
The game machine is characterized by further comprising notifying means (for example, a part where the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b executes step S012IWS516) capable of notifying information about the executed suggestive effect, and according to this feature, the suggestive effect executed in the past can be confirmed, and the interest in the game can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 2 of the ninth invention,
The reporting means can report the number of times the suggestive effect is executed (for example, the part where the second effect control CPU012IW120b executes step S012IWS516).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 3 of the ninth invention,
The notification means can notify the contents of the executed suggestion effect (for example, the part where the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b executes step S012IWS516).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 4 of the ninth invention,
The notifying means can notify the information about the suggested effect that has been executed while the variable display is not being executed (for example, the part where the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b executes step S012IWS516).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 5 of the ninth invention,
information generating means for generating information (for example, execution history information) about the executed suggestive effect;
image generation means for generating a specific image (for example, a two-dimensional code containing execution history information) from which the information can be read by an imaging device;
It is described that a display means (for example, an image display device 5) for displaying the specific image in a manner that can be captured by the imaging device may be provided.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 6 of the ninth invention,
A game machine capable of playing games using game media (for example, game balls),
a game value imparting means (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing of S12) for imparting a game value based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, the general winning opening 50A to the general winning opening 50D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first big winning opening, the second big winning opening 712);
an information display means (for example, a display monitor 012IW029) capable of displaying information about the game value given by the game value giving means;
The information display means is capable of displaying set values (for example, a portion of the display monitor 012IW029 that can display the continuous ratio, the role ratio, and the base).
According to this configuration, it is possible to suppress an increase in manufacturing costs.

In addition, the present characteristic portion 099IW also includes a tenth invention shown below. That is, conventionally, there is a pachinko game machine with a setting function, for example, disclosed in JP-A-2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that if the setting suggestion effect becomes difficult to recognize due to other effects, interest may be lost. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a game machine of means 1 of the tenth invention for solving the problem,
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
a setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) that can be set to one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3);
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 5) that can execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set;
a suggestive effect executing means capable of executing a suggestive effect (for example, setting suggestive effect) suggesting the set value,
The suggestive effect executing means can execute the suggestive effect at different ratios according to the set value (for example, see FIGS. 8-31 (A), (B), etc.),
Predetermined performance execution means capable of executing a predetermined performance (for example, a performance of a character, a light guide plate performance, an error display, etc. in which the big win suggestive performance is difficult to recognize when executed in parallel with the big win suggestive performance) in a performance mode in which the suggestive performance is difficult to recognize when executed in parallel with the suggestive performance;
and a limiting means for limiting the execution of the predetermined effect when the suggestive effect is executed (for example, when the suggestive effect during the big hit is executed, the execution of the character object effect is limited. See FIG. 8-31 (D)).
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent a decline in interest.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 2 of the tenth invention,
The limiting means changes the execution timing of at least one of the suggested performance and the predetermined performance when the execution timings of the suggested performance and the predetermined performance overlap (for example, change so that one of them is performed during the fanfare period and the other is performed during the ending period).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 3 of the tenth invention,
The limiting means prohibits the execution of the predetermined effect when the suggestive effect is executed (for example, when the suggestive effect during the big hit is executed, the execution of the character product effect is prohibited. See FIG. 8-31 (D)).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 4 of the tenth invention,
When the suggestive performance is executed, the limiting means executes a predetermined performance in a performance mode in which the suggestive performance is not difficult to recognize (for example, the movable member 012IW101 is operated in an operation mode different from usual (for example, it is controlled so as not to stop at a position overlapping the dialogue image by the suggestive performance during the big win)).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 5 of the tenth invention,
Both the suggestive effect and the predetermined effect (for example, a fanfare effect in which a predetermined image is displayed on the image display device 5) include display on one display means (for example, the image display device 5),
It is described that the first display means may display the display regarding the suggestive effect with priority over the display regarding the predetermined effect, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 6 of the tenth invention,
A game machine capable of playing games using game media (for example, game balls),
a game value imparting means (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing of S12) for imparting a game value based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, the general winning opening 50A to the general winning opening 50D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first big winning opening, the second big winning opening 712);
an information display means (for example, a display monitor 012IW029) capable of displaying information about the game value given by the game value giving means;
The information display means is capable of displaying set values (for example, a portion of the display monitor 012IW029 that can display the continuous ratio, the role ratio, and the base).
According to this configuration, it is possible to suppress an increase in manufacturing costs.

In addition, the present characteristic portion 099IW also includes an eleventh invention shown below. That is, conventionally, there is a pachinko game machine with a setting function, for example, disclosed in JP-A-2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that the player may lose interest in the game due to execution of setting suggestion effects that are not preferable to the player. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a game machine of means 1 of the eleventh invention for solving the problem,
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
a setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) that can be set to one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3);
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 5) that can execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set;
a setting suggestion executing means capable of executing a setting suggestion (for example, a setting suggestion effect) that suggests the set value,
The setting suggestion executing means can execute the setting suggestion at different ratios according to the set value (for example, see FIGS. 8-31 (A), (B), etc.),
The game machine is characterized by further comprising a predetermined notification means capable of executing a predetermined notification in a manner that makes it difficult to recognize the setting suggestion when executed in parallel with the setting suggestion (for example, a character performance, a light guide plate performance, an error display, etc. that makes it difficult to recognize the big win suggestion performance when executed in parallel with the big win suggestion performance, and an error display), and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent the loss of interest.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 2 of the eleventh invention,
It is described that the predetermined notification means may be capable of executing a predetermined notification (for example, a character performance) to operate the movable member (for example, the movable member 012IW101), and according to such a configuration, the performance effect can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 3 of the eleventh invention,
a light-transmitting light guide plate (for example, a light guide plate 012IW103);
and a light emitter provided so that light can enter from the end surface of the light guide plate,
The light guide plate is provided with a reflection part for reflecting light incident on the interior of the light guide plate from the end surface of the light guide plate by the light emitter and emitting the light to the front surface of the gaming machine,
It is described that the predetermined notification means can execute a predetermined notification (for example, a light guide plate effect) in which light is emitted to the front surface of the gaming machine from the reflection portion provided on the light guide plate by causing the light emitter to emit light.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 4 of the eleventh invention,
It is described that the predetermined notification means may be capable of executing a predetermined notification to display an error, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately notify an error.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 5 of the eleventh invention,
The setting suggestion executing means is capable of executing a first setting suggestion suggesting that the first setting value is set (for example, a jackpot middle-hitting performance in the first performance mode; see FIGS. 8-31A and 8-31B), and a second setting suggestion suggesting that the second set value is set to a higher advantage for the player than the first setting value (for example, a third performance-mode middle-hitting suggestion performance; see FIGS. 8-31A and 8-31B);
The predetermined notification means can execute the predetermined notification at a higher rate when the first setting suggestion is performed than when the second setting suggestion is performed (see, for example, FIG. 8-31(E)).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 6 of the eleventh invention,
Equipped with setting suggestion setting means capable of setting the execution ratio of setting suggestion (for example, setting screen is displayed after power is turned on, and setting of setting suggestion effect can be changed by operating operating means such as push button 31B or operating means such as switch provided inside the game machine (operable only by the administrator))
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 7 of the eleventh invention,
A gaming machine that performs variable display of identification information,
Equipped with a variable display device that can variably display identification information by rotating a variable display member (for example, a drum-shaped or belt-shaped movable body) on which identification information is arranged,
The variable display device performs a specific operation in the first variable display of the identification information after the setting value is changed,
It is described that the predetermined notification means may perform the predetermined notification at a high rate in the first variable display of the identification information after the setting value is changed.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 8 of the eleventh invention,
A game machine capable of playing games using game media (for example, game balls),
a game value imparting means (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing of S12) for imparting a game value based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, the general winning opening 50A to the general winning opening 50D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first big winning opening, the second big winning opening 712);
an information display means (for example, a display monitor 012IW029) capable of displaying information about the game value given by the game value giving means;
The information display means is capable of displaying set values (for example, a portion of the display monitor 012IW029 that can display the continuous ratio, the role ratio, and the base).
According to this configuration, it is possible to suppress an increase in manufacturing costs.

In addition, the characteristic portion 099IW also includes a twelfth invention described below. That is, conventionally, there is a pachinko game machine with a setting function, for example, disclosed in JP-A-2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that gambling properties may become too high when the advantage is set to be high. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a game machine of means 1 of the twelfth invention for solving the problem,
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
a setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) that can be set to one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3);
A game control means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 5) that can execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that is set.
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state (for example, the fanfare period, the interval period, the ending period, etc. during the jackpot game) differs depending on the set value (for example, see FIG. 8-8).
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 2 of the twelfth invention,
The fanfare control period in the advantageous state differs depending on the set value (for example, see FIG. 8-8 (B))
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 3 of the twelfth invention,
The interval control period in the advantageous state differs depending on the set value (for example, see FIG. 8-8 (B))
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 4 of the twelfth invention,
The ending control period in the advantageous state differs depending on the set value (for example, see FIG. 8-8 (B))
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 5 of the twelfth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing games using gaming values,
a game value imparting means for imparting a game value based on the establishment of a specific condition;
The setting means can be set to a first set value (for example, a set value of 3) and a second set value (for example, a set value of 1) at which the game value imparted by the game value imparting means accounts for a higher proportion of the game value used in the game than the first set value,
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state is longer when set to the second set value than when set to the first set value (see, for example, FIGS. 8-8 (A) and (B)).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 6 of the twelfth invention,
It is described that a suggestive performance executing means capable of executing a suggestive performance suggesting a set value (for example, a suggestive performance during a big win) during a predetermined control period in an advantageous state can be provided, and according to such a configuration, interest in the predetermined control period in an advantageous state can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 7 of the twelfth invention,
Equipped with production execution means capable of executing production,
It is described that the effect executing means may execute a common effect (for example, a common fanfare effect, an interval effect, an ending effect, etc.) during a predetermined control period in an advantageous state, regardless of the set values. According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase interest in the predetermined control period in an advantageous state.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 8 of the twelfth invention,
It is described that the predetermined control period in the advantageous state may be predetermined according to the set value, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling property from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 9 of the twelfth invention,
A gaming machine that can be controlled in a plurality of types of advantageous states,
The game control means can be controlled to any one of the plurality of types of advantageous states (for example, jackpot types A to C) by different ratios based on the set value,
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state differs depending on the type of the advantageous state (see, for example, FIG. 8-8(B))
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 10 of the twelfth invention,
A game machine capable of playing games using game media (for example, game balls),
a game value imparting means (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing of S12) for imparting a game value based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, the general winning opening 50A to the general winning opening 50D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first big winning opening, the second big winning opening 712);
an information display means (for example, a display monitor 012IW029) capable of displaying information about the game value given by the game value giving means;
The information display means is capable of displaying set values (for example, a portion of the display monitor 012IW029 that can display the continuous ratio, the role ratio, and the base).
According to this configuration, it is possible to suppress an increase in manufacturing costs.

In addition, the present characteristic portion 099IW also includes a thirteenth invention shown below. That is, conventionally, there is a pachinko game machine with a setting function, for example, disclosed in JP-A-2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that gambling properties may become too high when the advantage is set to be high. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a game machine of means 1 of the thirteenth invention for solving the problem,
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
a setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) that can be set to one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3);
A game control means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 5) that can execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that is set.
A predetermined control period (for example, variable time) for variable display differs depending on the set value (for example, see FIGS. 8-10)
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 2 of the thirteenth invention,
The variable display period varies depending on the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 8-10)
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 3 of the thirteenth invention,
It is described that the period during which the display result of the variable display is displayed may be changed according to the set value, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 4 of the thirteenth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing games using gaming values,
a game value imparting means for imparting a game value based on the establishment of a specific condition;
The setting means can be set to a first set value (for example, a set value of 3) and a second set value (for example, a set value of 1) at which the game value imparted by the game value imparting means accounts for a higher proportion of the game value used in the game than the first set value,
The predetermined control period for variable display is longer when set to the second set value than when set to the first set value (see, for example, FIG. 8-10).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 5 of the thirteenth invention,
It is described that the predetermined control period regarding the variable display may be determined in advance according to the set value, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 6 of the thirteenth invention,
variable display pattern determination means for determining a variable display pattern;
variable display execution means for executing variable display based on the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination means;
The variable display pattern determining means determines one of a plurality of variable display patterns having different variable display periods at different ratios according to the set value (see FIGS. 8-10, for example).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 7 of the thirteenth invention,
A game machine capable of playing games using game media (for example, game balls),
a game value imparting means (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing of S12) for imparting a game value based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, the general winning opening 50A to the general winning opening 50D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first big winning opening, the second big winning opening 712);
an information display means (for example, a display monitor 012IW029) capable of displaying information about the game value given by the game value giving means;
The information display means is capable of displaying set values (for example, a portion of the display monitor 012IW029 that can display the continuous ratio, the role ratio, and the base).
According to this configuration, it is possible to suppress an increase in manufacturing costs.

In this characteristic portion 099IW, a case has been shown in which the setting values can be set in three stages of setting values "1" to "3", but this is not limited to such an aspect, and for example, it may be configured so that the setting values can be set in four or more stages, or the setting values can be set in two stages. In this case, for example, it may be configured to be settable to six levels of set values, so that the expectation (reliability) for the big win is lowest when the set value is "1" and the expectation (reliability) for the big win is highest when the set value is "6".

The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. In addition to the above-described embodiments and other examples of forms described later, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes and additions within the scope of the present invention.

Further, all or part of the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, and the configurations shown in later-described embodiment examples and each modified example may be arbitrarily combined.

In addition, it should be considered that the above-mentioned embodiment disclosed this time and the below-mentioned form are examples in all respects, and are not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of the claims rather than the above description and the description below, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of the claims.

The gaming machine of the present invention is also a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot game state), and includes a power supply means (for example, a power board), a first control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11) that receives power from the power supply means and performs control, and a second control means (for example, a second effect control board 01 that receives power from the power supply means and performs control based on instruction information from the first control means. 2IW12b for second production control CPU012IW120b) and monitoring means for monitoring the power supplied to the second control means and notifying the second control means (e.g., monitoring the power supplied to the second production control board 012IW12b, and when the power supply voltage is less than a predetermined value (e.g., +8V), a power supply monitoring circuit 099IW127 that outputs a power off signal to the second production control CPU012IW120b. ), and storage means (for example, backup data memories 099IW210A to 210D of the backup memory board 099IW14) capable of retaining stored contents even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, and the second control means executes different start-up processing in response to a notification from the monitoring means at the start of control (for example, if a power-off signal is input from the power monitoring circuit 099IW127 at the start of control, the start of control waits until the input of the power-off signal stops. Then, the second effect control CPU012IW120b executes the processing of steps 099IWS001 and 099IWS002.On the other hand, when the power supply disconnection signal is not input from the power monitoring circuit 099IW127 at the time of control start, without waiting for the start of control, the log information including the acquired date and time information as the system reset date and time of the second effect control board 012IW12b is stored in the log area.Second effect control CPU01 2IW 120b performs the processing of steps 099IWS001 and 099IWS003), when the monitoring means notifies that the power supply voltage of the supplied power supply has changed from less than a predetermined value to a value equal to or greater than the predetermined value (for example, when the power supply shutdown signal is input from the power supply monitoring circuit 099IW127 at the start of control, and then the input of the power supply shutdown signal is stopped), predetermined information (for example, Power-on date and time, setting change start date and time, setting confirmation start date and time, RAM clear date and time, etc.) are stored in the storage means (for example, the part where the second effect control CPU 012IW 120b executes processing such as step 099IWS 205, step 012IWS 802, step 012IWS 805, and step 012IWS 809). and a preparation effect executing means capable of executing a preparation effect (e.g., pending display advance notice preparation effect, timer preparation effect, etc.) for notifying execution of the suggestive effect before the suggestive effect is executed, wherein the suggestive effect comprises a first suggestive effect (e.g., pending display advance notice effect, timer preparation effect, etc.), a second suggestive effect (e.g., timer effect) different from the first suggestive effect (e.g., timer effect), and a third suggestive effect (e.g., chance-positive effect) different from the first and second suggestive effects. The preparation effect includes a first preparation effect (for example, a pending display notice preparation effect) for notifying that the first suggestion effect will be executed, and a second preparation effect (for example, a timer preparation effect) for foretelling that the second suggestion effect will be executed, and the third suggestion effect, the first preparation effect, and the second preparation effect can be executed in parallel during the same period (see FIGS. , a gaming machine in which the third suggestion effect is more likely to be executed when neither the first preparation effect nor the second preparation effect is executed (for example, see FIGS. 10-10).

According to such a configuration, optimal processing can be executed according to the situation. In addition, interest can be favorably maintained.

In addition, when the suggestive effect executing means capable of executing a suggestive effect suggesting that the suggestive effect will be controlled in an advantageous state, and the preparation effect executing means capable of executing a preparation effect that foretells that the suggestive effect will be executed before the suggestive effect is executed, are controlled by the second control means based on the instruction information from the first control means, the time until the initialization process is executed in response to the notification from the monitoring means at the start of control of the second control means that controls each effect executing means and the contents stored in the log area (when the control of the second control means starts) , contents that can be distinguished whether it is due to a system reset of the second control means or due to power-on or power failure recovery), etc., so that the time until the control start and the storage of the control history can be processed optimally.

Furthermore, as an example of a form of a gaming machine capable of executing optimum processing according to the situation and preferably maintaining interest, the gaming machine is controllable to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player, and is a suggestive effect executing means capable of executing a suggestive effect (such as a pending display notice effect, a timer effect, a chance notice effect, etc.) suggesting control to the advantageous state, and a preparation effect (for example, a pending display) that predicts that the suggestive effect will be executed before the suggestive effect is executed. The suggestion effect includes a first suggestion effect (e.g., a pending display notice effect), a second suggestion effect (e.g., a timer effect) different from the first suggestion effect, and a third suggestion effect (e.g., a chance notice effect) different from the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect, and the preparation effect includes a first preparation effect (e.g., a hold display notice preparation effect) for notifying that the first suggestion effect will be executed and a second suggestion effect. The third suggestion effect, the first preparation effect, and the second preparation effect can be executed in parallel during the same period (see FIGS. 10-11 (A1) and (A2)), and the third suggestion effect is more likely to be executed when neither the first preparation effect nor the second preparation effect is being executed than when either the first preparation effect or the second preparation effect is being executed (for example, FIG. 10-10). See) Gaming machines are included. An example of the form of these gaming machines will be described below as another form.

(Description of Characteristic Portion 153SG)
Next, the game machine in the characterizing portion 153SG of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-1 to 9-34.

First, FIG. 9-1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1 in the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. As shown in FIGS. 9-1 and 9-3, the pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into an outer frame 153SG001a formed in the shape of a vertically elongated rectangular frame, a game board (gauge board) 2 forming a game board surface, and a game machine frame (underframe) 153SG003 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area. In the game machine frame 153SG003, a glass door frame 153SG003a having a glass window is provided so as to be rotatable about the left side between a door open position where the front surface of the game machine frame 153SG003 is opened and a door closed position where the front surface is closed. It is designed to be able to see through the skill area.

The game machine frame 153SG003 can be opened by inserting a door key owned by a store clerk or the like into a lock (not shown) to unlock it.

The left game area 153SG002L is a game area where a game ball hit relatively weakly (left-handed) by operating the ball-hitting operation handle 30 flows down. It is a game area flowing down through 2C.

In addition, the left game area 153SG002L is provided with a general prize winning port 10, and the right game area 153SG002R is provided with a passage gate 41, a variable prize winning ball device 6B, a general prize winning port 10 and a special variable prize winning ball device 7 from upstream to downstream of the right game region 153SG002R. That is, a game ball flowing down the left game area 153SG002L can enter the first start winning opening formed by the general winning opening 10 and the winning ball device 6A, and a game ball flowing down the right gaming area 153SG002R can enter the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the general winning opening 10 and the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, and the passing gate 4. 1 can be passed.

As shown in FIG. 9-1, between the winning ball device 6A, the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 7, a plurality of obstacle nails 153SGK1 are arranged. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the left game area 153SG002L cannot win the second start winning opening or the big winning opening, and the game ball flowing down the right game area 153SG002R cannot win the first starting winning opening.

In addition, a first reserved memory display area 153SG005D and a second reserved memory display area 153SG005U are set on the left and right of the lower portion of the display area of the image display device 5 . In the first reserved memory display area 153SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 153SG005U, a reserved memory display for identifiably displaying the reserved memory number (special figure reserved memory number) of the variable display corresponding to the special figure game is performed.

As shown in FIGS. 9-2 and 9-3, the main board 11 in the characteristic portion 153SG of the present embodiment is housed in a board case 153SG201 configured to be openable by the first member and the second member. In addition, the main board 11 is provided with a lock switch 153SG051 for switching to a setting value change state in which the setting value of the pachinko game machine 1 can be changed, a setting switch 153SG052 functioning as a setting switch for changing setting values such as a jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) described later in the setting value change state, and an open sensor 153SG090 for detecting opening of the game machine frame 153SG003. Although the details will be described later, the setting value change state in the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment is also a state in which the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by a store clerk or the like (setting value confirmation state).

A setting switching main body provided with an operating portion such as the lock switch 153SG051 and the setting changeover switch 153SG052 that can be operated by the player is accommodated in the board case 153SG201 together with the main board 11, and the lock switch 153SG051 and the setting changeover switch 153SG052 are formed on the back surface of the board case 153SG201 so that they can be operated without opening the board case 153SG201. It is exposed on the rear side through an opening.

Since the substrate case 153SG201 having the lock switch 153SG051 and the setting changeover switch 153SG052 is provided on the back of the pachinko game machine 1, it is extremely difficult to operate when the game machine frame 153SG003 is closed. Further, since the lock switch 153SG051 requires operation of a setting key owned by a game arcade clerk or the like, it can be operated only by the clerk who possesses the setting key. In addition, the lock switch 153SG051 is also a switch capable of switching between ON and OFF, which will be described later, by means of a setting key. In the characterizing part 153SG of the present embodiment, the door key and the setting key are separate keys, but one key may be used for both.

A display monitor 153SG029 capable of displaying set values and base values, which will be described later, is arranged on the board case 153SG201. The display monitor 153SG029 is connected to the main substrate 11 and arranged above the substrate case 153SG201. That is, the display monitor 153SG029 is arranged in front of the main board 11 in the board case 153SG201 when visually recognizing it. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the frame 153SG003 for the game machine is not opened, the front when viewing the main board 11 is the front when viewing the back side of the game board 2 with the frame 153SG003 for the game machine opened, and is different from the front of the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加However, the front when viewing the main board 11 and the front of the pachinko game machine 1 may be common.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-1 and 9-2, at a predetermined position (for example, the lower left position of the game area) of the game board 2 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characterizing part 153SG of the present embodiment, a first special symbol display device 153SG004A capable of executing variable display of the first special symbol, a second special symbol display device 153SG004B capable of variable display of the second special symbol, and a first reservation capable of displaying the number of first reserved memories. Display device 153SG025A, second reservation display device 153SG025B capable of displaying second reservation memory number, normal design display device 153SG020 capable of executing variable display of normal design, normal design reservation display device 153SG025C capable of displaying normal design reservation memory number, round display device 153SG131 capable of displaying the number of rounds (jackpot type) of the jackpot game during the jackpot game, high base state (time reduction) A game information display unit 153SG200 is provided in which a right hitting lamp 153SG132 that lights in a game state in which a game ball is hit toward the right game area 153SG002R, such as a state) or a jackpot game state, a probability variable lamp 153SG133 that lights in a probability variable state, and a time reduction lamp 153SG134 that lights in a high base state (time reduction state) are collectively arranged.

Each of the first special symbol display device 153SG004A and the second special symbol display device 153SG004B is composed of an 8-segment LED. Further, in the first special symbol display device 153SG004A and the second special symbol display device 153SG004B, when the variable display result of the special symbol is a loss or a small hit, the variable display result can be derived and displayed by a common combination.

In the variable display of the first special symbol, when the variable display result becomes a big win, the first special symbol display device 153SG004A can display the variable display result and the derivation display with two kinds of big win symbols (a combination of lit LEDs) for each big win type. In addition, when the variable display result becomes a big hit in the variable display of the second special symbol, the second special symbol display device 153SG004B can display the variable display result and derivation with two kinds of big win symbols (a combination of lit LEDs) for each big win type.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 153SG of the present embodiment, the jackpot symbols that can be derived and displayed are all different between the first special symbol display device 153SG004A and the second special symbol display device 153SG004B, but the jackpot symbols that can be derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 153SG004A and the jackpot symbols that can be derived and displayed by the second special symbol display device 153SG004B overlap at least a part. You may have

The first suspension display 153SG025A and the second suspension display 153SG025B each have four segments of LEDs arranged in parallel in the horizontal direction. In the first suspension display 153SG025A and the second suspension display 153SG025B, if the number of suspension memories is one, only the LED at the left end lights up, and as the number of suspension memories increases, the second LED from the left, the third from the left, and the fourth LED from the left sequentially light up. Then, each time the variable display is executed, the LED in the reserve display corresponding to the variable display decreases (is consumed), and is turned off in a predetermined shift direction (toward the left in the characteristic portion 153SG of the present embodiment).

In addition, in the characteristic part 153SG of the present embodiment, when both the first special figure reservation memory and the second special figure reservation memory exist, the variable display based on the second special figure reservation memory is preferentially executed. For this reason, for example, when there is one first special figure pending memory and two second special figure pending memories exist (only the LED at the left end of the first pending indicator 153SG025A is lit, and the left two LEDs of the second pending indicator 153SG25B are lit), after the second special figure pending memory becomes 0 by executing the variable display based on the second special figure pending memory, it is variable based on the first special figure pending memory. display is performed.

Also, the round indicator 153SG131 is composed of five segments (LEDs). Incidentally, as the jackpot types in the characterizing part 153SG of the present embodiment, three jackpot types are provided: a jackpot A that is a 5-round jackpot, a jackpot B that is a 10-round jackpot, and a jackpot C that is a 15-round jackpot.

A control signal transmitted from the main board 11 toward the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15 . The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, a effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control commands include, for example, display control commands used to control image display operations in the image display device 5, audio control commands used to control audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and LED control commands used to control lighting operations of the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs.

Note that the effect control board 12 in the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment includes a first movable body 153SG321 and a second movable body 153SG322 that can move between the respective origin position and the effect position during variable display, an origin detection sensor 153SG331 that can detect that the first movable body 153SG321 is positioned at the origin position of the first movable body 153SG321, and the second movable body 153. An origin detection sensor 153SG332 capable of detecting that the SG322 is positioned at the origin position of the second movable body 153SG322 is connected.

FIG. 9-4(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the effect control command used in the characteristic portion 153SG in this embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, where the first byte indicates MODE (class of command) and the second byte indicates EXT (type of command). The leading bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "1", and the leading bit of EXT data is set to "0". The command form shown in FIG. 9-4(A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Also, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals that make up the control command may be one, or three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 9-4 (A), the command 8001H is the first variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 153SG004A. Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 153SG004B. The command 81XXH is a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern (variation time) such as a decorative pattern variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R in the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special design in the special game. Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value that is arbitrarily set according to the contents of instructions by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data are set according to the specified variation pattern.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command, and is an effect control command that designates variable display results such as special symbols and decorative symbols. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (B), different EXT data is set according to the determination result (predetermined result) as to whether the variable display result is "loss", "big hit", or "small hit", and the determination result (jackpot type determination result) as to which of a plurality of types the jackpot type should be when the variable display result is "big hit".

In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 9-4(B), command 8C00H is a first variable display result specification command indicating a predetermined result that the variable display result is "no". The command 8C01H is a second variable display result specifying command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot A" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot B" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot C" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result specification command for notifying a pre-determined result that the variable display result will be a "minor win".

The command 8F00H is a pattern confirmation command that designates stoppage (confirmation) of the decorative patterns in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the image display device 5 . The command 95XXH is a game state designation command that designates the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. In the game state designation command, different EXT data are set according to the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, the command 9500H is the first game state designation command corresponding to the game state (low base state, normal state) in which time reduction control is not performed, and the command 9501H is the second game state designation command corresponding to the game state (high base state, time reduction state) in which time reduction control is performed.

The command 96XXH is an error (abnormality) designation command that designates the type of error (abnormality) that has occurred and the type of error (abnormality) that has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1 . In the error (abnormality) designation command, for example, by setting EXT data corresponding to each error (abnormality), it is possible to specify which error (abnormality) occurrence is determined on the side of the performance control board 12, and the occurrence of the specified error (abnormality) is notified by error notification processing described later.

The command A0XXH is a win start designation command (also referred to as "fanfare command") for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of the big win game state or the small win game state. The command A1XXH is a large winning opening open notification command for notifying that the large winning opening is open in the big winning game state or the small winning game state. The command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command for a large winning opening that notifies that the large winning opening changes from the open state to the closed state in the big winning game state or the small winning game state. The command A3XXH is a winning end designation command for designating the display of the performance image at the end of the big winning game state or the small winning game state.

In the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result or the jackpot type determination result. Alternatively, in the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result notification command. In the notification command during the opening of the large winning opening and the notification command after opening the large winning opening, different EXT data are set corresponding to the number of rounds executed (for example, "1" to "15") in the big winning game state or the small winning game state.

Command B100H is a first start winning designation command for notifying that the first starting condition for executing the special game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 153SG004A is satisfied based on the fact that the game ball passing through (entering) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the start winning (first start winning) is generated. Command B200H is a second starting winning designation command for notifying that the second starting condition for executing the special game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 153SG004B is established based on the game ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B being detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) being generated.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved storage number, in order to display the number of special figure reserved storage so that it can be specified on the image display device 5 or the like. Command C2XXH is a second pending storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure pending storage number, in order to display the number of special figure pending storage so as to be identifiable on the image display device 5 or the like. The first reserved storage number notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when the first starting opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first starting winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied, for example. The second reserved memory number notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when the second starting opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening and the second starting condition is established, for example. In addition, the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command may be transmitted corresponding to the start of execution of the special figure game when either the first start condition or the second start condition is established (when the number of reserved memories is reduced).

Instead of the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command, a total reserved storage number notification command for notifying the total reserved storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total pending storage number notification command may be used to report an increase (or decrease) in the total pending storage number.

The command C4XXH and the command C6XXH are effect control commands (winning determination result specification commands) indicating the content of the winning determination result. Among them, the command C4XXH is a symbol specifying command indicating whether or not the variable display result will be a "big win" and the judgment result of the big win type (probability variation, non-probability variation, etc.) as a result of determination at the time of winning. Also, the command C6XXH is a variation category command indicating whether the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination is a variation pattern of "non-reach", "super reach", and "others" as a result of determination at the time of winning.

The command D0XXH is a set value designation command for designating a newly set set value from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (the effect control CPU 120). The command E101H is a hot start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started without clearing the contents of the RAM 102 (that power has been restored, also called hot start). The command E102H is a cold start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started after clearing the contents of the RAM 102 (cold start).

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing game control programs, fixed data, etc., a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 for providing a work area for game control, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 for executing control operations by executing the game control program, and a random number circuit 10 for updating numerical data indicating random numbers independently of the CPU 103. 4, an I/O (Input/Output port) 105, and a real-time clock (RTC) 106 capable of outputting time information.

As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101, thereby executing processing for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. At this time, the CPU 103 reads out fixed data from the ROM 101, and the CPU 103 writes various variable data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores them in a variable data write operation. 5, a transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 is also performed.

FIG. 9-5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 9-5, in the characteristic portion 153SG of this embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, in addition to the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, the random number MR4 for determining the normal figure display result, and the random number MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4. Random numbers other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. These random numbers MR1 to MR5 may be counted by software update using different random counters in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. FIG. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100 or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100 . Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

In this embodiment, each random number value MR1 to MR5 is used as a value within the range shown in FIG. 9-5, but the present invention is not limited to this.

FIG. 9-6 shows variation patterns in this embodiment. In this embodiment, a plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance for each of the cases in which the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is 'non-reach' and 'reach' among the cases where the variable display result is 'loss', and also for the case where the variable display result is 'big win'. In addition, one variation pattern is prepared in advance in response to a case where the variable display result is a "minor hit". A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "lost" and the variable display mode of the decoration pattern is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach loss variation pattern"), and the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss" and the variable display mode of the decoration symbol is "reach" is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach loss variation pattern"). Also, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss". A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "big hit" is called a big hit variation pattern. A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "small hit" is called a small hit variation pattern.

The jackpot variation pattern and the reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a normal reach reach performance is executed, and a super reach variation pattern in which a super reach performance such as super reach α and super reach β is executed. In the present embodiment, only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of normal reach variation patterns such as normal reach α, normal reach β, . . . may be provided as in super reach. Also, as for the super reach variation patterns, three or more super reach variation patterns such as super reach α, super reach β, and super reach γ may be provided.

As shown in FIG. 9-6, the special figure fluctuation time of the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of normal reach in the characteristic part 153SG of the present embodiment is executed is set shorter than the super reach α and super reach β which are the super reach fluctuation patterns. In addition, regarding the special figure variation time of the super reach variation pattern in which the super reach effect such as super reach α and super reach β in the present embodiment is performed, the variation pattern in which the super reach effect of super reach β is performed is set longer than the variation pattern in which the super reach effect of super reach α is performed.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the variable display result is set in the order of super reach β, super reach α, and normal reach so that the degree of expectation for big hit becomes higher in the order of "big hit". Therefore, in the normal reach variation pattern and the super reach variation pattern, the longer the variation time, the higher the degree of expectation for big win.

In the characteristic part 153SG of the present embodiment, as will be described later, the types of these fluctuation patterns are determined first, such as the type of non-reach, the type of normal reach, the type of super reach, etc. Instead of determining the variation pattern to be executed from the variation pattern belonging to the determined type after determining the variation pattern belonging to the determined type, it is determined using only the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination without determining these types. For example, in addition to the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random value for determining the type of variation pattern is provided, and the type of the variation pattern is first determined from the random value for determining the type of variation pattern. Then, the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type.

Further, in the characteristic portion 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-6, the variation content (effect content) is determined in advance for each variation pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this, and even if the same variation pattern is used, the variation content (effect content) may differ according to the set value. For example, in the case of the variation pattern PA2-1 of losing the normal reach, when the set value is 1, the variation pattern is the loss of the normal reach, when the set value is 2, the variation pattern is the loss of the non-ready reach by executing the pseudo continuous performance twice, and when the set value is 3, the variation pattern is the loss of the super reach by performing the pseudo continuous performance three times, and so on.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes programs read from the ROM 101, and uses the RAM 102 as a work area to execute various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, the CPU 103 can generate all of various random numbers used on the main substrate 11 side by executing a random number generating program.

The ROM 101 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data and the like used for controlling the progress of the game in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. In addition, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main substrate 11, a variation pattern table storing a plurality of variation patterns as variation modes of each symbol in variable display such as special symbols and normal symbols.

The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 9-7 (A), the second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 9-7 (B), the big hit type determination table shown in FIG. 9-8 (A) (for the first special symbol), the big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. , a normal map display result determination table (not shown), a normal map fluctuation pattern determination table (not shown), and the like are included.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the characteristic portion 153SG of the present embodiment is configured such that the probability of winning a big hit (ball output rate) changes according to the set value. More specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing to be described later, by using a display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the winning probability of the big hit (ball output rate) is changed. The setting value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, and 6 is the highest ball payout rate, and the smaller the value is in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the ball payout rate is. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage for the player is the highest, and the lower the value is in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the advantage is. In other words, the set value of 6, which is the largest value, is the most disadvantageous value for the game hall side, and the smaller values in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1 are more advantageous to the game hall side.

FIGS. 9-7(A) and 9-7(B) are explanatory diagrams showing the display result determination table. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with MR1 is set for each set value. In the characteristic part 153SG of the present embodiment, separate display result determination tables are used for the first special figure and the second special figure, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a common display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

As shown in FIG. 9-7 (A), when the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33094 are assigned to " Minor wins are assigned, and other numerical ranges are assigned to losers. In addition, when the game state is the variable probability state, among the hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to the ``big hit'', 32767 to 33094 are assigned to the ``minor hit'', and other numerical ranges are assigned to the ``loss''.

As shown in FIG. 9-7 (B), when the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33421 are assigned to " Minor wins are assigned, and other numerical ranges are assigned to losers. In addition, when the game state is the variable probability state, among the hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to the ``big hit'', 32767 to 33421 are assigned to the ``minor hit'', and other numerical ranges are assigned to the ``loss''.

As shown in FIG. 9-7 (A), when the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1253 are assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33094 are assigned to " Minor wins are assigned, and other numerical ranges are assigned to losers. In addition, when the game state is the variable probability state, among the hit determination values, 1020 to 1383 are assigned to the ``big hit'', 32767 to 33094 are assigned to the ``minor hit'', and other numerical ranges are assigned to the ``loss''.

As shown in FIG. 9-7 (B), when the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1253 are assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33421 are assigned to " Minor wins are assigned, and other numerical ranges are assigned to losers. In addition, when the game state is the probability variable state, among the hit determination values, 1020 to 1383 are assigned to the ``big hit'', 32767 to 33421 are assigned to the ``minor hit'', and other numerical ranges are assigned to the ``loss''.

As shown in FIG. 9-7 (A), when the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1272 are assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33094 are assigned to " Minor wins are assigned, and other numerical ranges are assigned to losers. In addition, when the game state is the probability variable state, among the hit determination values, 1020 to 1429 are assigned to the ``big hit'', 32767 to 33094 are assigned to the ``minor hit'', and other numerical ranges are assigned to the ``loss''.

As shown in FIG. 9-7 (B), when the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit determination values compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination, 1020 to 1272 are assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33421 are assigned to " Minor wins are assigned, and other numerical ranges are assigned to losers. In addition, when the game state is the probability variable state, among the hit determination values, 1020 to 1429 are assigned to the ``big hit'', 32767 to 33421 are assigned to the ``minor hit'', and other numerical ranges are assigned to the ``loss''.

As shown in FIG. 9-7 (A), when the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1292 are assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33094 are assigned to " Minor wins are assigned, and other numerical ranges are assigned to losers. In addition, when the game state is the variable probability state, among the hit determination values, 1020 to 1487 are assigned to the ``big hit'', 32767 to 33094 are assigned to the ``minor hit'', and other numerical ranges are assigned to the ``loss''.

As shown in FIG. 9-7 (B), when the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1292 are assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33421 are assigned to " Minor wins are assigned, and other numerical ranges are assigned to losers. In addition, when the game state is the probability variable state, among the hit determination values, 1020 to 1487 are assigned to the ``big hit'', 32767 to 33421 are assigned to the ``minor hit'', and other numerical ranges are assigned to the ``loss''.

As shown in FIG. 9-7 (A), when the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1317 are assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33094 are assigned to " Minor wins are assigned, and other numerical ranges are assigned to losers. In addition, when the game state is the variable probability state, among the hit determination values, 1020 to 1556 are assigned to the ``big hit'', 32767 to 33094 are assigned to the ``minor hit'', and other numerical ranges are assigned to the ``loss''.

As shown in FIG. 9-7 (B), when the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1317 are assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33421 are assigned to " Minor wins are assigned, and other numerical ranges are assigned to losers. In addition, when the game state is the variable probability state, among the hit determination values, 1020 to 1556 are assigned to the ``big hit'', 32767 to 33421 are assigned to the ``minor hit'', and other numerical ranges are assigned to the ``loss''.

As shown in FIG. 9-7 (A), when the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33094 are assigned to " Minor wins are assigned, and other numerical ranges are assigned to losers. In addition, when the game state is the probability variable state, among the hit determination values, 1020 to 1674 are assigned to the ``big hit'', 32767 to 33094 are assigned to the ``minor hit'', and other numerical ranges are assigned to the ``loss''.

As shown in FIG. 9-7 (B), when the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33421 are assigned to " Minor wins are assigned, and other numerical ranges are assigned to losers. In addition, when the game state is the probability variable state, among the hit determination values, 1020 to 1674 are assigned to the ``big hit'', 32767 to 33421 are assigned to the ``minor hit'', and other numerical ranges are assigned to the ``loss''.

As described above, in each display result determination table, when the game state is the variable probability state (high probability state), more judgment values than when the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state) are assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit". As a result, in the variable probability state (high probability state) in which the variable probability control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the probability that the special figure display result is "jackpot" when it is in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state) is determined to be controlled to the jackpot game state (in the feature part 153SG of the present embodiment, 1/300 when the set value is 1, 1/280 when the set value is 2, 1/260 when the set value is 3, and the set value is 4 In the case of 1/240, 1/220 when the set value is 5, and 1/200 when the set value is 6), the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as "jackpot" to the big hit game state is higher (In the feature part 153SG of the present embodiment, when the set value is 1, 1/200, when the set value is 2, 1/180, when the set value is 3, 1/160, and the set value is 4. 1/140 for , 1/120 for a set value of 5, and 1/100 for a set value of 6). That is, in each display result determination table, when the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 is the variable probability state (high probability state), the determination value is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control to the big win game state so that the probability of determining to control to the big win game state is higher than when it is the normal state or the time saving state.

In addition, in the characteristic part 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-7, the magnification of the jackpot probability in the variable probability state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time-saving state varies depending on each setting value (for example, if the setting value is 1, the magnification of the jackpot probability in the probability-variable state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time-saving state is 1.5 times. 56 times, and if the set value is 3, the multiplier of the jackpot probability in the variable probability state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the short-time state is 1.625 times)).

In addition, in each first special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or set value, the determination value is assigned so that the probability of determining that the special figure display result is controlled to the small winning game state as the ``small win'' has the same value. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (A), in the first special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or set value, the special figure display result is set to "small hit" and controlled to the small hit game state. The probability of being determined is set to 1/200.

On the other hand, in each second special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or the set value, the determination value is assigned so that the probability of determining the special figure display result as a ``small win'' and controlling it to the small win game state is the same value different from the first special figure display result determination table. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (B), in the second special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or set value, the special figure display result is set to "small hit" and controlled to the small hit game state. The probability of being determined is set to 1/100.

In addition, in the characteristic part 153SG of the present embodiment, the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be a "small hit" regardless of the setting value and is controlled to the small winning game state is the same probability. Furthermore, in the characteristic part 153SG of the present embodiment, the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be a "small hit" according to the variable special figure and is controlled to the small winning game state is exemplified.

Here, focusing on the numerical range of the hit determination value assigned to the "big hit" or "small hit" in each display result determination table, in the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set as the common numerical range of the big hit determination value for determining the big hit regardless of the set value.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit determination value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "big hit").On the other hand, when the set value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value is set to the range of 1238 to 1253 for the set value 2, the range of 1238 to 1272 for the set value 3, the range of 1238 to 1292 for the set value 4, the range of 1238 to 1317 for the set value 5, and the range of 1238 to 1346 for the set value 6.

That is, in the characteristic portion 153SG of the present embodiment, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, if the setting value is 1, among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to the "jackpot". A number within the range plus the number range is assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

Therefore, the big win probability is increased by setting 1020 as a reference value (big win reference value) for the big win determination value and increasing the non-common numerical value range continuing to the common numerical value range as the set value increases.

In addition, in the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining the small hit regardless of the set value. Here, when the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value as described above, while the small hit determination value is a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value in the case of the set value 6 (1020 to 1346). Since it is set to the range of 33094, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the big hit determination value which changes according to each set value.

Next, in the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values is set as the common numerical range of the jackpot determination values for determining the big win regardless of the set value.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit determination value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "big hit").On the other hand, when the set value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1347 is set as the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value is set to the range of 1347 to 1383 for the set value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the set value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for the set value 4, the range of 1347 to 1556 for the set value 5, and the range of 1347 to 1674 for the set value 6.

That is, in the characteristic portion 153SG of the present embodiment, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the variable probability state, if the setting value is 1, among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "jackpot". A number within the added range is assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1347 as the reference as the set value increases.

Therefore, the big win probability is increased by setting 1020 as a reference value (big win reference value) for the big win determination value and increasing the non-common numerical value range continuing to the common numerical value range as the set value increases.

In addition, in the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the variable probability state, the range from 32767 to 33094 among the hit determination values is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining the small hit regardless of the set value, as in the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. Here, when the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, 1020 to 1674 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value as described above, while the small hit determination value is set to 32767 to 32767 in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value (1020 to 1674) in the case of the set value 6. Since it is set within the range of 33094, it is possible to prevent the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big hit determination value which varies according to each set value.

In the second special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set as the common numerical range of the big win determination values for determining the big win regardless of the set value.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit determination value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "big hit").On the other hand, when the set value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value is set to the range of 1238 to 1253 for the set value 2, the range of 1238 to 1272 for the set value 3, the range of 1238 to 1292 for the set value 4, the range of 1238 to 1317 for the set value 5, and the range of 1238 to 1346 for the set value 6.

That is, in the characteristic portion 153SG of the present embodiment, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, when the setting value is 1, among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to the "jackpot". A number within the range plus the number range is assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

Therefore, the big win probability is increased by setting 1020 as a reference value (big win reference value) for the big win determination value and increasing the non-common numerical value range continuing to the common numerical value range as the set value increases.

In addition, in the second special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining the small hit regardless of the set value. Here, when the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value as described above, while the small hit determination value is a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value in the case of the set value 6 (1020 to 1346). Since the range is set to 33421, it is possible to prevent the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big hit determination value which varies according to each set value.

Next, in the second special figure display result determination table when the game state is the variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values is set as the common numerical range of the jackpot determination values for determining the big win regardless of the set value.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit determination value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "big hit").On the other hand, when the set value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1347 is set as the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value is set to the range of 1347 to 1383 for the set value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the set value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for the set value 4, the range of 1347 to 1556 for the set value 5, and the range of 1347 to 1674 for the set value 6.

That is, in the characteristic portion 153SG of the present embodiment, in the display result determination table of FIG. 2 when the gaming state is the variable probability state, if the set value is 1, among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "jackpot". A number within that range is assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1347 as the reference as the set value increases.

Therefore, the big win probability is increased by setting 1020 as a reference value (big win reference value) for the big win determination value and increasing the non-common numerical value range continuing to the common numerical value range as the set value increases.

In addition, in the second special figure display result determination table when the game state is the variable probability state, the range from 32767 to 33421 among the hit determination values is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining the small hit regardless of the set value, as in the second special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. Here, when the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, 1020 to 1674 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value as described above, while the small hit determination value is set to 32767 to 32767 in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value (1020 to 1674) in the case of the set value 6. Since the range is set to 33421, it is possible to prevent the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big hit determination value which varies according to each set value.

As described above, in the characteristic portion 153SG of the present embodiment, in each display result determination table, regardless of the game state and setting value, the judgment value included in a continuous numerical range of 1 consisting of a common numerical range or a common numerical range and a non-common numerical range based on the hit judgment value of 1020 is set as the numerical range of the big hit judgment value, and regardless of the gaming state and the setting value, the judgment value included in the continuous numerical range of 1 (common numerical range) based on the hit judgment value of 32767. The variable display result is determined by using the value as the numerical range of the small hit determination value.

Furthermore, in each of these display result determination tables, when the variation special figure is the same, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is the same regardless of the game state (the number of determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value is the same). In addition, the number of determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value differs depending on whether the variable special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure (the number of determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value in the first special figure display result determination table is 328, while the number of determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value in the second special figure display result determination table is 655, which is about double). 2767 is set as a reference value (small hit reference value).

Furthermore, as described above, in each game state, when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be a "jackpot" and the control to the big win game state is lowest, and the higher the value of the setting value is, the higher the probability that the special figure display result is to be controlled to the "jackpot" and the big win game state. Set value 2>Set value 1).

In other words, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value set at that time, and when the value of MR1 coincides with one of the hit determination values corresponding to the big win, decides that the special symbol is a big win (big win A to big win C). Also, when MR1 coincides with one of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hit, it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit. That is, the winning of the big win and the small win is determined with the probability corresponding to the set value. The "probability" shown in FIG. 9-7 indicates the probability (percentage) of a big win and the probability (percentage) of a small win. Determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control to a big winning game state, but it also means determining whether or not to make the stop symbol on the first special symbol display device 153SG004A or the second special symbol display device 153SG004B a big winning symbol. Determining whether or not to make a small win means determining whether or not to control to a small winning game state, but it also means determining whether or not the stop symbol in the first special symbol display device 153SG004A or the second special symbol display device 153SG004B is to be a small winning symbol.

In addition, in the characteristic part 153SG of the present embodiment, a total of 6 setting values 1 to 6 are provided as setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more.

9-8(A) and 9-8(B) are explanatory diagrams showing a big hit type determination table (for the first special symbol) and a big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in the ROM 101. Among these, FIG. 9-8 (A) is a table for determining the jackpot type using the reserved memory based on the game ball winning the first start winning hole (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed). In addition, FIG. 9-8 (B) is a table for determining the jackpot type using the reserved memory based on the game ball winning the second start winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed).

The big win type determination table is a table referred to for determining the big win type to any one of the big wins A to C based on the winning type determination random number (MR2) when it is determined that the variable display result should be a big win pattern.

Here, the jackpot type in the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-9. In the characteristic part 153SG of the present embodiment, as the jackpot type, a jackpot A (also referred to as a non-probability variable jackpot) in which only time-saving control is executed after the jackpot game state ends and shifts to a low-probability-high base state, and a jackpot B or a jackpot C (also referred to as a probability-variable jackpot) in which high-probability control and time-saving control are executed after the jackpot game ends and shifts to a high-probability high base state are set.

The big win game state by 'big win A' is a normal open big win repeated five rounds (so-called 5 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player, and the big win game state by 'big win B' is a normal open big win repeatedly executed by 10 rounds (so-called 10 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player. Furthermore, the jackpot game state of the "jackpot C" is a normal open jackpot in which 15 rounds (so-called 15 rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated.

The time saving control executed after the end of the big win game state by the ``jackpot A'' ends when the special game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in the characterizing part 153SG of the present embodiment) or when the big win game state is entered before the special game is executed the predetermined number of times.

On the other hand, the high-precision control and time-saving control executed after the end of the big win game state of the big win B or big win C are continuously executed until the big win occurs again after the end of the big win game state. Therefore, when the big win generated again is the big win B or the big win C, the high-accuracy control and the time-saving control are executed again after the big win game state is ended, so that the big win game state is continuously generated without going through the normal state, which is a so-called continuous game state.

In addition, in the characteristic part 153SG of the present embodiment, three types of jackpot A to jackpot C are provided as jackpot types, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or less jackpot types or four or more jackpot types may be provided.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-8 (A), in the big hit type determination table (for the first special symbol), 0 to 99 in the range of 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 are assigned to the big hit A, 100 to 249 are assigned to the big hit B, and 250 to 299 are assigned to the big hit C. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 9-8 (B), in the big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol), 0 to 99 in the range of 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 are assigned to the big hit A, 100 to 199 are assigned to the big hit B, and 200 to 299 are assigned to the big hit C. That is, in the characterizing part 153SG of the present embodiment, while the determination ratio of the jackpot type is different depending on whether the winning hole into which the game ball has won is the first start winning prize port or the second start winning prize port, the jackpot type is determined by a common ratio regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加

In addition, in the characteristic part 153SG of the present embodiment, the jackpot type is determined using MR2, which is a random number value for determining the jackpot type, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type may be determined using MR1, which is a random number value for determining the special figure display result.

In addition, the ROM 101 also stores a variation pattern determination table for determining a variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the variation pattern is determined as one of the plurality of types described above according to the pre-determined result.

Specifically, as the variation pattern determination table, a big win variation pattern determination table used when it is predetermined to make the variable display result "big win", a big win variation pattern determination table used when it is predetermined to make the variable display result "small hit", and a loss variation pattern determination table used when it is predetermined to make the variable display result "loss" are prepared in advance.

In the big-win variation pattern determination table, a predetermined random value is assigned as a determination value to each of the variation patterns of the normal-reach big-hit variation pattern (PB1-1), the super-reach α-jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and the super-reach β-jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3).

As shown in FIGS. 9-10(A) and 9-10(B), as the jackpot variation pattern determination table, a jackpot variation pattern determination table (for jackpot A) used when the jackpot type is jackpot A and a jackpot variation pattern determination table (for jackpot B and jackpot C) used when the jackpot types are for jackpot B and jackpot C are prepared in advance, and these jackpot variation pattern determination tables are prepared in advance. (for jackpot A) and for jackpot variation pattern determination tables (for jackpot B and jackpot C), each variation pattern of normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3) is assigned a predetermined random value as a determination value within the range that random value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take.

As shown in FIG. 9-10 (A), in the jackpot variation pattern determination table (for jackpot A), 1 to 400 in the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 are assigned to the variation pattern of the normal reach jackpot (PB1-1), 401 to 850 are assigned to the variation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 851 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot. are assigned to different fluctuation patterns (PB1-3).

As shown in FIG. 9-10 (B), in the jackpot variation pattern determination table (for jackpot B, jackpot C), 1 to 200 in the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 are assigned to the variation pattern of the normal reach jackpot (PB1-1), 201 to 550 are assigned to the variation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 551 to 997 are super. It is assigned to the reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3).

Further, in the small-hit variation pattern determination table, a predetermined random number is assigned as a determination value to the variation pattern of the small-hit variation pattern (PC1-1), out of the possible range of the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-10 (C), in the small hit variation pattern determination table, 0 to 997 out of the range 0 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 are assigned to the small hit variation pattern (PC1-1). Although only PC1-1 is provided as a small hit variation pattern in the characteristic portion 153SG of the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more variation patterns may be provided as small hit variation patterns.

In addition, the variation pattern determination table for loss includes a variation pattern determination table for loss A that is used when the number of pending memories is 1 or less in the low base state where the time saving control is not implemented, a variation pattern determination table for loss that is used when the total number of pending memories is 2 to 4 in the low base state, a variation pattern determination table C for loss that is used when the total number of pending memories is 5 to 8 in the low base state, and a high base state in which the game state is a time saving control. A deviation pattern determination table D used in the case of is prepared in advance.

In the fluctuation pattern determination table for loss A, a predetermined random value is assigned as a judgment value from the range that the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern judgment can take to the fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss without shortening (PA1-1), the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3).

As shown in FIG. 9-11 (A), in the variation pattern determination table for loss A (for 1 or less total pending storage number in low base), 1 to 450 out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 are assigned to non-reach loss variation patterns (PA1-1), 451 to 700 are assigned to normal reach loss variation patterns (PA2-1), and 701 to 900 are super reach α. It is assigned to the deviation variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the deviation variation pattern (PA2-3) of super reach β.

In addition, in the loss variation pattern determination table B, a predetermined random value is assigned as a determination value from the range that the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take for the shortened non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-2) corresponding to the total number of retained memories of 2 to 4, the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-3).

As shown in FIG. 9-11 (B), in the variation pattern determination table B for loss (for 2 to 4 total pending memories in low base), 1 to 500 out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 are assigned to non-reach variation pattern (PA1-2), 501 to 700 are assigned to normal reach variation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 900 are super reach. α is assigned to the deviation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern (PA2-3) of super reach β deviation.

In addition, in the loss variation pattern determination table C, a predetermined random value is assigned as a determination value from the range that the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take for the shortened non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-3) corresponding to the total number of retained memories of 5 to 8, the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-3).

As shown in FIG. 9-11 (C), in the variation pattern determination table for loss C (for 5 or more total pending memories in low base), 1 to 550 out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 are assigned to non-reach loss variation patterns (PA1-3), 551 to 700 are assigned to normal reach loss variation patterns (PA2-1), and 701 to 900 are super reach α. It is assigned to the deviation variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the deviation variation pattern (PA2-3) of super reach β.

In addition, in the variation pattern determination table for deviation D, a predetermined random value is assigned as a determination value from the range that the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take for the shortened non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-4) corresponding to the time reduction control, the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), the super reach α deviation variation pattern (PA2-2), and the super reach β deviation variation pattern (PA2-3).

As shown in FIG. 9-11 (D), in the losing variation pattern determination table D (for high base medium), 1 to 550 out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach losing variation pattern (PA1-4), 551 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach losing variation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α losing variation pattern (PA2). -2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β deviation fluctuation pattern (PA2-3).

Thus, when using the fluctuation pattern determination tables A to D for loss, the ratio of determining the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the normal reach fluctuation pattern is set higher than the ratio of deciding the super reach fluctuation pattern. In addition, when using the fluctuation pattern determination tables for loss A to D, regardless of the variation pattern determination table, 701 to 900 of the judgment values are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α, and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β, respectively. I can.

In the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment, the determining ratio of the variation pattern of losing super reach α and the determining percentage of variation pattern of losing super reach β are completely the same among the set values as the variation pattern for losing. may be

In addition, in the characteristic part 153SG of the present embodiment, when the variable display result is a loss, the determination ratio of the super reach variation pattern is the same, but the present invention is not limited to this. When the variable display result is a loss, the determination ratio of all the variation patterns of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach may be the same, or only the determination ratio of any one of the non-reach and normal reach may be the same.

The variation pattern (PA1-2) of non-reach deviation is shorter than the variation pattern (PA1-1) of non-reach deviation without shortening, and the variation pattern (PA1-3) of non-reach deviation is shorter than the variation pattern (PA1-2) (see FIG. 9-6). Therefore, when the number of reserved memories increases, a non-reach-loose variation pattern with a short fluctuation time is determined, making it easier to digest the reserved memories, and by starting winning when the number of reserved memories reaches the upper limit number of 4, it becomes difficult to generate useless starting prizes in which no reserved memory is performed. It is possible to prevent the loss of interest in the game due to non-execution of the display.

Further, in the characteristic part 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9-11 (A) to 9-11 (C), the variation pattern is determined using a different variation pattern determination table for losing according to the total pending storage number. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When performing variable display, a variation pattern may be determined using a different variation pattern determination table for losing according to the number of reserved memories of the second special symbol.

Further, in the characteristic part 153SG of the present embodiment, whether or not to execute the ready-to-win effect and which ready-to-win effect is to be executed for each determined variation pattern are exemplified in a one-to-one correspondence.

The RAM 102 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 9-1 may be a backup RAM partially or wholly backed up by a backup power supply created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped, the contents of part or all of the RAM 102 are preserved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot supply power). In particular, at least data (such as a special process flag) corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be saved in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the game is restored after a power failure or the like. Data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress of the game.

Next, the display of the display monitor 153SG029 in the characteristic portion 153SG of this embodiment will be described.

As shown in FIG. 9-12(A), the display monitor 153SG029 includes a first display section 153SG029A, a second display section 153SG029B, a third display section 153SG029C, and a fourth display section 153SG029D. Each of the first display portion 153SG029A to the fifth display portion 153SG29E is composed of 7 segments composed of 7 segments that draw the figure "8" and dots arranged on the lower right side of the 7 segments. These first display section 153SG029A to fifth display section 153SG29E are capable of lighting and blinking in various colors, such as red, blue, green, yellow, and white. It is also possible to display different colors or a so-called rainbow while changing these colors in an extremely short period.

In addition, the display control of the display monitor 153SG029 in the characteristic part 153SG of the present embodiment is executed using the area outside the test object in the entire area of the ROM 101 and the RAM 102 when the pachinko game machine 1 is tested.

As shown in FIGS. 9-12(B) and 9-12(C), the display monitor 153SG029 displays base L which is the base value (real-time value during measurement) calculated in the normal state (low-probability-low base state) for every 6000 out-outs in all game states, base 1 which is the base value calculated in the normal state (low-probability-low base state) for every 6000 first outs in all game states, and second outs in all game states. It is possible to display the base 2 which is the base value calculated in the normal state (low probability/low base state) for every 6000 balls and the base 3 which is the base value calculated in the normal state (low probability/low base state) for every 3rd out 6000 balls in the whole game state. Base L, Base 1, Base 2, and Base 3 are displayed in percentages on display monitor 153SG029.

When the base L is actually displayed on the display monitor 153SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display section 153SG029A and "L." is displayed on the second display section 153SG029B in order to display "bL." It is displayed in G029D. When the base 1 is displayed on the display monitor 153SG029, "b" is displayed in the first display section 153SG029A and "1." is displayed in the second display section 153SG029B to display the abbreviation "b1." 029D. When the base 2 is displayed on the display monitor 153SG029, "b" is displayed in the first display section 153SG029A and "2." is displayed in the second display section 153SG029B to display the abbreviation "b2." 029D. Further, when the base 3 is displayed on the display monitor 153SG029, "b" is displayed in the first display section 153SG029A and "3." is displayed in the second display section 153SG029B to display the abbreviation "b3." 029D.

In the display monitor 153SG029 of the present embodiment, the main substrate 11 (CPU 103) controls to sequentially display these base L, base 1, base 2, and base 3. FIG. For example, the main substrate 11 performs control to switch the display of the display monitor 153SG029 in the order of base L→base 1→base 2→base 3 at intervals of 5 seconds. The base values displayed on the display monitor 153SG029 are displayed in different colors according to the set values set in the pachinko game machine 1. FIG. Specifically, when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "1", each base value on the display monitor 153SG029 is displayed in white, when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "2", each base value on the display monitor 153SG029 is displayed in blue, and when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "3", each base value on the display monitor 153SG029 is displayed. When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is "4", each base value on the display monitor 153SG029 is displayed in green. When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is "5", each base value on the display monitor 153SG029 is displayed in red. Displayed in purple. Therefore, the store clerk or the like of the game hall can identify the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 only by confirming the display color of the display monitor 153SG029 without executing the setting value change processing described later by the CPU 103 .

The RAM 122 mounted on the production control board 12 shown in FIG. 9-2 is provided with a production control data holding area 153SG190 as shown in FIG. The effect control data holding area 153SG190 shown in FIG. 9-13(A) includes a effect control flag setting portion 153SG191, a effect control timer setting portion 153SG192, a effect control counter setting portion 153SG193, and a effect control buffer setting portion 153SG194.

The effect control flag setting unit 153SG191 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose state can be updated according to the effect operation state such as the display state of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5 and the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11. - 特許庁For example, the effect control flag setting unit 153SG191 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an ON state or an OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting unit 153SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations such as display operations of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the effect control timer setting unit 153SG192 stores data indicating the timer value of each of a plurality of types of timers.

The production control counter setting unit 153SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various production operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit 153SG193 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters.

The effect control buffer setting unit 153SG194 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 153SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment, the data constituting the start winning reception command buffer 153SG194A as shown in FIG. The start winning reception command buffer 153SG194A has a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4") corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the first special figure reserved memory, and a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number "1-0") corresponding to the first special figure during the variable display. In addition, in the start winning reception command buffer 153SG194A, a storage area corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total reserved storage number of the second special figure reserved storage (area corresponding to buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4") and a storage area corresponding to the second special figure during variable display (area corresponding to buffer number "2-0") are provided. When there is a start winning to the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening, four commands of a starting opening winning designation command (first starting opening winning designation command or second starting opening winning designation command), a pattern designation command, a variation category designation command and a reserved memory number notification command (first reserved memory number notification command or second reserved memory number notification command) are transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 as one set. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure reservation memory and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure reservation memory in the reception command buffer 153SG194A at the time of start winning are secured with a storage area (entry) for storing separately the first special figure reservation memory and the second special figure reservation memory by associating these start entry winning designation command, symbol designation command, variation category designation command, and reservation number notification command.

The storage contents of these storage areas (entries) are shifted upward one by one as will be described later, when the start condition is satisfied and the variable display of the highest reserved memory (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") is started, and the memory contents of the buffer number "1-0" or buffer number "2-0" storing the contents of the reserved memory where the start condition is satisfied are cleared in the decoration pattern variation stop processing executed when the variable display is terminated.

Furthermore, in the start-winning reception command buffer 153SG194A in the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment, a storage area for a pending display flag in which a flag value corresponding to the display pattern (display mode) of the pending storage display is set in the later-described pre-reading advance notice setting process (FIG. 9-18) is secured for each storage area (entry).

In addition, when execution of the pending display notice effect is not determined in the pre-reading notice setting process described later, "0" corresponding to the display pattern of the normal pending memory display is stored in the pending display flag, so that the normal display mode (for example, white circle) is displayed in the first pending memory display area 153SG005D and the second pending memory display area 153SG005U. By setting "1" (square (◇)) or "2" (star (☆)) corresponding to the display pattern of the reserved memory display of mode (for example, square (◇) or star (☆)) or "3" (blue camera) or "4" (red camera) corresponding to the display pattern of the reserved memory display of the special mode (for example, blue or red camera), the retained memory display of a mode different from the normal display mode is displayed in the first retained memory display area 153SG005D and the second retained memory display area 153SG005D. It is displayed in a display area 153SG005U, and in the variable display corresponding to the reserved memory display, the possibility of a big win or super reach, and the high possibility of execution of a setting suggestion performance suggesting the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 are announced.

At the time of start winning to the first start winning opening, the command is stored from the beginning (the entry with the youngest buffer number) in the empty entry corresponding to the first special figure reservation storage of the start winning reception command buffer 153SG194A. store it. At the time of starting winning, from the starting opening winning designation command to the reservation storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, when the command is received, the starting opening winning designation command, the pattern designation command, the variation category designation command, and the reservation number notification command are stored in the storage areas respectively corresponding to the end "1" to "4" of the buffer number corresponding to the first special figure reservation storage or the second special figure reservation storage.

9-13(B), each time the variable display of decorative patterns is started, the command stored in the entry (entry of buffer number "1-0" or "2-0") corresponding to the suspended storage of the variable display that was completed immediately before is deleted, and the command stored in the entry (entry corresponding to the buffer number "1-1" or "2-1") corresponding to the suspended storage of the variable display to be started is deleted. The memory contents of entries after the pending memory of the starting variable display are shifted. For example, in the storage state shown in FIG. 9-13 (B), when the variable display of the decoration pattern of the first special figure reserved memory is completed, each command stored in the buffer number "0" is deleted, each command stored in the buffer number "1" is shifted to the buffer number "0", each command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number "2" is shifted to the area corresponding to the buffer number "1", and each command stored in the area corresponding to each of the buffer numbers "3" and "4" is It is shifted to areas corresponding to buffer numbers "2" and "3". Therefore, the buffer number "0" becomes an area (entry) for storing each command related to the pending storage that is being variably displayed at that time.

Next, the game control main processing in the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment will be described. 9-14 is a flow chart showing the game control main process executed by the CPU 103. FIG. In the game control main process, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (153SGSa001). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (153SGSa002). The initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.) register setting, and setting to make the RAM 102 accessible.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (107SGSa003) and whether the RAM 102 (backup RAM) is normal (107SGSa004). If the backup data is not stored (153SGSa003; N) or if the RAM 102 is not normal (153SGSa004; N), proceed to 153SGSa017. (153SGSa005).

If the set value stored in the RAM 102 is not one of 1 to 6 (153SGSa005; N), proceed to 153SGSa017. If the set value stored in the RAM 102 is any one of 1 to 6 (153SGSa005; Y), the set value being changed indicates that the set value change processing described later was being executed before the power interruption (power interruption occurred during execution of the set value change processing). It is determined whether or not the flag is set (153SGSa006). If the setting value changing flag is set (153SGSa006; Y), proceed to 153SGSa017, and if the setting value changing flag is not set, clear the RAM clear flag (153SGSa007) if the RAM clear flag indicating that the RAM clear processing described later has been executed is set, and check whether the clear switch is ON, that is, whether the pachinko game machine 1 has been started while the clear switch is being operated. It is determined whether or not (153SGSa008).

If the clear switch is ON (153SGSa008; Y), set the RAM clear flag and proceed to 153SGSa011 (153SGSa010). If the clear switch is OFF (153SGSa008; N), proceed to 153SGSa011 without executing 153SGSa010.

At 153SGSa011, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch 153SG051 is ON (153SGSa011). If the lock switch 153SG051 is ON (153SGSa011; Y), it is further determined whether or not the open sensor 153SG090 is ON (153SGSa012). When the open sensor 153SG090 is ON, that is, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started with the lock switch 153SG051 ON and the gaming machine frame 153SG003 opened (153SGSa012; Y), it is determined whether or not the RAM clear flag is set (153SGSa013a).

If the RAM clear flag is set (153SGSa013a; Y), set value change processing (153SGSa013b) for changing the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is executed to proceed to 153SGSa013d; Execute the set value confirmation process (153SGSa013c) and proceed to 153SGSa013d.

In the set value change process (153SGSa013b), the CPU 103 first displays the currently set set value on the display monitor 153SG029. Next, every time the setting switch 153SG052 is operated, the setting values are updated and displayed on the display monitor 153SG029. When the lock switch 153SG051 is turned off, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 153SG029 is updated and stored in the RAM 102, and a setting value designation command capable of specifying the setting value newly updated and stored in the RAM 102 is output to the performance control CPU 120. - 特許庁

Also, in the set value confirmation process (153SGSa013c), the CPU 103 displays the currently set set values on the display monitor 153SG029. Then, when the lock switch 153SG051 is turned off, the display of the set values on the display monitor 153SG029 is ended.

If the lock switch 153SG051 is OFF at 153SGSa011 (153SGSa011; N) or if the open sensor is OFF (153SGSa012; N), the process proceeds to 153SGSa013d without executing the processes of 153SGSa013a to 153SGSa013c.

At 153SGSa013d, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the RAM clear flag is set, that is, whether or not the RAM 102 is cleared when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started (RAM clear processing (153SGSa009) is executed) (153SGSa013d). If the RAM clear flag is set (153SGSa013d; Y), the RAM clear process (153SGSa013e) is executed and then the process proceeds to 153SGSa014.

In the RAM clearing process (153SGSa013e), the CPU 103 executes a process of setting "00H" to all addresses except the addresses storing the set values and the addresses storing (set) the RAM clear flag. That is, in the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in 153SGSa001 to 153SGSa013e and 153SGSa017 to 153SGSa021 described later, when there is no abnormality in the RAM 102, the contents of all addresses except the address where the setting value is stored and the address where the RAM clear flag is stored are cleared.

At 153SGSa014, the CPU 103 again determines whether or not the RAM clear flag is set (153SGSa014). If the RAM clear flag is set (153SGSa014; Y), proceed to 153SGSa022. If the RAM clear flag is not set (153SGSa014; N), restore processing is performed to return the internal state of the main substrate 11 to the state when the power supply was stopped (power outage) (153SGSa015).

In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, the game state at the time of stopping the power supply is recovered, and when the special symbols are fluctuating, the fluctuation of the special symbols is resumed from the state before the restoration by executing timer interrupt processing for game control to be described later. Then, the CPU 103 assumes that the pachinko game machine 1 has been restored (activated by hot start) in the state before the power failure, and transmits a restoration command including a hot start notification command to the performance control board 12, and proceeds to 153SGSa028 (153SGSa016).

Further, at 153SGSa017, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started while the clear switch is being operated (153SGSa017). If the clear switch is ON (153SGSa017; Y), it is further determined whether the lock switch 153SG051 is ON (153SGSa018) and whether the open sensor 153SG090 is ON (153SGSa019).

If the lock switch 153SG051 is ON (153SGSa018; Y) and the open sensor 153SG090 is ON, that is, if there is no backup data in the RAM 102, the RAM 102 is not normal, or the normal setting value is not set, but the pachinko game machine 1 is started according to the formal procedure by the operation of the game hall employee (game machine frame 153SG003 When the pachinko game machine 1 is started while operating the clear switch with the lock switch 153SG051 turned on, the set value stored in the RAM 102 is cleared (153SGSa020), and if the set value change flag is set, the set value change flag is cleared (153SGSa021). Then, the processes 153SGSa009 to 153SGSa016 described above are executed.

If the clear switch is OFF (153SGSa017; N), the lock switch 153SG051 is OFF (153SGSa018; N), and the open sensor 153SG090 is OFF (153SGSa019; N), the process proceeds to 153SGSa031.

In addition, at 2078SGSa022, the CPU 103 transmits a recovery command including a cold start notification command to the effect control board 12 assuming that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been activated by cold start (153SGSa022). Then, a cold start notification timer corresponding to the period for notifying the cold start of the pachinko game machine 1 is set (153SGSa023), and the cold start notification is started by starting blinking of all segments constituting the display monitor 153SG029 (153SGSa024).

After executing 153SGSa024, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the cold start notification timer by 1 (153SGSa025), and determines whether or not the cold start notification timer has timed out (153SGSa026). If the cold start notification timer has not timed out (153SGSa026; N), the processes of 153SGSa025 and 153SGSa026 are repeatedly executed, and if the cold start notification timer has timed out (153SGSa026; Y), blinking of all segments on the display monitor 153SG029 is terminated (153SGSa027), and 153SGSa02 Go to 8.

In the characterizing part 153SG of the present embodiment, all the segments constituting the display monitor 153SG029 are blinked over the period of the cold start notification timer (for example, 5 seconds) when the pachinko game machine 1 is called and started. However, the present invention is not limited to this. , at least a part of all segments constituting the display monitor 153SG029 may be lit.

Then, in 153SGSa028, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process (153SGSa028) for initializing the random number circuit 104, and sets the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 so that a timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (153SGSa029), and permits the interrupt (153SGSa030). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

In addition, at 153SGSa031, the CPU 103 is based on the fact that an abnormal set value is stored in the RAM 102 (set value abnormality error) and the recovery from the power interruption during the setting change described later, and the like, to the effect control board 12. Transmits an error designation command corresponding to the set value abnormality (153SGSa031). Furthermore, an error notification execution waiting timer is set (153SGSa032). Then, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the error notification execution waiting timer by 1 (153SGSa033), and determines whether or not the error notification execution waiting timer has timed out (153SGSa034). When the error notification execution waiting timer has not timed out (153SGSa034; N), the processing of 153SGSa033 and 153SGSa034 is repeatedly executed, and when the error notification execution waiting timer has timed out (153SGSa034; Y), the display monitor 153SG029 is configured as notification (error notification) of the occurrence of a setting value abnormal error or recovery from a power failure during setting change. is displayed on each of the first display portion 153SG029A, the second display portion 153SG029B, the third display portion 153SG029C, and the fourth display portion 153SG029D (153SGSa035).

In addition, the CPU 103 blinks all the LEDs constituting the first special symbol display device 153SG004A and the second special symbol display device 153SG004B (153SGSa036), outputs a security signal to the management device such as the management computer of the game hall through the terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko game machine 1, and proceeds to 153SGSa032 (153SGSa037). . Thereafter, the CPU 103 repeats the processing of 153SGSa032 to 153SGSa037 until power failure occurs in the pachinko game machine 1 (until the power supply of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned off by the operation of a game hall clerk or the like), thereby causing an error caused by the display monitor 153SG029, the first special symbol display device 153SG004A, and the second special symbol display device 153SG004B. to notify the occurrence of

In this way, the pachinko game machine 1 in the characteristic part 153SG of the present embodiment executes error occurrence notification by the display monitor 153SG029, the first special symbol display device 153SG004A, and the second special symbol display device 153SG004B when an abnormal set value is set or when the power failure during the change of the set value is restored. It is possible to recognize from both the front and rear sides that an error has occurred or that the power has been restored from a power outage while the settings are being changed. In addition, the occurrence of an error in the pachinko game machine 1 and recovery from a power failure during the change of the set value can be recognized even in the management device of the game hall, so that the security of the pachinko game machine 1 can be improved.

In addition, in the game control main processing of the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-14, when it is determined that the clear switch is ON in 153SGSa008 (153SGSa008; Y) and after clearing the setting value changing flag in 153SGSa021, RAM clear processing (153SGSa009) is executed, but the present invention is limited to this. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the RAM clear processing may be executed when it is determined that the RAM clear flag is set in 153SGSa014 (153SGSa014; Y), not when it is determined in 153SGSa008 that the clear switch is ON (153SGSa008; Y) or after the set value changing flag is cleared in 153SGSa021.

FIG. 9-15 is a flow chart showing the start winning determination process (S101) executed by the CPU 103 in the special symbol process process shown in FIG. In the starting winning determination process, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the first starting opening switch 22A is on based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A (153SGS101). At this time, if the first starting port switch 22A is on (153SGS101; Y), the first special figure pending memory number, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4" as the upper limit memory number). CPU103, for example by reading the first reservation memory number count value which is the stored value of the first reservation memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit (not shown), it is sufficient to specify the number of first special figure reservation memory. At 153SGS102, when the number of first special figure pending storage is not the upper limit value (153SGS102; N), for example, the storage value of the starting port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit (not shown) is set to "1" (153SGS103).

When the first starting opening switch 22A is off at 153SGS101 (153SGS101; N), and when the number of first special figure reserved storage has reached the upper limit at 153SGS102 (153SGS102; Y), based on the detection signal from the second starting opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, the second starting opening switch 22B. is on (153SGS104). At this time, if the second starting port switch 22B is on (153SGS104; Y), the second special figure pending memory number, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the second special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4" as the upper limit memory number). CPU103, for example by reading the second reservation memory number count value which is the stored value of the second reservation memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit (not shown), it is sufficient if it can specify the number of second special figure reservation memory. At 153SGS105, when the second special figure pending memory number is not the upper limit value (153SGS105; N), for example, the storage value of the starting port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit (not shown) is set to "2" (153SGS106).

After executing either of the processes of 153SGS103 and 153SGS106, the number of special figure pending storage corresponding to the starting opening buffer value, which is the stored value of the starting opening buffer, is updated so as to add 1 (153SGS107). For example, when the starting buffer value is "1", the first reserved storage number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting buffer value is "2", the second reserved storage number count value is incremented by 1. Thus, the count value of the number of the first reserve memory is updated so as to be increased by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning hole and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied. In addition, the second reserved memory number count value is updated so as to be increased by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning hole and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied. At this time, the total reserved storage number is also updated by adding 1 (153SGS108). For example, the total pending memory number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting section (not shown), may be updated so as to add 1.

After executing the process of 153SGS108, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data representing the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit (not shown) (153SGS109). Numerical data indicating each random number extracted in this way is stored by being set as suspension information at the beginning of the empty entry in the special figure suspension storage unit corresponding to the starting opening buffer value (153SGS110). For example, when the start buffer value is "1", numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit (not shown), while numerical data indicating the random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit (not shown) when the start opening buffer value is "2".

Numerical data indicating a random number MR1 for judging the result of special figure display and a random number MR2 for judging the type of big win are used for judging whether or not the result of fluctuation display of the special pattern or the decorative pattern is to be a ``big hit'', and further to judge the kind of jackpot when the result of fluctuation display is to be ``big hit''. The random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variation display time of the special symbols and decorative symbols. By executing the process of 153SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random numbers used for determining the variable display mode including the variable display results of the special symbols and decorative symbols and the variable display time.

Following the processing of 153SGS110, the transmission setting of the starting opening winning designation command according to the starting opening buffer value is performed (153SGS111). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", the setting for transmitting the first starting opening winning designation command to the performance control board 12 is performed by storing the storage address of the first starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2", setting for transmitting the second starting opening winning designation command to the performance control board 12 is performed by storing the storage address of the second starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer. The starting opening winning designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG.

Following the process of 153SGS111, the winning random number determination process is executed (153SGS112). After that, for example, by storing the storage address of the pending storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, the setting for transmitting the pending storage number notification command to the effect control board 12 is performed (153SGS113). The reserved storage number notification command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG.

After executing the process of 153SGS113, it is determined whether or not the start buffer value is "1" (153SGS114). At this time, if the start buffer value is "1" (Y at 153SGS114), the start buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0" (153SGS115), and then the process proceeds to 153SGS104. On the other hand, when the start buffer value is "2" (N at 153SGS114), the start buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0" (S116), and then the start winning process is terminated. Thus, even when both the first starter switch 22A and the second starter switch 22B simultaneously detect valid starting winnings of game balls, processing based on the detection of both valid starting winnings can be reliably completed.

FIG. 9-16(A) is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed by 153SGS 112 in FIG. 9-15 as the winning random number determination process. In the characteristic part 153SG of the present embodiment, when the variable display of the special symbols and the decorative symbols is started, the special symbol normal processing (S110 in FIG. 5) determines whether the special symbol display result (variable display result of the special symbol) is to be controlled to the big hit game state as "big hit", whether to control the special symbol display result to the small hit game state as "small hit", etc. Further, in the variation pattern setting process (S111 in FIG. 5), determination of a variation pattern that specifically defines the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is performed. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, at the timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening or second starting winning opening), the CPU 103 executes the random number determination process at the time of winning of 153SGS112, thereby determining whether or not to derive and display a big hit symbol as a special figure display result, determining whether or not to derive and display a small winning symbol as a special figure display result, and determining whether or not to derive and display a small winning symbol as a special figure display result. It is determined whether or not a predetermined display mode with reach is achieved. As a result, before the start of the variable display of the special symbols and decorative symbols based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the start winning opening, that is, before it is determined whether or not to be a big hit or a small hit at the start of the variable display, it is determined that the special symbol display result will be a "big hit" or a "small hit", and which category the variable display mode of the decorative pattern will be. Then, the pending display notice effect is executed.

In the random value determination process at the time of winning shown in FIG. 9-16 (A), the CPU 103 first identifies the current game state in the pachinko game machine 1 by, for example, confirming the state of a time saving flag or a variable probability flag provided in a game control flag setting unit (not shown) (153SGS121). The CPU 103 may specify the variable probability state when the variable probability flag is on, specify the time saving state when the variable probability flag is off and the time saving flag is on, and specify the normal state when both the variable probability flag and the time saving flag are off.

Following the processing of 153SGS121, the display result determination table shown in FIG. 9-7 is selected and set (153SGS122). At this time, the CPU 103 sets the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 9-7 (A) if the starting buffer value is 1, and if the starting buffer value is 2, the second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 9-7 (B).

After that, with reference to the jackpot numerical range (jackpot determination range) corresponding to the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 in the set display result determination table, it is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination extracted at 153SGS109 in FIGS. 9-15 is within the jackpot determination range (153SGS123). In the jackpot determination range, individual determination values assigned to the special figure display results of "big hit" in the display result determination table selected by the processing of 153SGS122 are set, and the CPU 103 compares the random number MR1 and each determination value one by one, so that it is sufficient to determine whether or not there is a determination value that matches the random number MR1. Alternatively, numerical values indicating the minimum (lower limit) and maximum (upper limit) of the determination values included in the big hit determination range are set, and the CPU 103 compares the random number MR1 with the minimum and maximum values of the big hit determination range to determine whether or not the random number MR1 is within the big hit determination range. At this time, by determining that the random number MR1 is within the jackpot determination range, it can be determined that the variation display result based on the reserved data including the random number MR1 is determined to be a "big hit".

When it is determined that it is not within the big hit determination range at 153SGS123, that is, when it is determined that it does not become a big hit at the time of variable display (153SGS123; N), the small hit numerical range (small hit determination range) according to the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 in the display result determination table set further is referred to, and the special figure display result determination extracted at 153SGS109 in FIGS. It is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 is within the small hit determination range (153SGS124). In the small hit judgment range, individual judgment values assigned to the special figure display results of "small hit" in the display result judgment table selected by the processing of 153SGS122 are set, and the CPU 103 compares the random number MR1 and each judgment value one by one, so that it is possible to judge the presence or absence of the judgment value that matches the random number MR1. Alternatively, numerical values indicating the minimum (lower limit) and maximum (upper limit) of the determination values included in the small hit determination range are set, and the CPU 103 compares the random number MR1 with the minimum and maximum values of the small hit determination range, thereby determining whether the random number MR1 is within the small hit determination range. At this time, by determining that the random number MR1 is within the small hit determination range, it can be determined that the variation display result based on the reserved data including the random number MR1 is determined to be a "small hit".

When it is determined at 153SGS124 that it is not within the small hit determination range, that is, when it is determined that there is no small hit at the time of variable display (153SGS124; N), transmission setting of the symbol designation command corresponding to the result of variable display being "miss" is executed (153SGS125), and it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is set, that is, whether or not the current game state is the time saving state (153SG). S126). When the time saving flag is not set (153SGS126; N), the change pattern determination table A for loss is selected and set (153SGS127), and when the time saving flag is set (153SGS126; Y), the change pattern determination table D for loss is selected and set (153SGSS128).

Note that the deviation variation pattern determination table A is a deviation variation pattern determination table that is used when the number of pending memories is one or less, as shown in FIG. 9-11(A). In addition, the variation pattern determination table D for loss is used when the game state is a high base state in which time saving control is performed, as shown in FIG. 9-11 (D). It is a variation pattern determination table for loss.

In the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, in addition to these variation pattern determination table for loss A and variation pattern determination table for loss D, a variation pattern determination table for loss B used when the total number of retained memories is 2 to 4 and a variation pattern determination table for loss C used when the total number of retained memories is 5 to 8 are prepared in advance. In the determination table A, a value from 0 to 450 is assigned to the non-reach variation pattern within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take, and in the deviation variation pattern determination tables B and C, a value that exceeds 0 to 450 from the range that the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take is assigned to the variation pattern. On the other hand, in the fluctuation pattern determination tables A to C for losing, values from 701 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation patterns of super reach within the range of possible random number values MR3 for fluctuation pattern judgment.

Therefore, by determining the variation pattern (variation category) using the variation pattern determination table A for loss in 153SGS132 described later, the determination of non-reach and super reach is always a variation pattern of non-reach or super reach even if the number of pending memories changes after the determination.

As shown in FIG. 9-16 (A), when 153SGS123 determines that it is within the jackpot determination range, that is, when it is determined that a jackpot will be hit during variable display (153SGS123; Y), the jackpot type is determined based on the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination (153SGS130). At this time, a CPU 103 selects table data for big hit type determination from table data constituting a big hit type determination table according to a variable special figure (a ``first special figure'' corresponding to ``1'' or a ``second special figure'' corresponding to ``2'') specified corresponding to the start buffer value. Then, by referring to the selected table data for judging big hit types, it is judged which of the plurality of types the big hit type is judged to be.

In addition, the transmission setting of the symbol designation command corresponding to the big hit type determined in 153SGS130 is executed (153SG131), and the big win variation pattern determination table is selected and set as a table for determining one of a plurality of big win variation patterns (153SG132).

Also, when it is determined at 153SGS124 that it is within the small hit determination range, that is, when it is determined that there will be a small hit at the time of variable display (153SGS124; Y), transmission setting of a symbol designation command corresponding to the small hit type is executed (153SG129).

After executing any of the processes of 153SGS127, 153SGS128, 153SGS129, and 153SGS132, using numerical data indicating the variation pattern determination table and the random value MR3 for determination of the variation pattern set in the processes of 153SGS127, 153SGS128, 153SGS129, and 153SGS132, the random value A variation category is determined according to the range of determination values including MR3 (153SGS133). In the characteristic part 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-16(B), at least when the variable display result is "loss", regardless of the total number of reserved memories, a variable category with a variable display mode of "non-reach", a variable category with a variable display mode of "super reach", and a variable category with a variable display mode other than "non-reach" and "super reach" (for example, normal reach and small hit). .

After that, after performing the setting for transmitting the variable category designation command according to the determination result by the process of 153SGS132 to the effect control board 12 (153SGS134), the random value determination process at the time of winning is ended.

FIG. 9-17 is a part of the flow chart of the effect control process (S76) in the characteristic part 153SG of this embodiment. In the effect control process processing in the characteristic part 153SG of the present embodiment, after the execution of the pre-reading notice setting process (S161) shown in FIG. 7, the display mode and the number of display of the pending memory display displayed in the first pending memory display area 153SG005D and the second pending memory display area 153SG005U The pending display update process for updating according to the start winning reception command buffer 153SG194A shown in FIG. 9-13 (B) was executed. One of the processes of S170 to S177 shown in FIG. 7 is executed later.

FIG. 9-18 is a flow chart showing the pre-reading notice setting process (S161) executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the effect control process shown in FIG. 9-17. In the pre-reading notice setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first checks the contents of the start winning reception command buffer 153SG194A shown in FIG. If there is no entry with no pending display flag set, pre-reading notice setting processing is terminated, and if there is any entry with no pending display flag set, it is determined whether or not there is an entry whose value of the pending display flag is already set to any one of 1 to 4 (153SGS243).

When there is an entry whose value of the pending display flag is already set to any one of 1 to 4, that is, when the pending display notice effect is already executed, the pending display flag of the entry (the entry determined that the pending display flag is not set at 153SGS242) is set to "0" corresponding to non-execution of the pending display notice effect (that is, it is decided to display the pending memory display corresponding to the entry with "○"), and the prefetching notice setting process is terminated (153SGS25). 1). As will be described later, the case where there is an entry whose value of the pending display flag is already set to any one of 1 to 4 means that the pending display notice effect has already been executed. That is, in the process of 153SGS243, when the suspension display forewarning effect has already been executed, execution of a new suspension display forewarning effect is restricted.

In 153SGS243, when there is no entry set to any one of the values 1 to 4 of the pending display flag, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not the pattern designation command of the entry (the entry determined that the pending display flag is not set in 153SGS242) indicates a big win (153SGS244). When the symbol designation command of the entry indicates a big hit, the jackpot type is specified from the symbol designation command of the entry (153SGS245), and a jackpot pending display notice effect determination table (not shown) is referred to based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the pending display notice effect extracted from the random number circuit 124 and the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 153SG193, for example, and the jackpot type specified in 153SGS245. Thus, whether or not to execute the pending display notice effect and the display pattern in the case of executing the pending display notice effect are determined (153SGS246).

In 153SG246, for example, whether or not to execute the pending display announcement effect and the display pattern (announcement type) are determined at a determination ratio as shown in FIG. 9-19(A). In the setting example of the determination ratio shown in FIG. 9-19 (A), depending on the jackpot type specified in the processing of 153SGS245, the presence or absence of the pending display notice effect and the determination ratio of the display pattern (notice type) are varied.

In the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment, four types of display patterns (preview types) of the pending display pre-notice effect are provided: the display pattern α, the display pattern β, the display pattern γ, and the display pattern δ. Among these, when the display pattern of the pending display notice effect is determined to be the display pattern α, the pending memory display is displayed as a white square (◇) in the first pending memory display area 153SG005D or the second pending memory display area 153SG005U. 3SG005U, and when the display pattern of the pending display notice effect is determined to be the display pattern γ, the pending memory display is displayed in the first pending memory display area 153SG005D or the second pending memory display area 153SG005U with the blue camera, and when the display pattern of the pending display notice effect is determined to be the display pattern δ, the pending memory display is the first pending memory display area 153SG005D or the second pending memory display area 153 with the red camera. Displayed in SG005U. Further, when non-execution of the pending display notice effect is determined, the pending memory display is displayed in a white circle (○) in the first pending memory display area 153SG005D or the second pending memory display area 153SG005U.

Here, as shown in FIG. 9-19 (A), when the jackpot type is the jackpot A (non-probable variable jackpot), non-execution of the pending display notice effect is determined at a rate of 5%, execution of the pending display notice effect with the display pattern α is decided at a rate of 55%, execution of the pending display notice effect with the display pattern β is decided at a rate of 20%, execution of the pending display notice effect with the display pattern γ is decided at a rate of 10%, and execution of the pending display notice effect with the display pattern γ is decided at a rate of 10%. , execution of the pending display forewarning effect in the display pattern δ is determined. In addition, when the jackpot type is the jackpot B or the jackpot C (probability variable jackpot), non-execution of the pending display notice effect is determined at a rate of 5%, execution of the pending display notice effect with the display pattern α is decided at a rate of 20%, execution of the pending display notice effect with the display pattern β is decided at a rate of 55%, execution of the pending display notice effect with the display pattern γ is decided at a rate of 10%, and execution of the pending display notice effect with the display pattern δ is decided at a rate of 10%. execution is decided.

Returning to 153SGS244, when the symbol designation command of the entry is a loss or a small hit, the effect control CPU 120 identifies the variation category from the variation category designation command of the entry (153SGS248), for example, the numeric data indicating the random value for the pending display notice effect extracted from the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 153SG193, and the jackpot specified in 153SGS249. Based on the type, whether or not to execute the pending display advance notice effect and the display pattern are determined by referring to a small hit/losing holding display notice effect determination table (not shown).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-19(B), when the variable display result is lost and the variable category is non-reach, non-execution of the pending display notice effect is determined at a rate of 95%, execution of the pending display notice effect with the display pattern α is determined at a rate of 5%, execution of the pending display notice effect with the display pattern β is determined at a rate of 0%, execution of the pending display notice effect with the display pattern γ is determined at a rate of 0%, and execution of the pending display notice effect with the display pattern γ is determined at a rate of 0% with the display pattern δ at a rate of 0%. is determined to execute the pending display notice effect. In addition, when the variable display result is a loss or a small win and the variation category is other (normal reach is a loss or a small win), non-execution of the pending display notice effect is determined at a rate of 75%, execution of the pending display notice effect with the display pattern α is decided at a rate of 20%, execution of the pending display notice effect with the display pattern β is decided at a rate of 5%, execution of the pending display notice effect with the display pattern γ is decided at a rate of 0%, and display pattern is decided at a rate of 0%. Execution of the pending display forewarning effect at δ is determined. Further, when the variable display result is a failure and the variable category is super reach, non-execution of the pending display forenotice performance is determined at a rate of 55%, execution of the pending display forenotice performance with the display pattern α is determined at a rate of 25%, execution of the pending display forenotice performance with the display pattern β is determined at a rate of 10%, execution of the pending display forenotice performance with the display pattern γ is determined at a rate of 5%, and execution of the pending display forenotice performance with the display pattern δ is determined at a rate of 5%.

That is, as shown in FIGS. 9-19 (A) and 9-19 (B), in the characteristic portion 153SG of the present embodiment, when the pending display notice effect is executed, the control is performed to the jackpot game state at a higher rate than when the pending display notice effect is not executed. It is set to be a big hit). By such setting, when the variable display result is "big win" and the display pattern β is displayed as the display pattern (notice type), the ratio of the big win type to be the probability variable big win is higher than when the display pattern α is displayed, and the player's expectation for the probability variable big win can be increased.

Since the display pattern γ and the display pattern δ are display patterns suggesting the execution of a setting suggestion performance to be described later, the degree of expectation (big win expectation degree) for being controlled to the big win game state is not set higher than the display pattern α and the display pattern β, and the degree of expectation (probability variable big win expectation degree) for the big win type being the big win B or the big win C is the same.

In the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment, the variation patterns that can be determined when the variable display result is a big win are the variation patterns of normal reach and super reach, and as shown in FIG. 9-19, when the display pattern γ and the display pattern δ are determined, the variable display result is a big win or the variable display result is a loss, and the variation category is super reach. In other words, the pending memory display of the display pattern γ and the display pattern δ (blue and red camera aspects) also suggests that it is a super reach variable display capable of executing a setting suggestion effect, which will be described later. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 9-19 (B), if the variation category is non-reach or other (normal reach or small hit), that is, if it is determined that the special figure variation time is shorter than the super reach, the pending memory display is not displayed in blue or red camera mode.

Returning to FIG. 9-18, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the pending display notice effect is determined after executing the processing of 153SGS246 or 153SGS249 (153SGS250). When execution of pending display notice performance is determined, a value (one of 1 to 4) corresponding to the display pattern determined by the processing of 153SGS246 or 153SGS249 is set to the pending display flag of the entry, and the prefetching notice setting processing is terminated (153SGS247). When it is decided not to execute the pending display notice effect, the pending display flag of the entry is set to "0" corresponding to the non-execution of the pending display notice effect, and the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated (153SGS251).

9-20 is a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process (S171) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variation start command reception flag is set (153SGS271). When the first fluctuation start command reception flag is set (153SGS271; Y), various command data and various flags (that is, various command data and various flags corresponding to the first special symbol being displayed in variable display, various command data and various flags corresponding to the first to fourth first special figure reservation storage) stored in association with the buffer numbers "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special figure reservation storage in the start winning reception command buffer (not shown) are stored for one buffer number. It shifts upward by increments (153SGS272). The contents of the buffer number "1-0" are erased because they cannot be shifted because there is no place to shift them.

Specifically, the various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-1" of the first special figure pending storage are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-0", the various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2" of the first special figure pending storage are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-1", and the various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-3" of the first special figure pending storage. The flag is shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number ``1-2'', and various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number ``1-4'' of the first special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number ``1-3''.

If the first fluctuation start command reception flag is not set in 153SGS271 (153SGS271; N), it is determined whether or not the second fluctuation start command reception flag is set (153SGS273). If the second variation start command reception flag is not set (153SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and if the second variation start command reception flag is set (153SGS273; Y), various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure reservation storage in the start winning time reception command buffer (not shown) (That is, corresponding to the second special symbol being displayed variablely) Various command data and various flags, various command data and various flags corresponding to the first to fourth second special figure reservation storage) are shifted upward by one buffer number (153SGS274). The contents of the buffer number "2-0" are erased because they cannot be shifted because there is no place to shift them.

Specifically, the various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-1" of the second special figure pending storage are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-0", the various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-2" of the second special figure pending storage are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-1", and the various command data and various types stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-3" of the second special figure pending storage. The flag is shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number ``2-2'', and various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number ``2-4'' of the second special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number ``2-3''.

After executing 153SGS272 or 153SGS274, the effect control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (153SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop pattern) of the decoration pattern is determined according to the data stored in the display result specifying command storage area (that is, the received display result specifying command) (153SGS276). In this case, the performance control CPU 120 determines the stop pattern of the decorative pattern according to the display result specified by the display result specifying command, and stores the data indicating the stop pattern of the determined decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display result storage area.

In this characteristic part 153SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the big hit A, the performance control CPU 120 determines, for example, a combination of decorative patterns (big hit pattern) in which 3 patterns are even-numbered patterns as stop patterns. When the received variable display result designation command is the third variable display result designation command corresponding to the big win B, the stop pattern is determined from among a plurality of combinations of odd number patterns other than '7' (for example, combinations of decoration patterns such as '111', '333', '555' and '999'). When the received variable display result designation command is the fourth variable display result designation command corresponding to the big win C, a combination of decoration patterns (big win pattern) in which three patterns are ``7'' is determined as a stop pattern. Also, when the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to the small win, the stop pattern is determined from the chance numbers indicating the small win (334, 556, 778, etc. where three patterns are not aligned under a specific rule). When the received variable display result designation command is a first variable display result designation command corresponding to a loss, a combination (lost pattern) other than the above-mentioned chance eye, which is a decoration pattern in which three patterns are not aligned as a stop pattern, is determined.

In determining these stop patterns, the performance control CPU 120 extracts, for example, random numbers for determining the stop patterns, and determines the stop patterns of the decorative patterns by using a stop pattern determination table in which data indicating combinations of decorative patterns and numerical values are associated with each other. That is, the stop symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to a numerical value matching the extracted random number.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of super reach (153SGS277). When the variation pattern of the variable display is not the variation pattern of the super reach, the process proceeds to 153SGS285, and when the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of the super reach, the suggestion performance during the rear variable display is determined whether or not the suggestion performance during the rear variable display is executed during the ready reach performance of the variable display and which performance is executed as the suggestion performance during the rear variable display is executed (153SGS278). That is, in the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in 153SGS277 to 153SG278, the suggestive effect during the rear variable display (jackpot suggestive effect or setting suggestive effect) can be executed only in the variable display of the super reach variation pattern with a long special figure variation time, and is not performed in the variable display of the normal reach or non-reach variation pattern with a short special figure variation time.

As shown in FIG. 9-28, in the super ready-to-win variable display in the characterizing part 153SG of the present embodiment, it is possible to execute a timer effect suggesting a period from the start timing of the variable display to the start of the rear variable display suggesting effect as a suggestion effect during the front variable display that the variable display result will be a big win as a suggestive effect during the variable display. As the suggesting performance during display, a big win suggesting performance suggesting that the variable display result will be a big win or a setting suggesting performance suggesting a set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be executed. In other words, the process of 153SGS278 is the process of determining whether or not to execute the suggesting effect during the rear variable display and which of the big hit suggesting effect and the set suggesting effect to be executed during the ready-to-win effect as the suggesting effect during the rear variable display.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the suggestive effect during rear variable display (either the big hit suggestive effect or the set suggestive effect) has been determined in the process of 153SGS278 (153SGS279). When the non-execution of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display is determined in the process of 153SGS278, the process proceeds to 153SGS285, and when the execution of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display is determined in the process of 153SGS278, the suggestive effect during the front variable display is further determined to determine which of the character effect and the timer effect is to be executed as the suggestive effect during the variable front display from the start of the variable display (153SGS280). That is, in the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment, execution of the suggestive performance during the rear variable display is not determined unless execution of the performance during the rear variable display is determined, that is, in the non-reach or normal reach variable display in which the set suggestive performance cannot be executed, the timer performance or character performance is not executed as the suggestive performance during the front variable display.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the character effect has been determined as the suggestive effect during front variable display (153SGS281). When it is decided to execute a character effect as a suggestive effect during the front variable display, a value corresponding to the period until the start of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display (5 seconds after the start of the ready-to-win effect as shown in FIG. 9-28(A)) is set in the timer for waiting for the start of the suggestive effect during the variable front part display, and the process proceeds to 153SG285 (153SGS282). Set a period until the start of the suggestive effect (as shown in FIG. 9-28(B), a value corresponding to the effect pattern of the timer effect (specifically, 5 seconds after the start of the ready-to-win effect when the effect pattern of the timer effect is pattern TS-1 with a 25-second effect period, and 10 seconds after the start of the ready-to-win effect when the effect pattern of the timer effect is pattern TS-2 with a 30-second effect period)) and proceed to 153SGS285 (153SGS). 283).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 selects the effect control pattern (process table) corresponding to the variation pattern in 153SGS285. Then, the process timer in process data 1 of the selected process table is started (153SGS286).

In the process table, display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, sound control execution data for controlling the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A, etc. are arranged in chronological order in association with each process data n (numbers 1 to N).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes control of the effect device (image display device 5 as a component for effect, various lamps as components for effect, speakers 8L and 8R as components for effect, operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.)) according to the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1) (153SGS287). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image corresponding to the variation pattern on the image display device 5 . In addition, it outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 in order to control lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. Also, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In this characterizing part 153SG, the performance control CPU 120 controls so that the decorative pattern is variably displayed according to the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern designation command one-to-one, but the performance control CPU 120 may select a variation pattern to be used from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the variation pattern designation command.

Then, a variable display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variation pattern designation command (153SGS288). Also, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (153SGS289). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the effect control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the left, middle, and right decorative patterns into the VRAM each time the predetermined time elapses, and the display control unit 123 outputs a signal corresponding to the image data written in the VRAM to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby realizing variable display (fluctuation) of the decorative pattern. Next, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (S172), and the variable display start setting process is terminated (153SGS290).

FIG. 9-21 is a flow chart showing the suggestive effect determination process during rear variable display (153SGS278) in the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 9-20. 9-21, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the start winning reception command buffer 153SG194A shown in FIG. 9-13(B) to specify the value of the pending display flag corresponding to the variable display (153SGS301). In this process, when the first variable display start command reception flag is set, the value of the pending display flag of the entry "1-0" of the start winning command buffer 153SG194A is specified, and when the second variable display start command reception flag is set, the entry "2-0" of the start winning command buffer 153SG194A may be specified.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the suggested effect during the variable rear display and the effect to be executed as the suggestive effect during the variable rear display based on the value of the reserved display flag specified in 153SG301 (153SG302).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-22(A), when the value of the reserved display flag specified in 153SGS301 is "0", that is, when the reserved display notice effect is not executed for the variable display, 90% of the time, the non-execution of the rear variable display suggesting effect is determined, the 10% of the ratio determines the execution of the big hit suggesting effect as the rear variable display suggesting effect, and the 0% of the set suggesting effect as the rear variable display suggesting effect. decide to run. In addition, when the value of the reserved display flag specified in 153SGS301 is "1" or "2", that is, when the reserved memory display is displayed in a white square or star shape as a reserved display notice effect for the variable display, 50% of the ratio determines non-execution of the rear variable display suggesting effect, 50% of the ratio determines the execution of the big hit suggesting effect as the rear variable display suggesting effect, and 0% of the set suggesting effect as the rear variable display suggesting effect. decide to run.

Further, when the value of the reserved display flag specified in 153SGS301 is ``3'', that is, when the reserved memory display is displayed by the blue camera as the reserved display advance notice performance for the variable display, non-execution of the suggestive performance during the rear variable display is determined at a rate of 30%, execution of the big win suggestive performance as the suggestive performance during the rear variable display is determined at a rate of 35%, and execution of the set suggestive performance as the suggestive performance during the rear variable display is determined at a rate of 35%. Then, when the value of the reserved display flag specified in 153SGS301 is ``4'', that is, when the reserved memory display is displayed by the red camera as the reserved display advance notice performance for the variable display, non-execution of the suggestive performance during the rear variable display is determined at a rate of 0%, execution of the big hit suggestive performance as the suggestive performance during the rear variable display is determined at a rate of 30%, and execution of the set suggestive performance as the suggestive performance during the rear variable display is determined at a rate of 70%.

In other words, in the characterizing part 153SG of the present embodiment, when the holding display forewarning effect is executed for the variable display, execution of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display is determined at a higher rate than when the holding display forewarning effect is not executed for the variable display. Furthermore, when the pending memory display is displayed by a blue or red camera as a pending display notice effect for the variable display (when the value of the pending display flag is "3" or "4"), the execution of the suggested effect during the rear variable display is determined at a higher rate than when the pending memory display is displayed in a white square or star shape as the pending display notice effect for the variable display (when the value of the pending display flag is "1" or "2"). It is set so that execution of the set suggestive effect is determined as the suggestive effect during the rear variable display at a higher rate than when the pending memory display is displayed in a white square or star shape as the pending display notice effect.

Focusing on the case where the reserved memory display is displayed by the blue or red camera as the reserved display forewarning effect for the variable display (when the value of the reserved display flag is "3" or "4"), when the reserved memory display is displayed by the red camera as the reserved display forewarning effect for the variable display, execution of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display is determined at a higher rate than when the reserved memory display is displayed by the blue camera as the reserved display forewarning effect for the variable display. It is set so that execution of the setting suggestion performance as the suggestion performance during the rear variable display is determined at a higher rate than when the suspension storage display is displayed by the blue camera as the suspension display advance notice performance for the variable display.

As described above, in the characteristic portion 153SG of the present embodiment, when the pending memory display is displayed in a square or star shape as the pending display notice effect for the variable display, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the big hit suggestion effect is executed as the suggestive effect during the rear variable display. It is designed to attract people's attention.

Furthermore, when the pending memory display is displayed by the red camera as the pending display advance notice effect for the variable display, the ratio of executing the setting suggesting effect as the rear variable display suggesting effect is higher than the case where the reserve memory display is displayed by the blue camera as the pending display advance notice effect for the variable display, so that the player can be made to pay more attention to whether the setting suggesting effect is executed as the rear variable display suggesting effect.

Returning to FIG. 9-21, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the suggestive effect during rear variable display has been determined in the process of 153SGS302 (153SGS303). When non-execution of the suggestive performance during the rear variable display is determined in the processing of 153SGS302, the suggestive performance determination processing during the variable rear display is terminated, and when execution of the suggestive performance during the variable rear display is determined in the processing of 153SGS302, it is further determined whether or not execution of the suggestive performance of a big hit as the suggestive performance during the variable rear display is determined in the processing of 153SGS302 (153SGS304).

In the processing of 153SGS302, when the execution of the big win suggestive performance is determined as the suggestive performance during the rear variable display, the performance pattern of the big win suggestive performance is determined and stored based on the result of the variable display, and the suggestive performance determination processing during the rear variable display is completed (153SGS305).

As shown in FIG. 9-22(B), three effect patterns, pattern AS-1 to pattern AS-3, are provided as effect patterns that can be determined in the process of 153SGS305. Of these production patterns, pattern AS-1 is a production pattern (big hit expectation: low) that suggests that the variable display result will result in a big hit (low expectation), pattern AS-2 is a production pattern (big hit expectation: medium) that suggests that the variable display result will result in a big hit, and pattern AS-3 is a production pattern that suggests that the variable display result will result in a big hit (big hit). degree of expectation: high).

Then, in the process of 153SGS305 described above, as shown in FIG. 9-23, when the variable display result is a big hit, the performance control CPU 120 determines the performance pattern of the big hit suggestion performance to be the pattern AS-1 at a rate of 10%, the pattern AS-2 at a rate of 30%, and the pattern AS-3 at a rate of 60%.

On the other hand, when the execution of the setting suggesting effect as the suggesting effect during the rear variable display is determined in the process of 153SGS302, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the RAM 122 and specifies the set value (the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1) from the set value designation command received from the CPU 103 (153SGS306). Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines and stores the effect pattern of the setting suggestive effect based on the specified set value, and ends the suggestive effect determination processing during rear variable display (153SGS307).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 9-22(B), a total of five patterns from pattern SS-1 to pattern SS-5 are provided as determinable effect patterns in 153SG307. Among these patterns SS-1 to SS-5, pattern SS-1 suggests the possibility that the setting value is an odd number (eg, 1, 3, 5), pattern SS-2 suggests the possibility that the setting value is an even number (eg, 2, 4, 6), pattern SS-3 suggests the possibility that the setting value is an odd-numbered intermediate setting or higher (eg, 3 or 5), and pattern SS-4 suggests that the setting value is an even-numbered intermediate setting or higher (eg, , 4 or 6), and pattern SS-5 suggests that the setting value may be the highest setting (eg, 6).

Patterns SS-1 and SS-2 are determined at a high rate when the set value is any one of 1 to 4 (low setting), so that the set value is either 5 or 6 (high setting).

In this characteristic portion 153SG, the setting values 1 to 4 are set low and the setting values 5 and 6 are high, but the setting values 1 and 3 may be low and the setting values 4 and 6 may be high.

In the processing of 153SGS307 described above, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, as shown in FIG. 9-24, the production control CPU 120 determines the pattern SS-1 at a rate of 60%, the pattern SS-2 at a rate of 25%, the pattern SS-3 at a rate of 9%, the pattern SS-4 at a rate of 6%, and the pattern S at a rate of 0%. Decide on S-5. When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the performance pattern is determined as pattern SS-1 at a rate of 25%, pattern SS-2 at a rate of 60%, pattern SS-3 at a rate of 6%, pattern SS-4 at a rate of 9%, and pattern SS-5 at a rate of 0%. When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the performance pattern is determined as pattern SS-1 at a rate of 50%, pattern SS-2 at a rate of 20%, pattern SS-3 at a rate of 20%, pattern SS-4 at a rate of 10%, and pattern SS-5 at a rate of 0%.

When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 4, the pattern SS-1 is determined at a rate of 20%, the pattern SS-2 is determined at a rate of 50%, the pattern SS-3 is determined at a rate of 10%, the pattern SS-4 is determined at a rate of 20%, and the pattern SS-5 is determined at a rate of 0%. When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 5, the pattern SS-1 is determined at a rate of 20%, the pattern SS-2 is determined at a rate of 30%, the pattern SS-3 is determined at a rate of 30%, the pattern SS-4 is determined at a rate of 20%, and the pattern SS-5 is determined at a rate of 0%. When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 6, the pattern SS-1 is determined at a rate of 30%, the pattern SS-2 is determined at a rate of 20%, the pattern SS-3 is determined at a rate of 15%, the pattern SS-4 is determined at a rate of 30%, and the pattern SS-5 is determined at a rate of 5%.

As described above, in the characteristic part 153SG, the set value suggesting effect is executed in the pattern SS-1 or the pattern SS-2 to suggest that the set value is any one of 1 to 4, and the set value suggesting effect is executed in the pattern SS-3 or the pattern SS-4 to suggest that the set value is 5 or 6. Then, when the setting suggesting effect is executed in the pattern SS-5, the setting value of 6 is confirmed.

FIG. 9-25 is a flow chart showing the suggestive effect determination process during front variable display (153SGS280) executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 9-20. 9-25, the effect control CPU 120 first specifies the variable display result of the variable display (153SGS311). In addition, it is determined whether or not execution of the setting suggesting effect is determined as the suggesting effect during rear variable display (153SGS312).

When the execution of the big win suggestive performance as the suggestive performance during the rear variable display is determined, whether or not to execute the suggestive performance during the front variable display and the performance to be executed as the suggestive performance during the front variable display are determined from the character performance and the timer performance based on the execution of the big win suggestive performance and the result of the variable display (153SGS313). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-26(A), when the variable display result is a big win, 40% of the ratio determines non-execution of the suggestive performance during the front variable display, 30% of the ratio determines the execution of the character performance as the suggestive performance during the front variable display, and 30% of the ratio determines the execution of the timer performance as the suggestive performance during the variable front display. When the result of variable display is a failure, non-execution of suggestive performance during front variable display is determined at a rate of 70%, execution of character performance as suggestive performance during front variable display is determined at a rate of 25%, and execution of timer performance is determined as suggestive performance during front variable display at a rate of 5%.

That is, in the case where the execution of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display is determined as the suggestive effect during the rear variable display, when the variable display result is a big win, the suggestive effect during the front variable display is determined at a higher rate than when the result of the variable display is a loss, and when the result of the variable display is a big win, the execution of the suggestive effect during the front variable display and the execution of the timer effect are determined at the same rate as the suggestive effect during the front variable display, and when the result of the variable display is a loss, the suggestive effect during the front variable display is executed as the suggestive effect during the front variable display. is determined at a higher rate than the execution of the timer effect, that is, the degree of expectation for big win of the timer effect is set higher than the degree of expectation for big win of the character effect.

In addition, when the execution of the setting suggestive performance as the suggestive performance during the rear variable display is determined, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the suggestive performance during the front variable display based on the execution of the setting suggestive performance and the result of the variable display, and determines the performance to be executed as the suggestive performance during the front variable display from the character performance and the timer performance (153SGS314). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-26(B), when the result of variable display is a big hit, non-execution of suggestive performance during variable front display is determined at a rate of 30%, execution of character performance as suggestive performance during variable front display is determined at a rate of 0%, and execution of timer performance is determined as suggestive performance during variable front display at a rate of 70%. When the result of the variable display is a failure, non-execution of suggestive performance during front variable display is determined at a rate of 80%, execution of character performance as suggestive performance during front variable display is determined at a rate of 0%, and execution of timer performance is determined as suggestive performance during front variable display at a rate of 20%.

In other words, in the case where execution of the set suggesting effect during the rear variable display is determined, when the variable display result is a big hit, the execution of the suggestive effect during the front variable display is determined at a higher rate than when the variable display result is a loss, and regardless of whether the variable display result is a big win or a loss, the execution of the character effect as the suggestive effect during the front variable display is not determined. .

Therefore, when the variable display result is a big hit, execution of the timer performance is determined at a higher rate than when the variable display result is a loss, so that when the timer performance is executed as the suggestive performance during the front part variable display, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the variable display result becoming a big win.

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-25, after executing 153SGS313 or 153SGS314, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the suggestive effect during front variable display is determined (153SGS315). When the non-execution of the suggestive performance during the variable front part display is decided, the suggestive performance decision processing during the variable front part display is ended, and when the execution of the suggestive performance during the variable front part display is decided, it is further determined whether or not the execution of the character performance is decided as the suggestive performance during the variable front part display (153SGS316).

When execution of character performance is determined as suggestive performance during front variable display, performance pattern of character performance is determined and stored based on the result of variable display, and suggestive performance determination processing during front variable display is completed (153SGS317).

Incidentally, as the effect pattern of the character effect that can be determined in the process of 153SGS317, as shown in FIG. 9-26(C), a total of two effect patterns, pattern CS-1 and pattern CS-2, are provided. Of these performance patterns, the pattern CS-1 is a performance pattern (big hit expectation: low) that suggests that the variable display result is likely to win a big hit by displaying the character A (not shown) on the image display device 5, and the pattern CS-2 is a performance pattern (big hit expectation: medium) that suggests that the variable display result will be a big win by displaying the character B (not shown) on the image display device 5 than the pattern CS-1.

Therefore, in the process of 153SGS317, when the variable display result is a big win, the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect pattern of the character effect to be pattern CS-1 at a rate of 20% and pattern CS-2 at a rate of 80%, as shown in FIG. 9-27(A). On the other hand, if the variable display result is a failure, the pattern CS-1 is determined as the effect pattern of the character effect at a rate of 80%, and the pattern CS-2 is determined at a rate of 20%.

When execution of the timer performance is determined as the suggestive performance during the front part variable display, the performance control CPU 120 determines and stores the performance pattern of the timer performance based on the performance determined to be executed as the suggestive performance during the rear part variable display, and ends the suggestive performance determination processing during the variable part display (153SGS318).

As the effect pattern of the timer effect that can be determined in the process of 153SGS318, as shown in FIG. 9-26(C), a total of two effect patterns, pattern TS-1 and pattern TS-2, are provided. Pattern TS-1 among these production patterns suggests that the ratio of the variable display result to a big hit on the image display device 5 is higher than the pattern CS-1 and pattern CS-2 of the character production (expectation for big win: high) and also suggests a period of 25 seconds until the start of execution of the suggested production during the rear variable display together with the image of the character X. Pattern TS-2 has a higher ratio of the variable display result to a big win on the image display device 5 than the pattern CS-1 and the pattern CS-2 of the character production. (Expectation for big hit: high), and the period until the execution of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display is started, together with the image of the character Y, is suggested for 25 seconds (see FIGS. 9-27 (C), 9-29 (D), and 9-29 (E)).

Therefore, in the process of 153SGS318, when the suggestive effect during the rear variable display determined to be executed is the jackpot suggestive effect as shown in FIG. 9-27(B), the effect pattern of the timer effect is determined to be the pattern TS-1 at a rate of 80% and the pattern TS-2 at a rate of 20%. In addition, when the suggested performance during rear variable display whose execution is determined is the set suggested performance, the performance control CPU 120 determines the pattern TS-1 at a rate of 80% and determines the pattern TS-2 at a rate of 20%.

That is, when the timer effect is executed as the suggesting effect during the front part variable display, the ratio of executing the set suggesting effect as the suggesting effect during the rear part variable display is set higher when the timer effect is executed in the pattern TS-2 than in the case where the timer effect is executed in the pattern TS-1 (that is, when the effect period of the timer effect is longer and the character B is displayed on the image display device 5 rather than the character A). Therefore, in the characteristic portion 153SG of the present embodiment, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the effect period of the timer effect and the character displayed on the image display device 5 . Also, when the timer performance is executed in the pattern TS-2, the player can expect the execution of the setting suggestion performance more than in the case where the timer performance is executed in the pattern TS-1, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

As described above, in the characteristic part 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-26(D), when the timer effect is executed as the suggestive effect during the front variable display, the expectation for the big win is set higher than when the character effect is executed as the suggestive effect during the variable front display, and the set suggestive effect is executed as the suggestive effect during the variable rear display at a higher rate than when the character effect is executed as the suggestive effect during the variable front display.

As shown in FIGS. 9-20 to 9-28, when it is determined to execute the suggestive effect during variable display during variable display, the effect control CPU 120 may set process data according to the determined effect pattern of the suggestive effect during variable display during variable display (S172), and may control the effect device according to the content of the process data according to the process timer during effect processing during variable display (S172) thereafter. In addition, when execution of the suggestive performance during the rear variable display is determined during the variable display, the performance control CPU 120 decrements the value of the waiting timer for the start of the suggestive performance during the rear variable display by -1 each time the performance processing during the variable display is executed, and based on the value of the waiting timer for the start of the suggestive performance during the rear variable display becoming 0, sets the process data according to the performance pattern of the determined suggestive performance during the rear variable display. Then, the effect device may be controlled in accordance with the content of the process data corresponding to the process timer in the subsequent variable display process (S172).

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 9-28 (A) and 9-28 (B), the jackpot suggesting effect and the setting suggesting effect as the suggesting effect during the rear variable display in the present characteristic portion 153SG are executed over 7 seconds which is a longer period than the special figure fluctuation time of the non-reach fluctuation pattern (see FIG. 9-6) during the execution period of the reach effect. Therefore, even if the player takes his/her eyes off the image display device 5 for a moment, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the big win suggesting effect and the setting suggesting effect.

Next, an effect mode during variable display in the characteristic portion 153SG will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-29 to 9-31. First, as shown in FIGS. 9-29 (A) and 9-29 (B), a new start winning occurs during the variable display, and the display pattern of the pending memory display as a pre-reading announcement effect based on the starting winning is determined to be the display pattern γ or the display pattern δ, the new pending memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera in the first pending memory display area 153SG005D or the second pending memory display area 153SG005U.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 9-29(C) to 9-29(E), when the variable display corresponding to the pending memory display, which is the mode of the camera, is started as a new variable display, the timer effect as the suggestion effect during the front variable display is started. At this time, when the effect pattern of the timer effect is the pattern TS-1, as shown in FIG. 9-29(D), the image 153SG005X of the character X is displayed on the left part of the image display device 5, and the timer is updated and displayed for 25 seconds, which is the period until the suggestive effect during the rear variable display. Further, when the effect pattern of the timer effect is pattern TS-2, as shown in FIG. 9-29(E), the image 153SG005Y of the character Y is displayed on the left part of the image display device 5, and the 30-second timer update display is started, which is the period until the suggestive effect during the rear variable display.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 9-30(F) to 9-30(H), when the variable display progresses together with the update display of the timer until the suggestive effect during the rear variable display, the super ready-to-win effect is started. Then, when the timer reaches 0 seconds (timer performance ends) during execution of the super ready-to-win performance, a big hit suggesting performance or setting suggesting performance is started as a suggesting performance during rear variable display.

Specifically, when execution of a jackpot suggestive effect is determined as the suggestive effect during rear variable display, if the determined effect pattern is pattern AS-1, as shown in FIG. 1 is displayed, and if the determined performance pattern is pattern AS-3, as shown in FIG.

On the other hand, when execution of the setting suggesting effect is determined as the suggesting effect during rear variable display, as shown in FIGS. 9-31(L) to 9-31(P), when the effect patterns of the setting suggesting effect are patterns SS-1 to SS-4, the image display device 5 displays setting value suggesting images 131SG005H, 131SG005I, 131SG005J, and 131SG005K of different characters respectively. By doing so, the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is suggested. Further, when the effect pattern of the setting value suggesting effect is the pattern SS-5, the image display device 5 displays a setting value suggesting image 131SGS005L in which all the characters displayed on the image display device 5 in the patterns SS-1 to SS-4 are assembled.

As described above, in the characterizing part 153SG of the present embodiment, when the pending memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera as a pre-reading notice, the setting suggestion effect is executed at a higher rate than when the pre-reading notice is not executed or when the reserved memory display is displayed in a white square or star shape. Therefore, the player can make preparations for photographing the setting suggesting performance with a portable terminal such as a smart phone that the player possesses in anticipation that the setting suggesting performance will be executed in advance at the stage when the pending memory display is displayed in a blue or red camera mode. In other words, the pending memory display in the mode of the blue or red camera in the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment is also an effect that prompts the player to prepare for photographing the setting suggestion effect.

As described above, in the characteristic portion 153SG of the present embodiment, it is possible to execute a character effect as a suggestive effect during the front variable display indicating the degree of expectation of a big win, and a timer effect with a higher degree of expectation for a big hit than the character effect, and as shown in FIG. That is, when the timer performance is executed, the degree of expectation for the big win is higher than when the character performance is executed, so that the player pays more attention to whether or not the result of the variable display becomes the big win, so that the setting suggesting performance is executed in the state where the player pays attention to prevent the player from overlooking the setting suggesting performance.

In addition to the character performance, a timer performance suggesting a period until the start of the suggestive performance during the rear variable display can be executed as the suggestive performance during the front part variable display during the variable display, so that the player can easily recognize the execution start timing of the setting suggestive performance by executing the setting suggestive performance.

In the characterizing part 153SG of the present embodiment, as the timer effect, the period until the execution of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display is started is exemplified by displaying a numerical value (see FIGS. 9-29(D) and 9-29(E)), but the present invention is not limited to this. may suggest only a period of time).

9-29(D) and 9-29(E), the characterizing part 153SG of the present embodiment exemplifies a form in which the timer effect is executed by image display on the image display device 5. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and any one of image display on the image display device 5, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, light emission of the game effect lamp 9, and display on display means other than the image display device 5 may be executed in combination. You may

Further, in the characteristic part 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9-30 (H) and 9-31 (L), based on the fact that the timer displayed on the image display device 5 has become 0 as a timer effect, there is a case where a big hit suggesting effect is executed in addition to the set suggesting effect as the suggesting effect during the rear variable display. In other words, even when the timer performance is executed, the big hit suggestion performance may be executed instead of the setting suggestion performance, so that the unexpectedness can be produced and the game interest can be improved.

In the characterizing part 153SG of the present embodiment, only one of the setting suggesting performance and the big hit suggesting performance can be executed as the rear variable display during suggesting performance based on the fact that the timer displayed on the image display device 5 has become 0 as the timer performance. may be

Furthermore, in the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment, when the timer effect is executed as the suggesting effect during the front variable display, the suggesting effect during the rear variable display is always executed.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-27(B) and 9-27(C), as the effect patterns of the timer effect, a pattern TS-1 having a effect period of 25 seconds and a pattern TS-2 having a effect period of 30 seconds are provided, and when the timer effect is executed with the pattern TS-2, the setting suggesting effect is executed at a higher rate than when the timer effect is executed with the pattern TS-1. In other words, when the timer performance is executed in the pattern TS-2, it is suggested that the setting suggesting performance is executed over a longer period than in the case where the timer performance is executed in the pattern TS-1, so that the overlooking of the setting suggesting performance by the player can be further prevented.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-28, the suggestion performance during the rear variable display including the setting suggestion performance is executed during the ready-to-win performance period, which is the second half of the variable display of super ready-to-win, so that it is possible to further prevent the player from overlooking the setting suggestion performance.

In the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment, the mode in which the setting suggesting effect is executed during the ready-to-win effect period, which is the second half of the variable display of super reach, is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a case may be provided in which the setting suggesting effect is executed in the first half of the variable display of super reach.

9-18 and 9-22, in the characteristic part 153SG of the present embodiment, it is possible to execute a pending display forewarning effect that can display the display mode of the pending memory display as a pre-reading notice in a white square or a star shape, a blue or red camera mode, or the like. It is possible to determine the execution of the setting suggestion effect at a higher rate than the variable display corresponding to the display flag value 1 or 2). Therefore, in the variable display corresponding to the reserved storage display (the value of the reserved display flag is 3 or 4) which is the mode of the camera whose display mode is blue or red, the setting suggestion performance is executed when the player pays attention to whether or not the variable display result becomes a big hit, so that the player can be prevented from overlooking the setting suggestion performance.

Further, in the characterizing part 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9-29 and 9-31, when the pending display forewarning effect is executed, the setting suggesting effect can be executed in the variable display (variable display immediately after the pending display forewarning effect ends) corresponding to the pending storage display which is the target of the pending display foretell effect. Therefore, the setting suggesting performance is executed when the player pays attention to the variable display corresponding to the holding memory display which is the target of the holding display advance notice performance, so that the player can be prevented from overlooking the setting suggesting performance.

In addition, in the characterizing part 153SG of the present embodiment, a form in which the pending display notice effect can be executed as the pre-reading notice is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this.

Furthermore, the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment exemplifies a form in which the setting suggesting effect can be executed in the variable display corresponding to the pending memory display which is the target of the pending display foretelling effect (the variable display immediately after the pending display foretelling effect ends).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 9-19, the ratio of displaying the pending memory display in the form of a blue or red camera as the preview effect is set lower than the ratio of displaying the pending memory display in the form of a white square or a star as the preview effect. Therefore, the display of the reserved memory in the form of a blue or red camera attracts the player's attention more than the case in which the display of the reserved memory is displayed in the form of a white square or star, thereby further preventing the player from overlooking the setting suggestion effect.

In addition, in the characteristic part 153SG of the present embodiment, the ratio of displaying the reserved memory display in the form of blue or red camera as the pre-reading notice effect is set lower than the ratio of displaying the reserved memory display in the form of a white square or star as the pre-reading notice effect. Alternatively, the ratio of displaying the reserved memory display in blue or red camera mode as the pre-reading advance notice effect and the ratio of displaying the reserved memory display in a white square or star shape as the pre-reading notice effect may be the same.

Further, in the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment, the pending memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera as the pending display notice effect, thereby prompting the player to prepare for photographing the setting suggesting effect. Therefore, the player can prepare a form terminal such as a smart phone before the setting suggesting effect is started, so that the success rate of the player's photographing of the setting suggesting effect can be increased.

In the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment, the pending memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera as the pending display notice effect, thereby urging the player to prepare for shooting the setting suggestion effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The player may be prompted to prepare for filming the effect.

Further, in the characteristic portion 153SG of the present embodiment, the pending display announcement effect can be executed with the display pattern γ that displays the pending memory display in the blue camera mode and the display pattern δ that displays the pending memory display in the red camera mode, and as shown in FIG. ) differ in the ratio at which the setting suggestion effect is executed. In particular, when the reserved memory display is displayed in the red camera mode, setting suggestion performance is executed at a higher rate than when the reserved memory display is displayed in the blue camera mode, so that when the reserved memory display is displayed in the red camera mode, the player can pay more attention to whether or not the setting suggestion performance is executed than in the case where the reserved memory display is displayed in the blue camera mode, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the characteristic part 153SG of the present embodiment, when the reserved memory display is displayed in blue or red camera mode, the display mode of the reserved memory display does not change until the variable display corresponding to the reserved memory display starts. A case may be provided in which the display mode of the active display is changed from the blue camera mode to the red camera mode. By doing so, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the setting suggesting effect is executed until the variable display is finished, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the characteristic part 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-20, the suggesting effect during the rear variable display including the setting suggesting effect can be executed only in the variable display of the super reach variation pattern with a long special figure variation time, and is not executed in the variable display of the normal reach or non-reach variation pattern with a short special figure variation time.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 9-6 and 9-28, the execution period of the setting suggestion performance is set to 7 seconds longer than the special figure variation time of the variation pattern of the shortened non-reach, so that the player can be further prevented from overlooking the setting suggestion performance during the variable display of the super reach (during execution of the reach performance).

Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-19 , when the reserved memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera, it suggests that the variable display corresponding to the reserved memory display is a variable display of super reach capable of executing the setting suggestion effect. Therefore, by displaying the reserved memory display in the blue or red camera form, the player can be made to pay attention to whether the setting suggestion effect is executed or not, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Also, as shown in FIG. 9-19, when the variable category is non-reach or other (normal reach or small hit), that is, when it is determined that the special figure fluctuation time is shorter than super reach, the pending memory display is not displayed in the form of a blue or red camera as a pending display notice effect. It is possible to prevent the interest from being lowered without execution of the setting suggesting performance due to the occurrence.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-20 to 9-28, during the variable display of super reach, it is possible to execute the suggestive effect during the front variable display including the timer effect, but since the timer effect is not executed during the variable display of the non-reach and normal reach whose special figure fluctuation time is shorter than the variable display of the super reach, it is possible that the timer effect is executed during the variable display of the non-reach and the normal reach, in which the suggestive effect during the rear variable display including the setting suggestive effect is not executed, causing an inconsistency in the effect. can be prevented.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and any changes or additions within the scope of the present invention are included in the present invention.

For example, in the characterizing part 153SG of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-26(D), when the timer effect is executed as the suggestive effect during the variable front display, the expectation for the big win is set higher than when the character effect is executed as the suggestive effect during the variable front display, and the set suggestion effect is executed as the suggestive effect during the variable rear display at a higher rate than when the character effect is executed as the suggestive effect during the variable front display, but the present invention is not limited to this. As shown in FIG. 9-32 as a modification 153SG-1, the ratio of determining the execution of the timer effect as the suggestive effect during the front variable display is set lower than the ratio of determining the execution of the character effect as the suggestive effect during the front variable display, and when the timer effect is executed as the suggestive effect during the front variable display, the set suggestive effect may be executed as the suggestive effect during the rear variable display at a higher rate than the case where the character effect is executed as the suggestive effect during the front variable display.

Further, in the characterizing part 153SG of the above-described embodiment, as the pre-reading notice, the reserved memory display is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 153SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 153SG005U of the image display device 5 in the form of a white square, star, blue or red camera. As shown in FIG. 9-33(B), when the reserved memory display is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 153SG005D or the second reserved memory display area 153SG005U and the predetermined effect image 153SG005E overlaps the first reserved memory display area 153SG005D or the second reserved memory display area 153SG005U in the image display device 5, at least the reserved memory display in the form of a blue or red camera is displayed. It may be displayed with priority over the effect image 153SG005E (the reserved memory display in the blue or red camera mode may be displayed so as not to be hidden by the effect image 153SG005E). By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the reserved memory display of the blue or red camera mode due to the effect image 153SG005E blocking the reserved memory display of the blue or red camera mode.

Further, in the characterizing portion 153SG of the above-described embodiment, a mode in which the setting suggestion effect can be executed for 7 seconds only during the variable display of the super reach has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modification 153SG-3, as shown in FIGS. Furthermore, during the variable display of the shortened non-reach, a period dedicated to the variable display of the shortened non-reach (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-34 (C), the special figure fluctuation time of the variable display of the shortened non-reach 3.75 seconds to 3 seconds shorter than 5.75 seconds).

Further, in the characterizing part 153SG of the embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-22(A), as the holding display forewarning effect, the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect is different between the case where the holding memory display is displayed in the blue camera mode and the case where the red camera mode is displayed. At least one effect pattern may be determined at different ratios. By doing so, the player can be made to pay attention to which of the mode of the blue camera or the mode of the red camera the suspension storage display is displayed as the suspension display advance notice performance, so that the game interest can be improved.

In addition, in the characterizing part 153SG of the above-described embodiment, two timings (25 seconds and 30 seconds after the start of variable display) are provided as the start timing of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display during the variable display of super reach, and the setting suggestion effect is more likely to be executed as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display when the suggestion effect during the rear variable display is executed at a later timing. In the case of 30 seconds later, the setting suggesting performance may be executed in a performance pattern suggesting a high set value such as patterns SS-3 to SS-5 at a higher rate than in the case of setting the timing of starting the setting suggesting performance 25 seconds after the start of the variable display. By doing so, it is possible to attract the player's attention to the timing at which the setting suggestion effect is executed, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, in the characterizing portion 153SG of the above-described embodiment, a form is exemplified which suggests whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed according to the effect executed as the suggesting effect during the front variable display and the display mode of the pending memory display displayed as the pending display forewarning effect. You may In addition, in the characterizing part 153SG of the above-described embodiment, a configuration in which the setting suggestion effect can be executed as the rear part variable display suggestive effect during the variable display in which the timer effect as the front part variable display suggestive effect is executed was exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this.

Further, in the characterizing part 153SG of the above-described embodiment, when the suspension display forewarning effect is already executed, the execution of the new suspension display forewarning effect is restricted. For example, when the pending display forewarning effect has already been executed in the display pattern γ or the display pattern δ (when the pending memory display is displayed in a blue or red camera mode), only execution of a new pending display forewarning effect in the display pattern α or the display pattern β (the pending memory display is displayed in a white square or star shape) is restricted. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming difficult to understand due to the simultaneous execution of a plurality of pending display forewarning effects with different suggested contents. Furthermore, when the pending display advance notice performance is already executed in the display pattern γ or the display pattern δ, by restricting the execution of the new pending display notice performance in the display pattern α or the display pattern β, the player can be made to pay more attention to whether or not the setting suggestion performance is executed. In addition, when the pending display forewarning effect has already been executed in the display pattern α or the display pattern β (when the pending memory display is displayed in a white square or star shape), by restricting only execution of the new pending display forewarning effect in the display pattern γ or the display pattern δ (the pending memory display is displayed in a blue or red camera mode), the player can be made to pay more attention to whether the variable display result becomes a big hit or not.

In addition, in the characterizing part 153SG of the above-described embodiment, a form in which the pending display notice effect can be executed as the prefetch effect in the present invention is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as the prefetch effect, any effect other than the hold display notice effect may be executed as long as it is executable from the timing before the target variable display starts.

In addition, in the characterizing part 153SG of the above-described embodiment, the form in which the character effect and the timer effect can be executed as the suggestive effect during the front variable display indicating that the variable display result will be a big hit was exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this.

(Description on Characteristic Portion 092IW)
Next, the characteristic portion 092IW will be described. In this characteristic part 092IW, it is possible to execute a big win suggesting performance suggesting that the variable display result of the variable display will be a big win, and a preparation performance for notifying that the big win suggesting performance will be executed before the big win suggesting performance is executed. Incidentally, the big win suggesting performance whose execution is announced by the preparation performance may be either a look-ahead foretelling performance for foretelling the reliability of the big win in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended) or a foretelling performance for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display during execution. In this characterizing section 092IW, as the jackpot suggesting effects, it is possible to execute a pending display forewarning effect, a timer effect, and a chance eye forewarning effect. In addition, as preparation performances for notifying that the big win suggesting performance is executed before the big win suggesting performance is executed, a reservation display advance notice preparation performance for notifying that the reservation display foretelling performance will be executed before the reservation display foretelling performance is executed, and a timer preparation performance for notifying that the timer performance will be executed before the timer performance is executed can be executed.

FIG. 10-1 is a part of the flow chart of the effect control process (step S76) in this characterizing part 092IW. In the effect control process processing in this characteristic part 092IW, after executing the pre-reading notice setting process (step S161) in which determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice effect shown in FIG.

FIG. 10-2 is a flow chart showing the pre-reading notice setting process (step S161) executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the effect control process shown in FIG. 10-1.

In the pre-reading notice setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not a new command for one set of starting winnings has been received (step 092IWS001). Specifically, it is checked whether or not one set of start winning designation command, symbol designation command, variation category designation command, and pending memory number notification command is newly stored in the reception command buffer at the time of start winning. In this example, in the command analysis process (step S75), when the command at the time of starting winning is received, the received command at the time of starting winning is stored in the received command buffer at the time of starting winning provided in RAM122. In this example, since the upper limit of the number of first reserved memories and the number of second reserved memories is 4, the start winning reception command buffer is provided with four storage areas corresponding to the first reserved memories and the second reserved memories. If the command for one set of start winning has not been newly received, the process is terminated as it is.

When one set of starting winning command is newly received, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the pre-reading advance notice effect is being executed (step 092IWS001). If the pre-reading advance notice effect is being executed, the process is terminated as it is (that is, no new pre-reading notice effect is executed).

If the pre-reading advance notice effect is not being executed, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the number of pending memories is 2 or more (step 092IWS002). If the number of pending memories is not 2 or more, the process is terminated as it is (that is, no new pre-reading announcement effect is executed). It should be noted that whether or not the number of reserved memories is two or more can be determined, for example, by confirming the number of reserved memories notification command received from the game control microcomputer 100 .

When the pending storage number is 2 or more, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the pending display notice effect and the effect mode in the case of execution (step 092IWS003).

The pending display notice performance is a performance suggesting that the display result of the corresponding variable display will be a big win by changing the display mode of the pending memory display (and the active display) to a display mode different from the normal mode. In this characteristic part 092IW, the pattern of changing the display mode at the time of being displayed as the pending memory display is shown as the pending display notice effect, but the configuration is not limited to such a configuration, and a pattern of displaying in the normal mode when being displayed as the pending memory display and changing the display mode when being displayed as the active display may be included. That is, it may be configured to be able to execute the pending display announcement effect that changes the display mode of the pending memory display or the active display at any timing from the start winning time until the end of the target variable display. Similarly, the suspension display advance notice preparation effect for notifying that the suspension display notice effect will be executed may be configured to be executable at an arbitrary timing from the start winning point to the end of the target variable display. Also, the display mode of the pending memory display or the active display may be configured to change multiple times. In the case of such a configuration, it may be possible to execute a corresponding pending display announcement preparation effect for each pending display announcement effect.

FIG. 10-3(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a pending display notice effect determination table. In step 092IWS003, a random number for determination of performance is extracted, and a pending display notice performance determination table is referred to, and based on whether the newly received command (symbol designation command and variable category command) at the time of start winning corresponds to "non-reach loss", "super reach loss", "jackpot other than jackpot A", or "jackpot A", the suspension display notice performance is set to "no execution, suspension memory display: normal mode (white)", or "executed". One of the following is determined: "Reserved memory display: first effect mode (blue)", "executed, reserved memory display: second effect mode (green)", and "executed, reserved memory display: third effect mode (red)".

In the pending display notice effect determination table shown in FIG. 10-3(A), a determination value corresponding to a random number for determination of effect is assigned for each winning determination result, but for the sake of simplification of explanation, the ratio of the assigned determination value is shown. In other words, for each prize-winning determination result, the ratio of whether the pending display notice effect is determined to be any one of “no execution, pending memory display: normal mode (white)”, “executed, pending memory display: first effect mode (blue)”, “executed, pending memory display: second effect mode (green)”, and “executed, pending memory display: third effect mode (red)” is shown. In this example, in addition to the pending display notice effect determination table shown in FIG. 10-3(A), the pending display notice preparation effect determination table shown in FIG. 10-3(B), the timer effect determination table shown in FIG. 10-4(A), the timer preparation effect determination table shown in FIG. 10-4(B), and the chance eye preview effect determination table shown in FIG.

Features of the pending display notice effect determination table will be described. As shown in FIG. 10-3(A), in the pending display notice effect determination table, when the judgment result at the time of winning is "big win", compared with the case of "losing", the decision value is assigned such that the percentage of the pending display notice effect determined to be "executed" is higher than "not executed". In addition, in the pending display notice effect determination table, when the judgment result at the time of winning is "big win", the determination value is assigned such that the ratio of "executed pending memory display: third effect mode (red)" is higher than "executed pending memory display: first effect mode (blue)" than "executed pending memory display: second effect mode (green)" and "executed pending memory display: second effect mode (green)" than "executed pending memory display: third effect mode (red)". With such a configuration, when the reserved display forewarning performance is executed, furthermore, when the performance is executed in the second performance mode (green) rather than the first performance mode (blue) and in the third performance mode (red) rather than the second performance mode (green), it is suggested that a big hit will be achieved. That is, the degree of expectation for a big win increases in the order of third rendering mode (red)>second rendering mode (green)>first rendering mode (blue)>no execution.

If it is determined not to execute the pending display notice effect in step S092IWS003 (N of step S092IWS004), the process proceeds to step S092IWS008, and if it is determined to be executed (Y of step S092IWS004), the effect control CPU 120 sets a pending display notice effect flag indicating that it is decided to execute the pending display notice effect (step S092IWS005).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect mode of the pending display notice preparation effect (step S092IWS006). The pending display advance notice preparation effect is one of the preparation effects, and foretells that the pending display advance notice effect will be executed before the pending display advance notice effect is executed.

FIG. 10-3(B) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a pending display advance notice preparation effect determination table. At step 092IWS006, a random number for determination of performance is extracted, a pending display advance notice preparation performance determination table is referred to, and one of ``no execution'', ``first performance mode with execution (small effect)'', and ``second performance mode with execution (large effect)'' is determined for the suspension display advance notice preparation performance based on the performance mode of the suspension display previous notice performance.

Features of the pending display advance notice preparation effect determination table will be described. As shown in FIG. 10-3(B), in the pending display advance notice preparation effect determination table, determination values are assigned so that the higher the degree of expectation of the effect mode of the pending display notice preparation effect for a big hit, the higher the ratio of the pending display advance notice preparation effect being determined to be "executed" rather than "not executed". In addition, in the pending display advance notice preparation performance determination table, determination values are assigned so that the higher the performance mode of the pending display notice performance is expected to become a big win, the higher the ratio of the determination of the ``second performance mode with execution (large effect)'' to the ``first performance mode with execution (small effect)''. With such a configuration, when the reservation display advance notice preparation performance is executed, and furthermore, when it is executed in the second performance mode (large effect) rather than the first performance mode (small effect), it is suggested that a big win will occur. In other words, the degree of expectation for a big win increases in the order of second presentation mode (large effect)>first presentation mode (small effect)>no execution.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the reserved storage number is 3 or more (step 092IWS007). If the reserved storage number is not equal to or greater than 3, the process ends. It should be noted that whether or not the number of pending memories is 3 or more can be determined, for example, by confirming the pending memory number notification command received from the game control microcomputer 100 .

When the number of pending memories is 3 or more, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the timer effect and the effect mode in the case of execution (step 092IWS008).

The timer effect is a effect suggesting a period from the start timing of the target variable display to the start of execution of the specific effect (for example, the effect suggesting during the rear variable display in the characteristic part 153SG) as well as suggesting that the result of the variable display will be a big hit.

In this characteristic part 092IW, the timer effect is executed during the target variable display. Therefore, for example, it is realized by setting the effect control pattern for executing the timer effect in the variable display start setting process (S171) of the variable display determined to execute the timer effect, and executing various effect controls based on the effect control pattern in the effect process (S172) during the variable display).

In addition to the configuration of the characteristic part 092IW, for example, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute a timer preparation effect, which will be described later, and the effect mode in the case of execution, without determining whether or not to execute the timer effect at the time of starting winning, and to determine whether or not to execute the timer effect when the target variable display is started. Further, in this case, whether or not to execute the timer effect and the effect mode in the case of execution may be determined at different ratios according to whether or not the timer preparation effect is to be executed and the effect mode.

Further, for example, the timer performance may be started during the variable display executed before the target variable display, or may be started at a timing after a predetermined period has passed since the target variable display is started. That is, the timer effect may be started at an arbitrary timing from the timing of starting winning to the end of the target variable display. Similarly, the timer preparation performance for notifying that the timer performance will be executed may be started at an arbitrary timing from the timing of starting prize winning to the end of the target variable display (however, until the timing at which the execution period of the timer performance can be secured).

FIG. 10-4(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a timer effect determination table. In step 092 IWS008, a random number for determining the effect is extracted, and the timer effect determination table is referred to. Based on whether the newly received command (symbol designation command and variable category command) at the time of starting winning corresponds to "non-super reach", "super reach loss", or "super reach jackpot", the timer effect is set to "no execution", "first effect mode with execution (25 seconds)", or "second effect mode with execution (30 seconds)". Decide on one.

Features of the timer effect determination table will be described. As shown in FIG. 10-4(A), in the timer effect determination table, the determination values are assigned so that when the winning determination result is a "big hit", the ratio of timer effect determined to be "executed" is higher than "not executed" compared to the case of "lose". In addition, in the timer performance determination table, when the determination result at the time of winning is ``big hit'', the determination value is assigned so that the ratio of determination to ``second performance mode with execution (30 seconds)'' is higher than that of ``first performance mode with execution (25 seconds)'' compared to the case of ``losing''. With such a configuration, when the timer performance is executed, and furthermore, when the second performance mode (30 seconds) is executed rather than the first performance mode (25 seconds), it is suggested that a big win is achieved. That is, the degree of expectation for a big win increases in the order of second presentation mode (30 seconds)>first presentation mode (25 seconds)>no execution.

When it is determined not to execute the timer effect in step S092IWS008 (N of step S092IWS009), the process proceeds to step S092IWS012, and when it is determined to be executed (Y of step S092IWS009), the effect control CPU 120 sets a timer effect flag indicating that the timer effect is determined to be executed (step S092IWS010).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect mode of the timer preparation effect (step S092IWS011). The timer preparation effect is one of the preparation effects, and foretells that the timer effect will be executed before the timer effect is executed.

FIG. 10-4(B) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a timer preparation effect determination table. At step 092IWS006, a random number for determination of performance is extracted, a timer preparation performance determination table is referred to, and one of "no execution", "first performance mode with execution (small effect)" and "second performance mode with execution (large effect)" is determined for the timer preparation performance based on the performance mode of the timer performance.

Features of the timer preparation effect determination table will be described. As shown in FIG. 10-4(B), in the timer preparation effect determination table, determination values are assigned such that the higher the degree of expectation of the timer effect effect for a big hit, the higher the ratio of determination of "executed" to "non-executed" for the timer preparation effect. In addition, in the timer preparation performance determination table, determination values are assigned so that the rate of determination of ``second performance mode with execution (character B)'' is higher than that of ``first performance mode with execution (character A)'' as the performance mode of the timer performance has a high expectation of winning a big hit. With such a configuration, when the timer preparation performance is executed, and furthermore, when it is executed in the second performance mode (character B) rather than the first performance mode (character A), it is suggested that a big win is achieved. That is, the degree of expectation for a big win increases in the order of second effect mode (character B)>first effect mode (character A)>no execution.

This characterizing portion 092IW is configured such that the effect mode of the executable jackpot suggestive effect is different depending on which effect mode of the preparation effect is executed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-3(B), when the holding display advance notice preparation effect of the first effect mode is executed, the holding display advance notice effect is executed in one of the first to third effect modes, and when the holding display advance notice preparation effect of the second effect mode is executed, the holding display advance notice effect is executed in one of the second to third effect modes. Further, as shown in FIG. 10-4(B), when the timer preparation effect of the first effect mode is executed, the timer effect is executed by one of the first to second effect modes, and when the timer effect of the second effect mode is executed, the timer effect is executed by the second effect mode. With such a configuration, the degree of expectation can be varied according to the performance mode of the preparation performance, and the degree of expectation when executed in combination with other preparation performance or big hit suggesting performance can be suitably adjusted for each performance mode of the preparation performance (that is, each degree of expectation).

Also, in this characterizing portion 092IW, the big hit suggestion effect is configured to be executable without executing the corresponding preparation effect. Specifically, when it is decided to execute a pending display notice effect or a timer effect, it may be determined not to execute a pending display notice preparation effect or a timer preparation effect (see FIGS. 10-3 (B) and 10-4 (B)). And it is configured such that the easiness of execution differs depending on whether or not an uncorresponding preparation effect has been executed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-3, when the result of determination at the time of winning is a big hit, it is likely to be determined to execute the pending display notice effect and the pending display notice preparation effect. Also, as shown in FIG. 10-4, it is likely to be decided to execute the timer effect. However, it may be decided not to execute the timer preparation effect. Then, when the pending display advance notice preparation effect not corresponding to the timer effect is executed, the timer effect is more likely to be executed than when the pending display advance notice preparation effect is not executed. With such a configuration, interest can be preferably maintained.

In this characterizing part 092IW, when the preparation performance is executed, the corresponding big win suggestion performance is always executed, but for example, as the preparation performance, the normal preparation performance in which the corresponding big win suggestion performance is executed after the performance and the false preparation performance in which the corresponding big win suggestion performance is not executed after the performance may be executable. In this case, when the false reservation display advance notice preparation performance is executed, the timer performance (which may or may not be accompanied by the timer preparation performance) may be executed at a higher rate than when the false reservation display advance notice preparation performance is not executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the disappointment of the player when the pending display advance notice preparation effect is false, and it is possible to preferably maintain the interest.

Further, in this characteristic portion 092IW, the proportion of which performance mode of the jackpot suggestive effect is executed differs depending on whether or not the preparation effect is executed. Specifically, when the performance mode of the pending display advance notice effect and the timer preparation effect is determined to be the second effect mode, compared with the case of determining the first effect mode, the rate of deciding to execute the pending display advance notice preparation effect and the timer preparation effect is higher (see FIGS. 10-3 (B) and 10-4 (B)). With such a configuration, interest can be preferably maintained.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the chance eye announcement effect (step 092IWS012).

The chance eye advance notice performance is a performance suggesting that the variable display result of the target variable display (or one of the variable displays retained and stored without specifying the target variable display) will be a big hit by deriving and displaying the chance eye pattern (in this example, a combination of decoration patterns of ``123'') as the display result of the variable display executed before the target variable display.

FIG. 10-5(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a chance eye announcement effect determination table. In step 092 IWS012, a random number for determination of performance is extracted, a chance prediction performance determination table is referenced, and the chance prediction performance is determined to be either ``no execution'' or ``with execution'' based on which of ``non-super reach'', ``super reach loss'', ``jackpot other than jackpot A'' and ``jackpot A'' corresponds to the newly received command (symbol designation command and variable category command) at the time of start winning.

The feature of the chance eye announcement effect determination table will be described. As shown in FIG. 10-5(A), in the chance notice effect determination table, when the result of judgment at the time of winning is "big hit", the judgment value is assigned so that the ratio of determination of "executed" to "not executed" for the chance notice effect is higher than in the case of "lose". With such a configuration, it is suggested that there will be a big hit when the chance's foretelling effect is executed.

This characteristic part 092IW is configured to be able to execute a pending display notice effect, a timer effect, and a chance notice effect as the jackpot suggestion effects, but as shown in FIGS. There is a small difference in the execution ratio between when you win and when you lose. Therefore, the degree of expectation for a big win is lower in the chance-eye forewarning effect than in the pending display forewarning effect and the timer effect.

When it is decided not to execute the chance prediction effect in step S092IWS012 (N of step S092IWS013), the process proceeds to step S092IWS015, and when it is decided to execute it (Y of step S092IWS013), the effect control CPU 120 sets a chance prediction effect flag indicating that it is decided to execute the chance prediction effect (step S092IWS014).

Next, when the pending display notice effect flag is set (step S092IWS015: Y), the effect control CPU 120 displays a new pending memory display according to the decision of the pending display notice preparation effect (step S092IWS016).

In step S092IWS016, for example, if it is determined to execute the pending display advance notice preparation effect of the first effect mode, the image display device 5 displays a new pending memory display in the normal mode, and displays a small effect image (see, for example, the small effect image 092IW004b in FIG. 10-11 (B1)) near the pending memory display. Also, when it is decided to execute the pending display advance notice preparation effect of the second effect mode, the image display device 5 displays a new pending memory display in the normal mode, and displays a large effect image (see, for example, the large effect image 092IW004b in FIG. 10-11 (A1)) near the pending memory display.

Next, if the timer effect flag is not set (N of step S092IWS017), the effect control CPU 120 ends the processing as it is, and if the timer effect flag is set (Y of step S092IWS017), it confirms whether or not the pending display advance notice preparation effect is the first effect mode (step S092IWS018). Then, when the pending display advance notice preparation effect is the first effect mode (Y in step S092IWS018), effect control CPU 120 executes a timer preparation effect (step S092IWS019). After that, the process ends.

In step S092IWS019 (and step S092IWS022 to be described later), for example, when it is decided to execute the timer preparation effect of the first effect mode, the image display device 5 displays a character A image (for example, see the image 092IW005 of character A in FIG. 10-10(E)) for notifying that the timer effect will be executed. Further, when it is decided to execute the timer preparation effect of the second effect mode, the image display device 5 displays a character B image for notifying that the timer effect will be executed.

When the pending display notice effect flag is not set in step S092IWS015 (N of step S092IWS015), effect control CPU 120 displays a new pending storage display in a normal mode (step S092IWS020).

Next, when the timer effect flag is not set (N of step S092IWS021), the effect control CPU 120 ends the processing as it is, and when the timer effect flag is set (Y of step S092IWS021), the timer preparation effect is executed (step S092IWS022). After that, the process ends.

FIG. 10-6 is a flow chart showing a pre-reading notice execution process (step 092IWS161) executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the effect control process shown in FIG. 10-1.

In the pre-reading notice execution process, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not the pending display notice effect flag is set (step 092IWS102) when it is time to shift the reserved storage (Y in step 092IWS101).

When the pending display notice effect flag is set (Y in step 092IWS102), the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the pending display notice preparation effect is being executed (step 092IWS103).

When the pending display notice preparation effect is being executed (Y in step 092IWS103), the effect control CPU 120 ends the pending display notice preparation effect and executes the pending display notice preparation effect (step 092IWS104).

Next, when the timer effect flag is set (Y of step 092IWS105), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the timer preparation effect is being executed (step 092IWS106).

When the timer preparation effect is not being executed (N of step 092IWS103), the effect control CPU 120 executes the timer preparation effect (step 092IWS107).

Next, execution timings of the pending display notice effect and the pending display notice preparation effect, and the timer effect and the timer preparation effect will be described. FIG. 10-7 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the execution timing of the pending display notice effect (preparation effect) and the timer effect (preparation effect).

FIG. 10-7(A) shows an example of a case where it is decided to execute the suspension display notice effect and the suspension display notice preparation effect at the time of starting winning. In this case, the pending display notice preparation effect is started at the timing of the start winning (for example, corresponding to the processing of steps 092IWS015 to 092IWS016 of the prefetching notice setting process shown in FIG. 10-2), and the holding display notice preparation effect is completed at the shift timing of the hold storage and the holding display notice preparation effect is executed (for example, corresponding to the processing of steps 092IWS101 to 092IWS104 of the prefetching notice execution process shown in FIG. 10-6). .

FIG. 10-7(B) shows an example of a case where it is decided to execute the timer effect and the timer advance notice preparation effect at the time of starting winning. In this case, the timer preparation effect is started at the timing of the start winning (for example, corresponding to the processing of steps 092IWS021 to 092IWS022 of the pre-reading notice setting process shown in FIG. 10-2), the timer preparation effect is completed at the start timing of the target variable display, and the timer effect is started (for example, the effect control pattern for executing the timer effect is set in the variable display start setting process (S171), and the output control pattern is set in the variable display effect process (S172). It is realized by executing various production control based on).

FIG. 10-7(C) shows an example of a case where it is decided to execute a pending display notice effect and a pending display notice preparation effect (first effect mode) and a timer effect and a timer notice preparation effect at the start winning. In this case, the pending display notice preparation effect (first effect mode) is started at the timing of the start winning (e.g., corresponding to steps 092IWS015 to 092IWS016 of the prefetching notice setting process shown in FIG. 10-2), and the timer preparation effect is started (for example, corresponding to steps 092IWS018 to 092IWS019 of the prefetching notice setting process shown in FIG. 10-2). Then, at the shift timing of the pending memory, the pending display notice preparation effect is finished and the pending display notice effect is executed (for example, corresponding to steps 092IWS101 to 092IWS104 of the pre-reading notice execution process shown in FIG. 10-6). After that, at the start timing of the target variable display, the timer preparation effect is finished and the timer effect is started (for example, by setting the effect control pattern for executing the timer effect in the variable display start setting process (S171) and executing various effect controls based on the output control pattern in the effect process during the variable display (S172)).

FIG. 10-7(D) shows an example of a case where it is decided to execute a pending display notice effect and a pending display notice preparation effect (second effect mode) and a timer effect and a timer notice preparation effect at the start winning. In this case, the pending display notice preparation effect (first effect mode) is started at the timing of the start winning (for example, it corresponds to the processing of steps 092IWS015 to 092IWS016 of the prefetching notice setting process shown in FIG. 10-2), but the timer preparation effect is not started (for example, it corresponds to the processing of step 092IWS018 of the prefetching notice setting process shown in FIG. 10-2). Then, when the pending display advance notice preparation effect is completed at the shift timing of the hold storage and the pending display notice preparation effect is executed (for example, corresponding to the processing of steps 092IWS101 to 092IWS104 of the prefetching notice execution processing shown in FIG. 10-6), the timer preparation effect is started (for example, corresponding to the processing of steps 092IWS105 to 092IWS107 of the prefetching notice execution processing shown in FIG. 10-6). After that, at the start timing of the target variable display, the timer preparation effect is finished and the timer effect is started (for example, by setting the effect control pattern for executing the timer effect in the variable display start setting process (S171) and executing various effect controls based on the output control pattern in the effect process during the variable display (S172)).

Next, a description will be given of the effects of the pending display advance notice preparation effect and the timer preparation effect. FIG. 10-8 is an explanatory diagram showing the effects of the pending display advance notice preparation effect and the timer preparation effect.

FIG. 10-8 shows an example of a case where it is decided to execute a pending display notice effect and a pending display notice preparation effect (second effect mode) and a timer effect and a timer notice preparation effect at the time of starting winning, and corresponds to the example of FIG. 10-7 (D).

As shown in FIGS. 10-8 (A) and (B), a new starting prize occurs during the variable display, and based on the starting prize, when execution of the pending display advance notice effect and the pending display advance notice preparation effect (second effect mode) and the timer effect and timer advance notice preparation effect (first effect mode) is determined, a new pending memory display is displayed in the first pending memory display area 092IW001 and the second pending memory display area 092IW002 in the normal mode. At this time, the suspension display advance notice preparation effect (second effect mode) is started, and a lightning bolt-shaped image 092IW004a with a large effect is displayed in the vicinity of the new suspension memory display. Note that the timer advance notice preparation effect is restricted from being executed simultaneously with the pending display notice preparation effect (second effect mode), so it is not executed at this timing.

Then, as shown in Fig. 10-8 (C) to FIG. 10-8 (D), when the variable display is terminated, a shift in holding memory is performed, and a new variable display is started, the preparation for the suspension display notice (for example, the lightning -type effect of the images 092IW004a is stored. A display control that appears by acting on the memory display is performed), and a suspension display notification (3rd direction) is executed in which the display form of the holding memory is changed to red. Further, as shown in FIG. 10-8(E), a timer preparation effect (first effect mode) is started, and an image 092IW005 of character A for notifying that the timer effect will be executed is displayed.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 10-8(F) to 10-8(G), when a new variable display to be the target of the timer effect is started, the timer preparation effect (first effect mode) ends expansively, and the timer effect (first effect mode) for updating the timer for 25 seconds, which is the period until the specific effect during the variable display, is started.

This characterizing portion 092IW is configured to be able to execute a pending display notice effect and a timer effect as a jackpot suggesting effect suggesting that the variable display result of the variable display will result in a big win. In addition, a reservation display advance notice preparation performance for notifying that the reservation display notice performance will be executed before the reservation display notice performance is executed, and a timer preparation performance for notifying that the timer performance will be executed before the timer performance is executed are executable as preparation performances.

Such a preparatory performance has a function of drawing attention to the big-win suggesting performance executed after the preparatory performance, but when a plurality of preparatory performances are simultaneously executed, the player's expectations are too high, and as a result, there is a possibility that the player's interest is greatly reduced when the big win is not achieved. Therefore, in this characterizing portion 092IW, simultaneous execution of a plurality of preparation effects is restricted. Specifically, the pending display advance notice preparation effect (second effect mode) and the timer preparation effect have different execution periods and are configured not to be executed at the same time (in this example, the timer preparation effect is executed after the execution of the pending display advance notice preparation effect (second effect mode) is completed. See FIG. 10-7(D)). With such a configuration, interest can be preferably maintained.

In the configuration of the characteristic part 092IW, the execution periods of the pending display advance notice preparation effect (second effect mode) and the timer preparation effect are configured so as not to overlap at all.

In addition, in the configuration of the characteristic part 092IW, the pending display advance notice preparation effect (first effect mode) having a lower expectation level than the pending display advance notice preparation effect (second effect mode) is configured to be executable simultaneously with the timer preparation effect. Also, a plurality of preparation effects may not always be executed at the same time.

Further, for example, only when the performance mode of the reservation display advance notice preparation performance is the first performance mode with lower expectation than the second performance mode and the performance mode of the timer preparation performance is the first performance mode with lower expectation than the second performance mode, they may be simultaneously executed.

Further, for example, when a plurality of preparation performances are executed simultaneously (or when a plurality of preparation performances are simultaneously executed in a second performance mode with a high degree of expectation), a big win may be determined.

In addition, in the configuration of this characteristic portion 092IW, a pattern is shown in which the display mode of the reserved memory display (and active display) changes once, but if a pattern is provided in which the display mode of the reserved memory display (and active display) changes multiple times, when the reserved memory display (or active display) is displayed in a display mode other than the normal mode (specifically, a display mode with a higher degree of expectation), the display mode of the reserved memory display (or active display) will change. (or active display), and if the arrow pierces the reserved memory display (or active display), it changes, and if it does not pierce, it does not change.

Next, a description will be given of the processing for executing the chance prediction effect. FIG. 10-9 is a flow chart showing an example of the chance prediction setting process. The chance eye advance notice setting process is executed as part of the variable display start setting process (step S171) executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the effect control process shown in FIG. 10-1.

In the chance prediction setting process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the chance prediction effect flag is set (step 092IWS201). If the chance prediction effect flag is set, the decision table is used to determine whether or not the chance prediction effect is to be executed (step 092, IWS 202).

FIG. 10-10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a chance prediction execution propriety determination table. As shown in FIG. 10-10, when neither the pending display notice preparation effect nor the timer preparation effect is being executed, it is determined to be “executable” (that is, the execution of the chance notice effect is permitted) at a rate of 100%. In addition, when either the reserved display advance notice preparation effect or the timer preparation effect is being executed in the second effect mode, it is determined to be "executable" (that is, the execution of the chance advance notice effect is permitted) at a rate of 20%, and is decided to be "executable" (that is, the execution of the chance advance notice effect is not permitted) at a rate of 80%. In addition, when either the reserved display advance notice preparation effect or the timer preparation effect is executed in the first effect mode (and neither of them is executed in the second effect mode), it is determined to be ``non-execution'' (that is, the execution of the chance eye advance notice effect is not permitted) at a rate of 100%.

If execution of the chance eye notice effect is permitted in step 092IWS202 (Y in step 092IWS203), the chance eye symbol (in this example, a combination of decoration symbols "123") is determined as the stop symbol of the decoration symbol (step 092IWS204). It should be noted that, before step 092IWS204, when the stop design of the decoration design has already been determined, the stop design of the decoration design is changed to the chance eye design.

Next, a description will be given of the effects of the pending display notice preparation effect and the chance eye notice effect. FIG. 10-11 is an explanatory diagram showing the mode of presentation of the pending display notice preparation effect and the opportunity notice effect.

As shown in FIGS. 10-11 (A1) and (A2), when the pending display advance notice preparation effect (second effect mode) is executed and the lightning bolt type large effect image 092IW004a is displayed in the vicinity of the pending memory display, the execution of the chance advance notice effect may be permitted, and when the execution is permitted, the chance symbol (in this example, a combination of decoration symbols "123") is displayed as the stop symbol of the decoration symbol. That is, the pending display notice preparation effect (second effect mode) and the chance eye notice effect are executed simultaneously.

As shown in FIGS. 10-11 (B1) and (B2), when the pending display advance notice preparation effect (first effect mode) is executed and the small and large lightning bolt type effect image 092IW004b is displayed in the vicinity of the pending memory display, since the execution of the chance advance notice effect is not permitted, the stop pattern of the decorative pattern different from the chance eye pattern (a combination of the decorative patterns of "123" in this example) is displayed. That is, the pending display notice preparation effect (first effect mode) and the chance eye notice effect are not executed at the same time.

In this characteristic part 092IW, as a jackpot suggestion effect, a chance prediction effect can be executed separately from the pending display notice effect and the timer effect, and this chance chance notice effect is configured to be executed in the same period as the preparation effects such as the pending display notice preparation effect and the timer preparation effect (that is, it is executed during the period before the target variable display is executed. See FIGS. 10-11 (A1) and (A2)). In addition, as described above, the degree of expectation for a big win is lower in the chance eye notice effect than in the pending display notice effect and the timer effect. Therefore, when the preparation performance is being executed (that is, before the big win suggesting performance is executed and the degree of expectation is unknown), if the chance prediction performance with a low expectation of the big win is executed, there is a possibility that the performance effect of the preparation performance is lowered. Moreover, there is a possibility that the suggested degree of expectation may become difficult to understand. Therefore, the present characterizing part 092IW is configured such that the second chance notice effect is more likely to be executed when the pending display notice preparation effect or the timer preparation effect is not executed than when it is executed (for example, see FIG. 10-10). With such a configuration, interest can be preferably maintained.

Further, this characterizing part 092IW is configured such that the easiness of execution of the chance notice performance is different between when the preparation performance of the first performance mode is executed and when the preparation performance of the second performance mode with higher expectations than the first performance mode is executed. Specifically, the chance notice effect is configured to be more likely to be permitted when the pending display notice preparation effect is executed in the second effect mode (large effect) than when it is executed in the first effect mode (small effect) (see FIG. 10-10). With such a configuration, it is possible to preferably maintain interest while securing an opportunity to execute the chance prediction effect.

As described above, the characteristic part 092IW includes a suggestive effect executing means capable of executing a suggestive effect (for example, a pending display notice effect, a timer effect, a chance notice effect, etc.) that suggests being controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state), and a preparation effect executing means capable of executing a preparatory effect (for example, a pending display notice preparation effect, a timer preparation effect, etc.) that foretells that the suggestive effect will be executed before the suggestive effect is executed. ) and a second suggestive effect (e.g., timer effect) different from the first suggestive effect, the preparation effect includes a first preparation effect (e.g., pending display advance notice preparation effect) for notifying that the first suggestive effect will be executed, and a second preparatory effect (e.g., timer preparation effect) for notifying that the second suggestive effect will be executed, the first suggestive effect and the second suggestive effect can be executed at the same time, and the first preliminary effect and the second preparatory effect are restricted from being executed at the same time (e.g., the pending display). The advance notice preparation effect (second effect mode) and the timer preparation effect are not executed at the same time (see FIG. 10-7(D)). Therefore, interest can be preferably maintained.

In addition, the characteristic part 092IW includes a suggestive effect execution means capable of executing a suggestive effect (for example, a pending display notice effect, a timer effect, a chance notice effect, etc.) suggesting that the system is controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state), and a preparation effect executing means capable of executing a preparation effect (for example, a pending display notice preparation effect, a timer preparation effect, etc.) for notifying that the suggestive effect will be executed before the suggestive effect is executed. A second suggesting effect (e.g., timer effect) different from the first suggesting effect and a third suggesting effect (e.g., a chance notice effect) different from the first suggesting effect and the second suggesting effect are included, and the preparation effect includes a first preparatory effect (e.g., pending display advance notice preparation effect) for notifying that the first suggesting effect will be executed, and a second preparatory effect (e.g., timer preparation effect) for notifying that the second suggesting effect will be executed, and the third suggesting effect, the first preparatory effect, and the second preparatory effect are for the same period. (See FIGS. 10-11 (A1) and (A2)), and the third suggestion effect is more likely to be executed when neither the first preparation effect nor the second preparation effect is being executed than when either the first preparation effect or the second preparation effect is being executed (see, for example, FIGS. 10-10). Therefore, interest can be preferably maintained.

In addition, the characteristic part 092IW is provided with a suggestive effect execution means capable of executing a suggestive effect (for example, a pending display advance notice effect, a timer effect, a chance advance notice effect, etc.) suggesting control to be in an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state), and a preparation effect execution means capable of executing a preparation effect (for example, a hold display advance notice preparation effect, a timer preparation effect, etc.) to foretell that the suggestive effect will be executed before the suggestive effect is executed, and the suggestive effect includes a plurality of types of first suggestive effects (for example, effect modes) with different degrees of expectation. and a second suggestion effect (for example, a timer effect) different from the first suggestion effect, the first suggestion effect includes a predetermined first suggestion effect and a special first suggestion effect with a higher expectation level than the predetermined first suggestion effect (including, for example, a first effect mode (blue) suspension display notice effect and a third effect mode (red)); and a second preparation effect (for example, a timer preparation effect) for notifying that the second suggestion effect will be executed, and the first preparation effect has a first effect mode and a second effect mode in which the special first suggestion effect is more likely to be executed than the first effect mode (for example, there are a first effect mode (small effect) and a second effect mode (large effect), and when the second effect mode (large effect) is executed, the first effect mode (blue color) is executed. ) is not executed, and the pending display notice effect of the third effect mode (red) is likely to be executed.See FIG. 10-3 (B)), the execution ratio of the second preparation effect differs between when the first preparation effect of the first effect mode is executed and when the first preparation effect of the second effect mode is executed (for example, the timer preparation effect is executed at the same time when the pending display notice preparation effect of the first effect mode (small effect) is being executed, but the pending display notice effect of the second effect mode (large effect) is executed. When the preparation effect is being executed, it is not executed at the same time (see FIG. 10-7). Therefore, interest can be preferably maintained.

In addition, the characteristic part 092IW is provided with a suggestive effect execution means capable of executing a suggestive effect (for example, a pending display advance notice effect, a timer effect, a chance advance notice effect, etc.) suggesting control to be in an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state), and a preparation effect execution means capable of executing a preparation effect (for example, a hold display advance notice preparation effect, a timer preparation effect, etc.) to foretell that the suggestive effect will be executed before the suggestive effect is executed, and the suggestive effect includes a plurality of types of first suggestive effects (for example, effect modes) with different degrees of expectation. a second suggestion effect (for example, a timer effect) different from the first suggestion effect (for example, a timer effect); and a third suggestion effect (for example, a chance preview effect) different from the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect (for example, a second suggestion effect), and the first suggestion effect includes a predetermined first suggestion effect and a special first suggestion effect with a higher expectation level than the predetermined first suggestion effect (for example, a first effect mode (blue) with a hold display notice effect and a third effect mode (red) with a hold display notice effect). The preparation effect includes a first preparation effect (for example, a pending display notice preparation effect) for notifying that the first suggestion effect will be executed, and a second preparation effect (for example, a timer preparation effect) for foretelling that the second suggestion effect will be executed. There is a second effect mode in which the special first suggestive effect is more likely to be executed than the first effect mode (for example, there is a first effect mode (small effect) and a second effect mode (large effect), and when the pending display advance notice preparation effect of the second effect mode (large effect) is executed, the pending display advance notice effect of the first effect mode (blue) is not executed, and the pending display advance notice effect of the third effect mode (red) is likely to be executed. See FIG. 10-3 (B)), when the first preparation effect of the first effect mode is executed. and when the first preparation effect of the second effect mode is executed, the execution ratio of the third suggestion effect is different (for example, execution of the second chance advance notice effect is more likely to be permitted when the pending display advance notice preparation effect is executed in the second effect mode (large effect) than when it is executed in the first effect mode (small effect). See FIG. 10-10). Therefore, interest can be preferably maintained.

Further, in the present characteristic portion 092IW, the period of execution differs between the first preparation effect and the second preparation effect (for example, the timer preparation effect is executed after the execution of the pending display notice preparation effect (second effect mode) is completed. See FIG. 10-7(D)). Therefore, interest can be preferably maintained.

Further, in the present characteristic portion 092IW, the first suggestive effect is executed in any one of a plurality of types of effect modes (for example, first effect mode (blue), second effect mode (green), third effect mode (red), etc.; see FIG. 10-3(A)), and the first preparation effect is executed in any of a plurality of types of effect modes (e.g., first effect mode (small effect), second effect mode (large effect, etc.; see FIG. 10-3(B)). Depending on whether or not the first preparation performance of the performance mode is executed, the performance mode of the first suggestive performance that can be executed is different (for example, when the suspension display advance notice preparation performance of the first performance mode is executed, the suspension display notice performance is executed by one of the first to third performance modes, and when the suspension display notice preparation performance of the second performance mode is executed, the suspension display notice performance is executed by one of the second to third performance modes). Therefore, interest can be preferably maintained.

In addition, in this characteristic part 092IW, the suggestive effect can be executed without executing the corresponding preparation effect (for example, when it is decided to execute the pending display advance notice effect or the timer effect, it may be determined that the pending display advance notice preparation effect or the timer preparation effect is not executed. See FIGS. In the case of the above, it is easy to decide to execute the pending display notice effect and the pending display notice preparation effect.In addition, as shown in Figure 10-4, it is easy to decide to execute the timer effect.However, it may be decided not to execute the timer preparation effect.Then, when the pending display notice preparation effect not corresponding to the timer effect is executed, the timer effect is more likely to be executed than when the pending display notice preparation effect is not executed.) Therefore, interest can be preferably maintained.

In addition, in this characteristic part 092IW, the ratio of which suggestive effect is executed depends on whether or not the preparation effect is executed (for example, when the effect mode of the pending display advance notice effect and the timer preparation effect is determined as the second effect mode, the ratio of determining to execute the pending display advance notice preparation effect and the timer preparation effect is higher than when the first effect mode is determined. See FIG. 10-3 (B) and FIG. 10-4 (B)). Therefore, interest can be preferably maintained.

It should be noted that the configuration indicated by the characterizing portion 092IW can be appropriately combined with the configuration indicated by other characterizing portions such as the characterizing portion 153SG to form a gaming machine. For example, the timer preparation performance indicated by the characterizing part 092IW may predict that a timer performance suggesting a period until the start of execution of the suggesting performance during the rear variable display indicated by the feature part 153SG is suggested to be a big hit, and the timer performance may be made capable of executing a jackpot suggesting performance suggesting a big hit as a suggesting performance during the rear variable display during the ready-to-win performance or a setting suggesting performance suggesting a set value set in the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加

1 Pachinko machine 2 Game board 3 Game machine frame 4A, 4B Special symbol display device 5 Image display device 6A Winning ball device 6B Variable winning ball device 7 Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R Speaker 9 Game effect lamp 10 General winning port 11 Main board 12 Effect control board 13... Sound control board 14... Lamp control board 15... Relay board 20... Ordinary pattern display 21... Gate switches 22A, 22B... Starting port switch 23... Count switch 30... Ball operation handle 31A... Stick controller 31B... Push button 32... Movable body 100... Game control microcomputer 101 , 121 ... ROM
102, 122... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124... random number circuit 105, 125... I/O
120 ... CPU for production control
123: display control unit

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a suggestive effect executing means capable of executing a suggestive effect suggesting control to the advantageous state;
a preparation effect executing means capable of executing a preparation effect for notifying that the suggestive effect will be executed before the suggestive effect is executed;
The suggestive effect includes a first suggestive effect, a second suggestive effect different from the first suggestive effect, and a third suggestive effect different from the first suggestive effect and the second suggestive effect,
The preparation effect includes a first preparation effect for notifying that the first suggestive effect will be executed, and a second preparation effect for notifying that the second suggestive effect will be executed,
The first preparation effect is executed in an effect mode in which it is possible to recognize that the first suggestive effect is to be executed,
The second preparation effect is a different effect mode from the first preparation effect, and is executed in a effect mode in which it is possible to recognize that the second suggestive effect is to be executed,
The first suggestive effect is executed in any one of a plurality of types of effect modes, the first preparation effect is executed in any one of a plurality of types of effect modes, and depending on which of the effect modes the first preparation effect is executed, the executable mode of the first suggested effect differs,
The first suggestive effect and the second suggestive effect can be executed without executing the first preparation effect and the second preparation effect,
The third suggestive effect, the first preparation effect and the second preparation effect can be executed in parallel in the same period and independently of each other,
The third suggestion effect is more likely to be executed when neither the first preparation effect nor the second preparation effect is executed than when either the first preparation effect or the second preparation effect is executed.
A gaming machine characterized by: